Home

"user manual"

1. Orange a Histoncal Dats E Scilpts i Repais gi Text and Graphics Lists Runtime User dministiatoa Device Sethings TAN You can use a project for different target systems If the target system is changed only the view of the project data is modified When the target system changes configured objects are not deleted they are only hidden if some features are not supported by the target system 34 WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Introduction to WinCC flexible 7 4 Configuration concepts Customized setup of the configuration user interface WinCC flexible allows you to customize the position and reaction of windows and toolbars This allows you to configure the work environment to meet your special requirements The configuration of the WinCC flexible workbench is linked to the user logged on in Microsoft Windows On saving the project the positions and behavior of windows and toolbars are automatically saved with it When opened again the positions and behavior of windows and toolbars are identical to when the project was last saved When the working environment opens it is identical to the configuration when last closed This is also the case when a project edited by a different project planner is opened 1 4 3 PLC independent configuration Introduction WinCC flexible supports you in creating configurations independent on the destination
2. Show milliseconds J Display end S The following entries are available for outputting the alarms Attribute Function Requirement Source for alarms This is used to select the alarm source You can select from the following options e Alarm events e Alarm log Sorting This is used to specify the sequence for the output You can select from the following options e Oldest message first e Most recent message first Lines per entry This specifies the number of lines available per alarm The required number of lines depends on the number and width of the selected columns in for the output as well as the font used and the paper format of the printer Page header visible Used to specify whether the table is to be output with column headers Alarm log This is used to select the alarm log for An alarm log has to be selected output as the alarm source in the Source for alarms Alarm classes Used to select the alarm classes for the output You can select from the following options e Alarms e Alarm events e System alarms e S7 diagnostic events WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 272 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Working with reports 10 5 Reporting alarms Attribute Display beginning Function Used to select the first alarm for outputting the alarms of a specific period Connect the field via the selection list to a t
3. 3 4 Editing projects 3 4 1 Editing projects Objects and editors The following objects can be created and edited in WinCC flexible e Screens Screens are created and edited in the Screens editor It is possible to define the navigation between screens in the Screen navigation editor e Faceplates Faceplates are groups of objects which can be used as often as required in a project Faceplates are stored in libraries e Graphics list In a graphic list the values of a tag are assigned to various graphics The graphic lists are created in the Graphic List editor and displayed with the Graphic IO Field object e Text List In a text list the values of a tag are assigned to various texts The text lists are created in the Text List editor and displayed with the Symbolic IO Field object WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 91 Working with projects 3 4 Editing projects Language dependent texts and graphics Using WinCC flexible projects can be created in different languages The Project Languages editor is used to manage the languages in which the projects should run The Project Texts editor is used to manage and translate language dependent texts centrally The Graphic editor is used to manage language dependent graphics The User Dictionary editor is used to create and manage dictionaries for translating project texts The Syst
4. cccccccececeeeeeeeeaeeeceeeeeecaaeee cee eescaaeaeceseesesenaeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 21 2 1 7 Memory space requirements for recipes of Special devices ccecceceeeeeeeeeceeeeteeteestneeeees 2122 System MIMS ei 200s ai uetd ica Ree i ee eee WO eae eR eae 428 21 2 2 1 SYSLOM IMIS eien a vay sana leek vandzenvanducesancees E E laneddes vindeavany WA OX boss eves sda eis eid tee ees pa teed evade ee eet ev dea peed ner essen a cides WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 17 Table of contents 18 WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Introduction to WinCC flexible 1 1 1 Introduction to SIMATIC HMI Introduction Maximum transparency is essential for the operator who works in an environment where processes are becoming more complex and requirements for machine and plant functionality are increasing The Human Machine Interface HMI provides this transparency The HMI system represents the interface between man operator and process machine plant The PLC is the actual unit which controls the process Hence there is an interface between the operator and WinCC flexible at the HMI device and an interface between WinCC flexible and the PLC An HMI system assumes the following tasks Process visualization The process is visualized on the HMI device The screen on the HMI device is dynamically updated T
5. 7 2 Elements and basic settings The system sets default parameters Always ensure consistency on the network whenever you edit parameters For detailed information on configurable parameters refer to the description of the supported protocols 7 2 3 Area pointers for connections Introduction Structure 208 Using the Area pointer tab of the Connections editor you can configure the usage of the available area pointers The Area pointer tab contains two tables of area pointers The For all connections table contains those area pointers which are created only once in the project and can be used for only one connection The For each connection table contains the area pointers you can set separately for each available connection Parameters Area pointer For all connections rmp Connection i Date time PLC 108 108W 0 Cyclic continuous Is 1 min amp lt undefined gt Project ID l Cydic continuous efined E lt undefined gt Screen number S Cyclic continuous undefined gt For each connection DB 1 OBW 12 ar Data malbo 5 Cydic continuous ndefined E off Datejtine Codie tortie eondetnad Off job malbo 4 Cyclic continuous The availability of the various area pointers is determined by the HMI device used For detailed information on area pointers and their configuration refer to the description of the supported protocols WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV669
6. Bootstrapping If the operating system update was terminated prematurely an operating system will no longer be available on the HMI device A bootstrap operation is then the only option available for loading an operating system When an operating system is updated the communication between the configuration computer and the HMI device takes place by means of the operating system of the HMI device During a bootstrap operation however the configuration computer communicates with the boot loader of the HMI device Depending on the HMI device the communication is possible via the following connections e Via the serial connection e Via Ethernet for HMI devices without serial ports The bootstrap operation can take time Once the bootstrap operation has been started in WinCC flexible power on the HMI device must be switched off and on again booted so that the HMI device can communicate by means of the boot loader 19 2 4 Transferring authorizations Transferring license keys In order to install certain WinCC flexible runtime options the corresponding License keys must be available on the License Key storage location Transfer the required License Keys to the HMI device during installation by means of the configuration PC You can also return the License Keys to the License Key storage location for example to make these available for use on a different HMI device N CAUTION To prevent irrevocable loss of license key
7. Time_ms Specify a time stamp as a decimal value see below for conversion Only needed to display the tag values in a trend Conversion of the time stamp decimal value If the value needs to be processed using a different program proceed as follows 1 Divide Time_ms by 1 000 000 Example 36343476928 1 000 000 36343 476928 The whole number portion 36344 is the date calculated from 31 12 1899 Example 36343 results in 02 07 1999 You can now convert the time stamp value to days in Excel by assigning a corresponding format from the Date group to the cells which contain the time stamp Result 37986 results in 31 12 2003 The value after the comma 0 476928 indicates the time Multiply the value 0 476928 by 24 results in the hours 11 446272 Multiply the remainder 0 446272 by 60 results in the minutes 26 77632 Multiply the remainder 0 77632 by 60 results in the seconds 46 5792 Sum 11 26 46 579 This conversion is supported by Microsoft Excel for example 9 4 3 Accessing the ODBC log database directly Introduction The storage location of a log can be a database or a file The database is addressed by means of its Data source name DSN Select the database you would like to use in WinCC flexible in the Windows Start menu under Settings gt Control panel gt ODBC data sources To store log data specify the Data source name DSN instead of a directory name when
8. When no administrator is logged on the user view shows only the logged on user The user can change his password To change the designation the user has to be logged on as administrator WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 User administration 11 4 Working with the user administration 11 4 4 Access security Introduction You configure an authorization at an object in order to protect it against access All logged on users who have this authorization can access the object When a user does not have authorization to operate an object the logon dialog is displayed automatically Note Several system functions are available under User administration so that user password and user group can be edited for example in the control system WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO 293 User administration 11 4 Working with the user administration WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 294 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O System functions and runtime scripting 1 2 12 1 Basics 12 1 1 System functions and runtime scripting Introduction WinCC flexible provides predefined system functions for common configuration task You can use them to perform many tasks in Runtime and need no programming skills to do so You can use runtime scripting to solve more complex problems Runtime sc
9. 54 amp WinCC flexible ES Advanced Project Edt View Insert Format Faceplates Options Wind Project Edit miw w MO a x YRS sees Ne ie im Engish United States m itt 4 Ppap Recipes hmi k WinCC fle Options Window Help Cu X ei OurA MM Engbsh UntedStaes oY i tre WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 WinCC flexible Engineering System Combined frames 2 4 Working with windows and toolbars You can combine a frame with another frame Each frame is represented in the combined frame by a separate tab To change to a different frame click the corresponding tab Hiding windows automatically You can automatically hide the windows you do not require frequently This will increase your work area To restore the window to the screen click its title bar Filling level Selection Recipe view WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO wees Device_1 WinCC flexible RT E Screens C Template J dd Screen T Filling level Ox Za Project z Tags a57 Connections Cycles K3 Alarm Management E Analog Alarms E3 Discrete Alarms 55 WinCC flexible Engineering System 2 5 Working with the Mouse 2 5 Working with the Mouse Introduction Work is mainly completed with the mouse in WinCC flexible Important operating functions in this conte
10. Baer b Work area The working area is used to create and edit recipe entries and recipe data records A recipe is defined on the Entries tab Use the Data records tab to define the values for recipe data records WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 225 Structure of a recipe management system 8 2 Elements and basic settings Property view You can configure the recipe in the Property view For additional information on recipe settings refer to Recipe settings 8 2 2 Recipe elements Structure of the Elements tab Oo _ t Orange Recipe name Recipe number Name Orange Display name Orange Number 1 a Litre Concentrate Kio Sugar Gram Aroma Element name Assigned tag Elements in the Elements tab The individual recipe entries are briefly described below Recipe name The recipe name identifies the recipe uniquely within the HMI device Display name The recipe s display name appears at runtime in the recipe view for example You can configure display names in multiple languages You can also assign descriptive names or designations that relate directly to a product such as FruitJuice_Orange Recipe number The recipe number identifies the recipe uniquely within the HMI device Version The version identifies the date and time of the most recent change made to the recipe WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 226
11. Delta transfer on Windows CE devices To save time in the transfer only delta transfers can be performed on Windows CE HMI devices In the case of a delta transfer only project data that has changed relative to the data on the HMI device is transferred During a delta transfer it is possible to transfer data to the RAM memory This is advisable if a new configuration is to be tested without loss of the old configuration After a shutdown restart of the HMI device the configuration transferred to the RAM is lost and the configuration stored in the Flash memory is again applicable Delta transfer is the default setting for Windows CE HMI devices You can change this default setting in the transfer settings to force the entire project to be transferred It may be necessary to transfer the entire project for example if an executable project file no longer exists on the HMI device due to a malfunction or inconsistency after the delta transfer Note If the HMI device is a PC the complete data file is always transferred Upload When transferring you can transfer the compressed source data file along with the compiled project file to the HMI device The compressed source data file is stored on the HMI device with the same name as the project but with the extension pdz added If necessary you can back transfer this source data file onto any configuration computer Thus you can analyze and continue processing the original project
12. 4 Alarm Management EJ Analog Alarms BA Discrete Alarms H A Settings a i Recipes e Reports PE a Text and Graphics Lists a lag Runtime User Administration a De 1 Device Settings vice_2 WinCC flexible AT Screens E gt Add Screen O Template C Mixing Station of e EF lt The Project View displays the project structure hierarchically project HMI devices Folder Objects WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 WinCC flexible Engineering System 2 2 5 Introduction Description Example 2 2 WinCC flexible user interface The project view is used to create and open objects for editing You can organize your project objects in folders to create a structure Handling the Project View is similar to handling Windows Explorer Shortcut menus which consist of the most important commands are available for all objects Elements of graphic editors are displayed in the Project View and Object View Elements of tabular editors are shown only in the Object View Property view The Property View is used to edit the properties of an object selected from the work area The content of the property view is based on the selected object Gx gt Se General gt Properties gt Animations Recipe Data record View type P Events Recipe name Tag for number name Orange gt DataRecordNumber gt Advanced view Tag For number name Simple view Rec
13. Note To find out which version of Windows is installed select the General tab under Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt System 21 2 1 2 Released databases Released databases Logging with WinCC flexible Runtime is released for the following databases e MS SQL Server MS SQL Server 2000 was tested e MS Access MS Access 2000 and MS Access XP were tested e MS Data Engine MS Data Engine 2000 and MS Data Engine XP were tested WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 424 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Appendix 21 2 Performance features 21 2 1 3 Further software versions supported Further software versions required Software versions supported in WinCC flexible Software Version STEP 7 Version 5 3 SP3 SIMOTION Scout V4 0 SIMATIC NET V 6 3 HF1 07 2005 21 2 1 4 Recommended printers Recommended printers The current list of recommended printers for operator control devices can be found on the Internet at http www4 ad siemens de view cs en 11376409 21 2 1 5 Legal characters Introduction WinCC flexible supports the full ASCII character set We advise users however to refrain from using localized special characters You should in particular refrain from using these special characters in the names of objects used in scripts Illegal characters The following characters are not allowed 21 2 1 6 Memory requirement of recipes Introduct
14. You cannot assign levels of security within faceplates as a preconfigured level of security would only be valid within the faceplate and not in the project in which the faceplate instances are used To configure the security levels connect the User authorization property of the objects in the faceplate to the interface You then assign the user authorizations to the respective faceplate instance Reusing faceplates in multiple projects WinCC flexible allows you to add faceplates to a shared library This means you can use the faceplates in other projects When you add a faceplate from the shared library to the screen the system automatically saves a copy of it to the project library Change the faceplate from the project library WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 172 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Creating Screens 5 8 Working with faceplates 5 8 2 Dynamic control options Introduction You can dynamically control events and properties of faceplates in two ways e Ona faceplate instance On a faceplate instance the events or dynamic properties can be configured individually for the usage location To do this first of all set up the respective properties and events on the interface e On an object included in the faceplate You can directly configure properties events and animations for an object that is included in the faceplate The properties and animations can be interconnected with faceplate
15. Z S di texts SIMATIC PANEL Data record name 1 2 Data record name 2 4 3 Data record name 3 J Data record name 4 gt The tooltip indicates which HMI device is being configured in the editor Navigation arrows If the work area runs out of space to show all tabs the navigation arrows become active in the work area To access tabs which are no longer visible in the work area click the corresponding navigation arrow gt Recipe name Data record name Entry name lt jax asr WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO 65 WinCC flexible Engineering System 2 7 Working with WinCC flexible Closing the editor 2 7 8 Introduction To close an editor click the x symbol in the work area Object List The object list is a helpful feature for configuration tasks in WinCC flexible You can use the object list to find an existing object of the required object type and configure it directly at the place of use You can also use the object list to create new objects at the place of use Opening the object list Objects are usually edited in the property view but can also be edited directly in the table in the work area when tabular editors are used If WinCC flexible needs a connection to an object the object list opens when you click on the object selection list When for example you wish to configure a tag for
16. 6 4 4 Basic settings for alarm logs Introduction The properties of an alarm log are specified in the Alarm log editor General properties The following general properties can be established for alarm logs e Name The name of the alarm log must include at least one letter or one number WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 197 Creating an Alarm System 6 4 Alarm logging Note The characters which can be used in the name of the data source depend on the storage location e lf the storage location File is used the following characters may not be used lt gt e If the storage location Database is used the following characters may not be used a z A Z0 9_ However the characters _ may not be used as the first character of the name Storage location The alarm log may be stored in an ODBC database only on a PC or in a separate csv file Select File or Database accordingly as the storage location Depending on the configuration of the HMI device you can specify the following as the path The local hard disk of the PC The storage card of the panel If available a network drive If you choose an ODBC database as a storage location you have the following possibilities for the names of the data source System defined data source name if you want the name to be assigned by the system You will also
17. Connection established PLC 1 Station 2 Rack 0 Position 2 WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Creating an Alarm System 6 4 Alarm logging Structure of a log file in csv format The following values are entered in the individual columns of a WinCC flexible log file Parameter Time_ms Description Specify a time stamp as a decimal value see below for conversion Msg_Proc Alarm procedures 0 Unknown alarm procedure 1 System alarm 2 Alarm bit procedure operating alarms 3 Alarm number procedure ALARM_S 4 Diagnostic event 7 Analog alarm procedure 100 Alarm bit procedure fault alarms State after Msg_Class Alarm event 0 Arrived Departed 1 Arrived 2 Arrived Acknowledged Departed 3 Arrived Acknowledged 6 Arrived Departed Acknowledged Alarm class 0 No alarm classes 1 Interruption 2 Operation 3 System 64 User configured alarm classes Msg Number Alarm number Var1 to Var8 Alarm tag value as STRING Time string Time stamp as STRING i e readable date format Msg text Alarm in a readable STRING PLC Alarm localization relevant PLC Conversion of the time stamp decimal value If the value needs to be processed using a different program proceed as follows 1 Divide Time_ms by 1 000 000 Example 37986476928 1 000 000 37986 476928
18. Example of its use as combination I O box To control a motor in runtime the operator selects the text Motor OFF or Motor ON from the text list The motor is either started or stopped as selected and the Symbolic IO field indicates the current status of the motor motor OFF motor ON Graphic view The Graphic view shows you on one screen all of the graphic objects created by means of an external graphic programming tool Graphic objects can be shown in the following formats emf wmf dib bmp jpg jpeg gif and tif In the Graphic view you can also integrate graphic objects of other graphic programming tools as OLE object linking and embedding objects for example OLE objects opened and edited in the graphic program in which they were created directly from the property view of the graphic view Button The operator can use a button to control a process You can configure functions or scripts for a button Switch The switch is used in runtime to input and visualize two states for example ON and OFF or pressed and not pressed It can be labeled with text or a graphic that indicates the runtime status of the switch Bar The Bar represents a process value in the form of a scaled bar graph A bar graph allows you to visualize for example dynamic values of filling levels Enhanced objects Symbol Object Slider Description
19. Introduction The data on an HMI device should be backed up at regular intervals A data backup allows you to quickly resume operation after a system failure or when a device was replaced The backup data are simply transferred to the new HMI and thus restore the original state WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 394 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Transfer 19 2 Managing Files on the HMI Device Data backup using WinCC flexible or ProSave You can use WinCC flexible and a programming device which is connected to the HMI to backup and restore all HMI data If the computer does not have WinCC flexible installed you have the convenient option of using ProSave to perform a centralized backup Scope of data backup The backup and restore operation depends on the type of HMI device and can include the following project data e Complete backup depending on the HMI device Runtime firmware operating system image configuration recipes passwords and settings but not authorizations e Recipes only e Passwords only A backup file with the extension psb is generated when you backup the HMI data The backup can be made to any memory medium such as a data server if an appropriate connection exists between the HMI device and the memory medium Note Only use the restore function for project data on operating devices configured using the same configuration software If for example WinCC flexi
20. Menus and Toolbars Work area Project View Property view Toolbox Library Output View Object view You can access all the functions provided by WinCC flexible by means of its menus and toolbars When the mouse pointer is moved over a function a ToolTip appears Project objects are edited in the work area All WinCC flexible elements are arranged on the borders of the work area With the exception of the work area you can organize configure and for example move or hide any of the elements to suit your individual requirements All component parts and editors available in a project appear in a tree structure in the Project View Folders are provided as sub elements of each editor in which you can save objects in a structured way In addition direct access to the configured objects is available for screens recipes scripts protocols and user dictionaries In the project windows you have access to the device settings of the HMI device the language settings and the version management The Property View is used to edit object properties e g the color of screen objects The property view is only available in specific editors The toolbox contains a selection of objects which you can add to your screens e g image objects or operator control elements In addition the toolbox also provides libraries containing object templates and collections of faceplates The Library is an element of the Toolbox view The Library provi
21. New Creates a new recipe data record If a start value is configured it is shown in the input field Delete The displayed record is deleted Save as The selected data record is saved under a different name A dialog box opens in which the name is entered Rename The selected record is renamed A dialog box opens where you can enter the name Open The element list of the selected data record opens Previous The recipe list opens e Element list Menu command Function Save The selected record is renamed To PLC The display values of the selected record are transferred from the HMI device to the PLC From PLC The recipe values from the PLC are displayed on the HMI device in the recipe view Save as The data record is saved under a new name A dialog box opens where you can enter the name Press the lt ESC gt key to open the data record list WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Structure of a recipe management system 8 3 Viewing and editing recipes in Runtime The following menu commands can also be configured on the TP 177A and OP 77A HMI devices e Data record list Menu command Function To PLC The displayed values of the selected data record are transferred from the HMI device to the PLC From PLC The recipe values from the PLC are displayed in the recipe view of the HMI device Display help Displays
22. Standard Advanced 28 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Introduction to WinCC flexible 1 3 Automation concepts HMI System with centralized functions An HMI system is connected to a PC via Ethernet The upstream PC assumes central functions e g recipe management The necessary recipe data records are provided by the subordinate HMI system WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO 29 Introduction to WinCC flexible 1 3 Automation concepts Support for Mobile Units 1 3 2 Introduction 30 Mobile units are mainly implemented in large production plants long production lines or in conveyor technology but can also be implemented in systems in which direct visual contact with the process is necessary The machines to be operated are equipped with several interfaces to which the Mobile Panel 170 for example can be connected PROFIBUS The operator or service technician can thus work directly on site This enables an accurate setting up and positioning e g during the startup phase In the case of servicing mobile units ensure shorter downtimes Remote access to HMI devices By using the Sm rtService option it is possible to connect to an HMI device from a workstation via a network Internet LAN Example A medium sized production company has a service contract with an external service company When servicing is required the service technic
23. Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Working with Tags Table 4 2 Meaning of entries 4 8 Importing Tags List entry Tag name Description Specifies the configured name of a tag You can prefix the tag names with a folder tree you have set with the folder separator character for example Foldername1 Foldername2 tagname If you have enabled the Use folder delimiter check box the folder tree is created when you perform an import into WinCC flexible The list entry for Name cannot be empty The name cannot contain an apostrophe List separator character The list separator character separates the individual entries in the list You can select the character to be used for the list separator in the dialog for importing The following characters are offered for use Semicolon comma and period Use the selection field to select a character other than that shown if needed Connection name Specifies the configured name of a connection This entry is needed to match up to the corresponding entry in the import file of the connections Each external tag should have a valid entry for the name of the connection If no name is specified for the connection an internal tag is created Tag address Specifies the tag address in the PLC The tag address must exactly match the one used in WinCC flexible for example DB 1 DBW 0 and not DB1 DBWO The tag address is empty fo
24. WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 384 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 Logging changes Menu bar Toolbar Work area 18 5 2 Menu commands 18 5 Elements Under the menu item Options gt Version management you can enable and disable the change log You can open the change log from the Project versions toolbar The work area displays the modified objects and object properties In the Options gt Version management menu Change log operator controls Menu command Enable change log Short description Enables the change log Hotkeys Availability Change log is disabled Disable change log Disables the change log Change log is enabled WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O 385 Logging changes 18 5 Elements 18 5 3 Change log work area Introduction The work area displays the modified objects and object properties in the form of a table Layout The working area consists of the Changes and Details tables oooo0 ss The Changes table shows all the objects which were created modified or deleted and the changed object properties The Details table opens if you select a new object from this table The Details table shows the properties of a selected object in detail The object selected from the Changes table and the Details table are interconnected w
25. 36 Text library Reusing Faceplate Rewire Rotate Object 160 Routing connection Creating for the transfer 4 Runtime 360 Change object property with VBS 322 Completion of the function list 320 Effective range 360 Language switching 322 processing scripts 320 Scriptin 295 Task User administration Runtime error Runtime language 325 Runtime scripting 296 Runtime security setting Editor Effects in Runtime Exporting the user administration Open 2 Structure 286 Runtime security settings editor S Safety instruction Recipe data record in background save as version project integrated in STEP 7 Save as version project integrated in STEP 7 Saving as version Conversion option 99 Version overview 99 Scalability scaling Linear Scaling 450 Scaling Tag linear scaling 130 Scheduler 3 Screen Device based dependency Font Working steps in creating Screen Editor 150 Screen navigation 3 Screen Navigation Work area Script 296 299 Application 300 Basic settings 308 Call up in the script Change code formatting Help function 3 HMI device dependency In function list 3 In the script 311 organizing 299 Parameter delivery Particularity when me B20 processing in runtime 3 Properties Recursion level 296 Return value 321 Updating tag value 118 Script editor Changing syntax emphasis Edit the settings Properties 304 Script editor sea
26. Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Mobile Wireless 15 1 Basic principles WLAN area A WLAN area is the area of wireless coverage of the network with a sufficient signal strength to allow the HMI device to communicate with the PLC A Mobile Panel Wireless is used for operator control and monitoring of the plant in a WLAN area Zone A zone 1 is a spatial area immediately upstream of a machine or plant 4 registered by the Mobile Panel 5 This allows the HMI device to respond specifically when the zone is entered For example you can set it up so that the screen changes to the correct process display In a hard wired Mobile Panel the length of the connecting cable defines a zone around a connection box With a Mobile Panel Wireless the distance from one or more transponders 3 on the machine defines a zone within the WLAN area Effective range Safety related operator input is only possible in a limited part of a WLAN area upstream of a machine or plant 4 This is known as the effective range 2 One exception to this rule is the emergency stop which works in the entire WLAN area For all other safety related operator input the following requirements must be fulfilled e The HMI device 5 supports fail safe operation e g Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN e The HMI device is incorporated into the PROFIsafe communication e The HMI device must be logged into the effective range The HMI device can only log in
27. Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO 193 Creating an Alarm System 6 3 Working with alarms Implementing Alarm_S alarms of SIMOTION 194 Alarm_S alarms are also available in SIMOTION Configure the Alarm_S alarms in SIMOTION SCOUT using the Alarm configuration editor WinCC flexible processes the Alarm_S alarms of SIMOTION similar to Alarm_S alarms of STEP 7 You filter the output of ALARM_S alarms WinCC flexible by means of display classes Select Alarms gt Settings the project view and then double click Alarm settings The existing connections are displayed in the Alarm Procedures area Message Procedures Vverbindung_3 VYerbindung_2 y On xj off Alarm text ar erbindung_1 I All display class vo f169e22 f0f3 4e al 72 73 F4 f arm text and numbe v5 6 v7 Wes y9 vio Miil We vi Mi Wis Mi TE Select the field from the ALARM_S Display Classes column and the row which contains the connection to the SIMOTION device Open the selection dialog box by pressing the selection button Select the required display class Close the selection dialog dialog by pressing the kA button Go to the TO Alarms column of the connection and define whether to display the process alarms of SIMOTION For further information refer to the SIMOTION documentation The representation of the alarm classes is configured similar to the alarm classes of Alarm_S alarms of
28. Integration of WinCC flexible in STEP 7 20 4 Configuring alarms i IX K AC A m Hg a Q FALTA pS SLA 33C On incoming lt No log gt Ea off lt No log gt Fa S amp S Off lt No log gt CL LC 7OperatorInputRequest Off lt No log gt L E ControlMaintainance off lt No log gt LC off lt No log gt E J off lt No log gt Li Ei On incoming lt No log gt E L Off lt No log gt EE On incoming lt No log gt E E off lt No log gt L il off lt No log gt L C You configure the display options for the alarm classes using the Alarm Classes editor Implementing Alarm_S alarms of SIMOTION 422 Alarm_S alarms are also available in SIMOTION Configure the Alarm_S alarms in SIMOTION SCOUT using the Alarm configuration editor WinCC flexible processes the Alarm_S alarms of SIMOTION similar to Alarm_S alarms of STEP 7 You filter the output of ALARM_S alarms WinCC flexible by means of display classes Select Alarms gt Settings the project view and then double click Alarm settings The existing connections are displayed in the Alarm Procedures area V Alarm text and number off ieee Alarm text and number Off E il Alarm text a er OFF Verbindung_1 Z all display class Alarm text and number Off df169e22 FOF3 4e Alarm text and number Off lt Vi M2 v Vs Me Vo W 10 Vis M14 Select the field from the ALARM_S Display Classes column and the row which contains the
29. Read continuously 128 Start value 127 Structure 136 Structure element Synchronize in the script Tolerance band 129 Tag all STEP 7 Tag onnea Using the Tag editor 418 Tag data Format for T ea 144 Tag editor 120 to 2 aa oc BR Tag import N py 452 Data structure of connection data Format of tag data Procedure 141 Tag list Indirect addressing Tag value Output Task 3 Temporary file Deleting 111 Text entry 70 In the text list t 70 Text field 156 269 Text list 6 Application Text list 69 Text list Configuring 69 Text ist 71 Text list Default value Text list Text list Least significant bit set Text lists Using recipe data records Toggle 64 Between Runtime languages Tolerance band Tags 256 Toolbar 45 54 Configurin Docking Language support Order Positioning 44 Toolbox Write protected libraries 169 Tooltip Totally Integrated Automation 39 SIMOTION SCOUT 39 Training center ieee pwx 113 887 Basic aana 113 3 387 Delta download 390 Do not transfer object names 309 Method 389 OP 73 390 OP 73micro 390 WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Index OP 77A over routing connection 415 Overwrite recipe data 390 Recipe 391 Remove comment from script 309 TP 177A 390 TP 177micro 390 Transfer settings Upload 390 via USB 391 Transfer mode On t
30. Screen_1 The Project View display is dependent on the HMI device selected when the project was created Only those editors are displayed which are supported by the HMI device selected If for example a TP170A is configured the Log editor is not available because the TP170A does not have a logging function Select the project objects which are to be edited in the Project View To do this double click on the relevant object The corresponding editor will open WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 93 Working with projects 3 4 Editing projects Displaying objects in the Object View The Object View displays the content and associated information of the respective folders and editors selected in the Project View The Object View is displayed below the Project View by default The Object View is comprised of three columns e Object type e Name Name of the object e Info Brief information e g a comment entered by the configuration planner E bd Screen_2 Q x C a Screen_1 Objects are displayed in the Object View by the following icons iv paa Symbol Brief description Symbol Brief description Figure a Data log 2 Tag Alarm log A Analog alarm Yer Protocol x Discrete alarms ka Connection gt System alarms paes Cycle es Alarm class l Text list and graphic list Ta Alarm group User
31. Such projects are automatically converted when the WinCC flexible edition installed supports the HMI device defined Instead of a file of the type HmiProjects open one of the following types in the Open dialog e ProTool project On opening the project all data is converted Afterwards the project can only be saved as a WinCC flexible project e WinCC project WinCC Version 6 projects can only be migrated to a very limited degree to WinCC flexible WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 98 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 Working with projects 3 5 Converting projects 3 5 Converting projects 3 5 1 Projects of different WinCC flexible versions Introduction WinCC flexible automatically converts projects that were created with an earlier product version of WinCC flexible to the current version This functionality enables you to edit projects that were created with an earlier version using the current WinCC flexible version WinCC flexible also offers you the possibility of saving a project for an earlier product version The converted project can only be edited further in the selected earlier product version Conversion options WinCC flexible can be used to convert projects for the available product versions The following conversion options are available Project created with Convert to version WinCC flexible 2007 WinCC flexible 2005 SP1 WinCC flexible 2005 SP1 HF7 WinCC flexible 2
32. TSX 17 with module SCG 1161 TSX 37 Micro TSX 57 Premium e Uni Telway 1 Not possible when connected to S7 212 2 Applies to controllers SLC503 SLC504 SLC505 PLC5 MicroLogix 3 Applies to controllers SLC504 PLC5 over DF1 4 Applies to controllers SLC500 to SLC 505 and MicroLogix WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Working with a connection 7 4 Port Addresses Ethernet connection 7 4 Ethernet connection N CAUTION Ethernet communication In Ethernet based communication such as PROFINET IO HTTP Sm rtAccess Sm rtService and OPC it is the end user who is responsible for the security of his data network The proper functioning of the device cannot be guaranteed in all circumstances targeted attacks for example can lead to an overloading of the device When connecting via Ethernet you require the port addresses to for example configure a firewall or a router WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 Port address Port address TCP IP UDP S7 Communication 102 HTTP communication transfer 80 HTTPS communication transfer 443 SmartServer via Browser Control 80 5800 5900 SmartServer via SmartViewer 5900 SmartServer via Internet Explorer 5800 59 MiniWeb HTML Pages via Browser Control 80 HTTP 443 HTTP
33. The Print project documentation dialog box is accessed via e The Project gt Print project documentation menu command e The 5 command button in the Print toolbar Open the properties of the layout to be edited by using the mouse to select the layout WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 347 Project documentation 14 2 Using layouts Editing possibilities The properties of the selected layout are displayed in the Print project documentation dialog box Print documentation a Content Cover page header footer Cover page styles Page setup Default documentation Cover amp Property documentation Table of contents Screens Tags C Full Connections Cycle Screens Alarms C Graphics only Recipes Historical data Compact Properties only 2 Scripts Graphics and properties Reports C Text lists Graphics with overview Graphics lists User administration Device settings Reports Project language C Screen navigation Graphics only Navigation control settings Jobs Graphics Graphics and properties M Show tab order C Properties only Project text C System dictionary Include all Exclude all CEA The following table shows the available categories and the editing possibilities Tab Ed
34. The Slider is used for operator input and monitoring of numeric values e When used as display instrument the slider position indicates a process value which is output by the controls e The operator inputs values by changing the slider position You can customize the slider so that it operates only in vertical direction Clock On your HMI device you can view the clock in runtime either in digital or in analog format Status force The Status control functions provide direct read write access to specific address areas of the connected SIMATIC S7 or SIMATIC S5 CPU w Sm rtClient view The operator can monitor and operate a remote operator z station by means of the Sm prtClient view a HTML browser The operator can view pages in HTML format by means of the HTML browser 158 WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Creating Screens 5 3 Working with objects Symbol Object User view Description In WinCC flexible you can use passwords to control access to screen objects In the User view an administrator can manage users on the HMI device in Runtime In the User view user who do not have administrator privileges can change their password in runtime Gauge The Gauge dial can display numerical values in runtime The layout of the Gauge is configurable You can customize the background
35. The project is closed 6 If you click Cancel the process is canceled and the project is not converted Result The system has converted the integrated WinCC flexible project and it can be edited in the selected version of WinCC flexible Functionality which is also found in the target version of WinCC flexible is fully converted post configuration is not necessary for this Functionality which is not supported in the target version is not available after conversion post configuration may be necessary for this Note The HMI devices included in the project are converted to the appropriate HMI device versions for the WinCC flexible version If an HMI device is not available in the earlier version of WinCC flexible the Device Selection dialog is displayed Select a different HMI New functions from a more current WinCC flexible version are not supported in an earlier version of WinCC flexible WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO 409 Integration of WinCC flexible in STEP 7 20 1 Basic Principles 20 1 9 Integrating WinCC flexible in a PC Station Introduction The SIMATIC PC station represents a PC or an OS station that contains SIMATIC components for automation tasks e g WinCC flexible Runtime and a slot PLC or soft PLC WinCC flexible Runtime can be integrated and configured as HMI software in a PC station The HW Config editor is provided in STEP 7 to configure th
36. The selected background color is permanently linked to the image If you use the image in another WinCC flexible graphic object it is displayed with the same background color as the graphic object which was configured first If you want to use the image with different background colors you have to add this image to the image browser again under a different name Assign the additional background color to the appropriate WinCC flexible graphics object when you use the image Managing graphics With WinCC flexible an extensive collection of graphics and symbols are installed e g e Machine and plant parts e Measuring equipment e Control elements e Flags e Buildings The graphic objects are filed thematically under WinCC flexible graphics directory in the Graphics object group The reference to the graphics folder of WinCC flexible can not be removed edited or renamed You can also manage your external graphic objects using the Graphics object group Available functions e Creating a reference to the graphics folders External graphics that are placed un this directory and parent directories are shown in the toolbox window and thereby integrated into the project e Folder links Editing rename Updating Removing e You can open the program for editing external graphics from WinCC flexible WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 162 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Creating Screens
37. Wildcards and regular expressions are not taken into account e Filtering is not language dependent A configured character string remains the same after a language change e The length of the filter entry is limited to the maximum length of the alarm text The maximum length of the alarm text is determined by the HMI device used Refer to the chapter System limits section for more information about length Configure filtering in the properties of the alarm view or the alarm window Filtering is not possible for the following alarm views e Simple Alarm View e Alarm line e Alarm window which is automatically displayed e Alarm view which is configured for displaying alarms of an alarm log e Alarm window which is configured for displaying alarms of an alarm log 6 1 4 3 Logging and reporting alarms Evaluation and documentation of alarms 180 In addition to real time displays of alarm events in the alarm view and alarm window WinCC flexible offers the following options for evaluating and documenting alarms e Alarm events can be printed out immediately upon occurrence e Alarm events from the alarm buffer can be printed out in report form e Alarm events can be logged in an alarm log e Logged alarm events can be displayed on the HMI device or printed out in report form WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Creating an Alarm System 6 7 Basics Printing Alar
38. You can also insert several pages into a report in order to optically separate the configuration of various output objects The creation of a report is described in the Creating a report chapter WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O 263 Working with reports 10 3 Elements and basic settings 10 3 Elements and basic settings 10 3 1 Editor reports Introduction You can create and edit reports with the report editor Open Select the Reports entry in the project view and open the pop up menu Select the New report command in the pop up menu A new report is created and opened in the work area In order to open an existing report double click in the object view on the desired report The selected report is opened Layout BY w weve KE bewenee Menu bar The menu bar contains all commands required for operating WinCC flexible Any available shortcut keys are indicated next to the menu commands WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 264 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Working with reports Toolbars Work area Toolbox Property view 10 3 Elements and basic settings The toolbars contain the buttons most often used With menu View gt Toolbars you can display or hide the available toolbars The button of a toolbar is used to display or hide the individual buttons of this toolbar You configure the repor
39. You have read and write access to this storage location from both the HMI device and the PLC The fact that the HMI device can access data on the PLC affects which properties are available when you configure the tags The configuration possibilities supported by the following tag properties depend on the PLC that is connected to the HMI device e Addressing e Data type With linear scaling you can adjust the value range of external tags to suit the requirements of the configuration If you create an external tag in WinCC flexible you must specify the same address as it has in the PLC program This enables both the HMI device and the PLC to access the same memory location Note When you create the external tag in an integrated configuration environment you can directly access the icon in the symbol table which was created when the PLC was programmed using STEP 7 or SIMOTION Scout In this case you need only select the icon which represents the tag Further settings will then be made by WinCC flexible in accordance with the PLC program WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O 125 Working with Tags 4 3 Working with Tags Data Type Acquisition cycle Linear scaling Since external tags are the image of a defined storage location in the PLC the available data types depend on the PLC which is connected to the HMI device A detailed listing of the basic data t
40. area pointer must be set up for the required connection in the Communication gt Connections editor e The PLC with which the HMI device synchronizes the transfer is specified in the recipe properties in the Recipes editor Transfer with synchronization In the case of synchronous transfer both the PLC and the HMI device set status bits in the shared data compartment Synchronous data record transfer can be a useful solution for example when e The PLC is the active partner for the transfer of recipe data records e The PLC evaluates information about the recipe number and name as well as the recipe data record number and name e The transfer of recipe data records is started by the following PLC jobs Set_data_record_in_PLC Get_data_record_from_PLC WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 224 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Structure of a recipe management system 8 2 Elements and basic settings 8 2 Elements and basic settings 8 2 1 Recipes editor Introduction You can create configure and edit recipes recipe entries and recipe data records in the Recipes editor In addition the Recipes editor can be used to enter values in existing recipe data records Open In the Recipes group of the Project view double click on Add recipe or on an existing recipe Structure of the Recipes editor Be wick wwe AM tronet Se xX 79an i EN Work area
41. connection to the SIMOTION device Open the selection dialog box by pressing the selection button Select the required display class Close the selection dialog dialog by pressing the A button Go to the TO Alarms column of the connection and define whether to display the process alarms of SIMOTION For further information refer to the SIMOTION documentation The representation of the alarm classes is configured similar to the alarm classes of Alarm_S alarms of STEP 7 WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Appendix 21 1 Open Source Software Open Source Software WinCC flexible contains the Open Source Software among others Name Copyright Owner of License Xerxes Under Apache Software License Version 1 1 http www apache org WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 423 Appendix 21 2 Performance features 21 2 Performance features 21 2 1 General Technical Data 21 2 1 1 Released operating systems Released operating systems WinCC flexible is released for the following operating systems e Windows 2000 Professional SP4 e Windows XP Professional SP2 e Windows XP Home SP2 dD For multilingual configurations use the MUI Multilingual User Interface version of the operating system Visit the Microsoft website at http www Microsoft com 2 WinCC flexible Micro only
42. due to the display of object names and comments WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO 309 System functions and runtime scripting 12 4 Creating scripts 12 4 Creating scripts 12 4 1 Access to tags Introduction Project tags Local tags 310 In the script you have access to external and internal tags which you set up in the project The value of a tag can be read or changed in runtime Furthermore you can set up local tags as a counter or as buffer storage in the script The script fetches the value of the external tag from Runtime memory At the start of Runtime the actual value will be read from the PLC and written to Runtime memory Next the tag value will be updated to the set cycle time The script first accesses tag values read from the PLC at the previous scan cycle checkpoint If the tag name in the project corresponds to the VBS name conventions the tag can be used directly in the script VBS Example 03 If BeltDriveOilTemperature gt 100 Then instruction If the tag name in the project does not correspond to the VBS name conventions then the tag must be referenced by means of the Smart tags list In the following example the tag name contains the amp sign which is not allowed according to VBS name conventions VBS Example 04 SmartTags Test Trial 2005 The VBS name conventions are found in the help for VBS in the information s
43. e Recipe list e Data record list e Element list In the simple recipe view each area is shown separately on the HMI device Depending on the configuration the simple recipe view starts with the recipe list The figure below shows an example of the data record list 1 Juice 2 Beverage 4 3 Nectar _ Display of values NOTICE Changing the recipe data record in the background Applies to the processing of a recipe data record If values of the corresponding recipe data record are changed by a control job the recipe view is not updated automatically To update the recipe view reselect the respective recipe data record WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 232 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Structure of a recipe management system 8 3 Viewing and editing recipes in Runtime 8 3 3 Configuration options for the recipe view You can define the behavior of the recipe view and the recipes that are displayed in the recipe view Properties dialog Displaying recipe data record values only If you want to display recipe data in a recipe view for inspection only you can prevent editing of the recipe data records e Deselect the Enable edit mode in the General group ae gt eee General gt Properties D gt Animations Recipe Data record View type D Events Recipe name Tag For number name gt Advanced view Tag for number name C Simple view I Enabl
44. lt Ctrl Enter gt Saves the displayed values of the recipe data record The storage location is predefined by the project P lt Ctri gt The recipe data record is saved under a different name regardless of the recipe view A dialog box opens in which the name is entered x lt Ctrl Del gt The displayed recipe data record is deleted amp lt Ctri gt The system always updates the current value of the recipe view with the up to date recipe tag value When the value shown in the recipe view is more recent than the current recipe tag value the system writes this value to the recipe tag Synchronize tags must be enabled in the recipe properties before this function can be used Si lt Ctrl Down gt The values of the set recipe data record displayed in the recipe view are transferred to the PLC i lt Ctrl Up gt The recipe values from the PLC are displayed in the recipe view Mouse control or touchscreen control of the recipe view 1 Select the recipe you want to use The records for the recipe are displayed 2 Click on the data record you wish to edit 3 Press the button whose function you wish to execute Using the keyboard with the recipe view 1 Press the lt Tab gt key until the recipe is selected in the recipe view 2 Press lt Enter gt The drop down list box for the recipes opens 3 Choose a recipe or a record from the list Toggle between the next or previous entry by using the cursor keys l
45. making your configuration settings With the DSN you are referencing the database and the storage location WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO 259 Logging and displaying tags 9 4 Outpuiting logged data Application The entire functional scope of the database is available for additional processing and evaluation of log data Principle You create the data source that connects to the database on the same computer that contains the runtime software You then specify the DSN configured here when you create a log in WinCC flexible Using the ODBC interface you can access the database directly with other programs such as MS Access or MS SQL server With the StartProgram system function you can also configure a program call for MS Access for example on the HMI device This does not interrupt the runtime program sequence WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 260 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Working with reports 1 10 1 Principles on the report system Introduction In WinCC flexible reports are used to document process data and completed production cycles You can report messages and recipe data in order to create shift reports output batch data or to document a manufacturing process for the acceptance test Overview You can edit the report files in the graphic editor In this editor you configure the layout of the reports and dete
46. selected by the system New functions from a more current ProAgent version are not available in an earlier version of ProAgent Sequencers must be regenerated after conversion 20 1 3 Basic principles of integration in STEP 7 Introduction If you are using a SIMATIC PLC and have installed the STEP 7 configuration software on your system you can integrate WinCC flexible in STEP 7 WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 400 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Integration of WinCC flexible in STEP 7 20 7 Basic Principles Advantages of integrating in STEP 7 During integrated configuration you access STEP 7 configuration data that you created when you configured the PLC with STEP 7 This gives you the following advantages e You can use the SIMATIC Manager as a central point for creating processing and managing SIMATIC PLCs and WinCC flexible projects e The communication parameters of the PLC are preassigned when the WinCC flexible project is created When a change takes place in STEP 7 the communication parameters are updated in WinCC flexible MP 370 12 Key Station C y Interface i HMI device Network PLC device Type Baud rate 7 Profile pp v Address 4 En 187500 i TE Highest station address HSA Expansion slot 3 Address 5 A 126 Rack 0 RS485 Access point S7FONLINE Simatic M Only master on the bus Number of masters 1 M Cyclic operation Connection parameters created by the sy
47. symbol notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken CAUTION with a safety alert symbol indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken CAUTION without a safety alert symbol indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken NOTICE indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into account If more than one degree of danger is present the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage Qualified Personnel The device system may only be set up and used in conjunction with this documentation Commissioning and operation of a device system may only be performed by qualified personnel Within the context of the safety notes in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission ground and label devices systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and stand
48. 11 2 Introduction 280 Structure of the user administration In case of a project in manufacturing engineering the environment at the equipment manufacturer has to be differentiated from the environment at the end customer as plant operator The equipment manufacturer allows the user for example Mr Foreman a specific access to the project However a user Foreman does not exist at the end customer Similar difficulties arise for example when different projects on a plant are to be integrated into one project in process engineering In order to integrate the projects you have to be able to access the data of each individual project without restriction during commissioning WinCC flexible Administration Configuration Commissi na Enaineers E Commissioniia Enges Authorizations A Change recipe data records Miller group o Change system parameters Mr Smith A Log process data Mr Smith B 5 H System parameter Process Program Operator controls Block Recipe Logging Authorizations are therefore not assigned directly to users in the user administration but rather to user groups The user Foreman is then for example assigned to the Operator user group and receives its authorizations Authorizations do not have to be assigned individually to each user only to the user group In a different environment for example at the customer there are other users The authorizations and user groups of the project
49. 18 2 Change log of a project Principle Every project has its own change log Project changes are recorded as long as the change log is enabled Recorded project changes The following project changes are recorded New change log created in WinCC flexible Enabling the change log Creating an object Deleting an object Renaming an object Changing an object Copying an object Moving an object Saving a project Renaming a project Changing comments in the change log Disabling the change log The following project changes are recorded only for a project with version management 380 Creating a new project version Opening an old project version Moving project versions to another storage location WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Logging changes 18 3 Change log of a project session 18 3 Change log of a project session Principle The Changes table logs each changed object and object property in a separate line The Changes table lists the object properties in detail A z gt Bic a a a 8 Example If you enable the change log and then initially edit an object such as PictureChangeLog for example the new object is inserted as new line in the Changes table All changed object properties such as Position are entered a separate lines and a new value such as 200 is entered in the Details table Note In a screen the obj
50. 1AB01 2ABO 69 WinCC flexible Engineering System 2 7 Working with WinCC flexible 70 Select the corresponding field for the required text list The following fields are available e Range With this setting the integer or value range of a tag is assigned to the text entries from the text list The number of text entries may be selected freely The maximum number of entries depends on the HMI device You establish a default value that is then displayed if the value of the tags lies outside the defined area e Bit 0 1 With this setting the text entries from the text list are assigned to the two statuses of a binary tag You can create a text entry for the status of a binary tag e Bit number 0 31 With this entry a text entry from the text list is assigned to every bit of a tag The maximum number of the text entries is 32 This type of text list may for example be used in a sequential control when executing a sequencer wherever only one bit of the used tag is allowed to be set The least significant bit set and a default value determine the behavior of the bit number 0 to 31 In the work area in the table List entries create the texts of the text list Double click the first line of the table The first text entry has is created In the column Value either set a binary value or a range value for the assigned tag to be used for the bit number 1 v In the column Entry enter the desired text for the
51. 20 1 4 Working with the SIMATIC Manager ccccecceecneeeeeeeneeeeeteeeeeeteneeeetieeeeetaeeeesiieeeeetieeeeenaeeaa 20 1 5 Working with HW Contig sicccceniccccieceeevatedeeadsieceieiladeeenaeevndeeesiiietbndcerntiectbniacvnieniiaceenad 20 1 6 Configuring CONNECUONS sssi niaaa nasa a onside ankaa EASES NAE undated 20 1 7 Working with objects 2 0 eee ce eeeeeeeenne eter eeeeeae eect eaaeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeesaaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeesaeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeesas 20 1 8 Converting an integrated Project eee ceeeeneeeeenteeeeeeieeeeeteeeeeteeeeesaaeeeetaeeeeeteeeesieeeaeeeereaa 406 20 1 8 1 Conversion of integrated WinCC flexible projects in STEP 7 00 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeeaas 20 1 8 2 Converting an integrated project to the current WinCC flexible version c ceeeeeseees 20 1 8 3 Converting an integrated project to an earlier WinCC flexible version c ceceteeeeeeeees 20 1 9 Integrating WinCC flexible in a PC Station 2 0 eeeee eects ee eeneeeeeeieeeeeeieeeeniieeeeetneeeetne eee 410 20 2 Configuring communication settings eee cece e ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseaaeeeseeaaeeeseaeeeseeaeeseenaeeeaes 20 2 1 Configuring communication settings via routing 2 cee cece ee eeeneeeeceaeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeeenaaes 20 2 2 Project transfer via S7 rOUtln x2c3 sics 5 cesnccevess danced cons cecysaneach SENE SA AEAEE ASAAN AAE 20 3 Tag COMMOUMAUIOMN ss caceheacacatenneceeece cansuanrccdatancdanesadd ca
52. 200 200 1000 1000 per recipe User datalengthin 800 800 800 4000 4000 bytes per data record Number of data 200 200 200 500 500 records per recipe Number of recipe elements in the project Reserved memory 32KB 32 KB 32 KB 64 KB 64 KB for data records in the internal Flash Logs Number of logs 20 20 Number of entries 10000 10000 per log file including all log segments Number of log 400 400 segments cyclical trigger for 1s 1s tag logging Trends Number of trends 50 50 300 300 Text lists and graphic lists Number of graphic 100 100 400 400 lists Number of text lists 150 300 300 300 300 300 500 500 Total number of lists 150 300 300 300 300 300 500 500 Number of entries 30 30 30 30 30 30 256 256 per text or graphic list Number of graphic 500 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 objects Number of text 2500 2500 2500 1000 2500 1000 2500 10000 10000 elements Scripts Number of scripts 50 50 WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 434 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 Appendix OP 73 Communication Number of 2 connections Number of connections based on the SIMATIC HMI http Protocol Maximum number of connected Sm rtClients including a service client Help system Number of 320 ch
53. 4 5 Store script Principle A script is stored by storing a project If you want to use a script on another computer for example you can copy the code from the script into a text file or transfer it to another project using copy and paste WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 313 System functions and runtime scripting 12 5 Debugging 12 5 Debugging 12 5 1 Debugging Scripts Introduction Debugging allows you to test your scripts in runtime for logical programming errors For example you can test whether the proper values were delivered to the tags and whether cancellation terms are realized correctly To debug your scripts use exclusively the Microsoft Script Debugger or the Microsoft Script Editor supplied with Microsoft Office XP If the script contains VBScript functions then a distinction must be made between VBScript for Windows and VBScript for Windows CE Some functions are different e g the CreateObjectfunction The debugger checks the syntax for VBScript for Windows If the script contains a function for Windows CE the system outputs a corresponding alarm Error types The following error types are distinguished when debugging e Runtime error A runtime error occurs when you try to perform an invalid of incorrect instruction e g when a tag is not defined In order to intercept runtime errors you can use the instruction On Error Resume Ne
54. 4 8 4 Format of the Tag Data for the Import Introduction This section describes the format required for the file with tag data used for imports The tag data file must be in csv format Format of Tag Data 144 Each tag is on a separate line in the import file The import file with the tag data must have the following format lt Tag name gt lt list separator character gt lt Connection name gt lt list separator character gt lt Tag address gt lt list separator character gt lt Data type gt lt list separator character gt lt Length of tag in bytes gt lt list separator character gt lt Array number gt lt list separator character gt lt Acquisition trigger mode gt lt list separator character gt lt Acquisition cycle gt lt list separator character gt lt Upper limit gt lt list separator character gt lt High low limit gt lt list separator character gt lt Low low limit gt lt list separator character gt lt Lower limit gt lt list separator character gt lt Linear scaling gt lt list separator character gt lt Upper PLC scaling value gt lt list separator character gt lt Lower PLC scaling value gt lt list separator character gt lt Upper HMI scaling value gt lt list separator character gt lt Lower HMI scaling value HMI gt lt list separator character gt lt Start value gt lt list separator character gt lt Update ID gt lt list separator character gt lt Comment gt lt line break carriage return gt WinCC flexible 2007 Compact
55. 5 Working withthe MOUSE sds a A edn 2 6 Keyboard Comro essiri iini eir EAE AEAEE EE E WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 9 Table of contents 10 2 7 Working with WinCG flexible veccacictactctdeeieaueesieeneqeeeeienediaetgeet bien NE NAAS AAAA 2 7 1 Working with WinCC flexible sticcctteccct stated a aa a a EE E EN neerteees 2 7 2 Working with projects 2 2 ccececeeseneeeeeeeeeeee tetit tastit ease eee aeeeeesaeeeesaeeeeeseeeeesiaeeeessieeeeseeeesneeeentaa 2 7 3 Editing Multiple Projects with WinCC flexible eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeee center eeeaeeeseaeeeseenaeeenenaeeeaes 60 2 7 4 Functional scope of a Project saisai a addii aiaia iain iiad 2 7 5 Editor Propertie S sisisi aaea ae E AE a E a a a aad T a a ahs 2 7 6 Open EN Ob isian a e scene Ea EEEE NE dee EA SAS ES AEE A 63 2 7 7 Switching between SGIOMS csececetieecaertanccnerestectanertereanedanesnentenceentisienenetuseunedenedsecteeeraiuentzeees 64 2 7 8 Object LISE sess cas see tsascees cocene ehatea a A a aa a a a aa aE 66 2 7 9 Function iStone E E E ee Race Ie a eaS 67 27 10 TEXTES tiesinis nanen aiten AEE E ENE E needa deere TA EAA EE E aa ZA Graphic ISU re erasana a aE a EEA EEA L EAEE ERE a 13 27 12 Displaying eee cree 11 2 7 13 Customized setup of WinCC flexible c cece ce ceeeeececcae cee eeeeeeeeaeceeeesesecaaeaeeeeeesecsnaeeeeeeseeeeeess 2 8 WinGC flexible Start
56. DBD 388 ArrayTagl98 DB 1 DBD 392 ArrayTagl99 DB 1 DBD 396 4 4 m ii 4 Im Object view Multiple array elements of the same properties can be addressed by a single array tag You can then use each array element as any other tag in your configuration However there are certain restraints e In terms of the properties Not all array elements are assigned limit values e Not all HMI devices support array tags Application examples 132 Array tags can be used in the following situations e To group process values in profile trends You map process values to trends which are acquired at different points in time for example e To access specific values which are grouped in trends You output all values of the profile trend by stepping up the index tag for example e To configure discrete alarms with successive bit number e To save machine data records to a single tag WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Working with Tags 4 4 Array basics License rule for runtime An array is counted in WinCC flexible Runtime as one PowerTag regardless of the number of array elements Special features J N WARNING Increased system load and performance losses Read or write access to a single array element always includes read or write access to all array elements of the array tag Transfer of the data of large arrays from and to the PLC usually takes longer co
57. Data selection 349 Editing possibilities 348 For a single object 349 Layout 344 Layout contents page Output 350 Output medium Outputting Compact 345 Outputting Complete 3 Selecting objects 350 Project session Project tag Project text Access to Editor Translating externall Managing 374 New project version next version 3 Older project versions 671 Project view Working with Project View HMI device dependent data 86 Selection of HMI device types 84 Property Alarm Function List Layout 346 Tag Property view Propert Tag 122 ProSave 394 WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 Index Language switching 394 Protocol Application example Design ProTool project Migrating Q Quick start from WinCC flexible 79 of WinCC flexible 79 R Read continuously Tag Recipe 213 Application example Machine parameter assignment 214 Application example Batch production Basic principles Basics 215 Configuration Configuration option Data Flow Data record Differences in TP 177A and OP 77A Displa 214 Entry 2 Initializing during a transfer operation 390 Initializing during the transfer 3 Memory requirements 425 4 Output data for reporting 274 Recipe screen 231 Recipe view 2 Setting 229 Transfer 3 Use 214 Using text lists recipe data overwrite during transfer 390 Recip
58. Introduction Log types Storage media To log alarms you group them in alarm classes Each alarm class can be recorded in a separate log Depending on the HMI device you can select a log type when making configuration settings You specify the log behavior when configuring the log In WinCC flexible you can select from the following log types 1 Circular log 2 Segmented circular log 3 Log with level dependent system alarm 4 Log with level dependent execution of system functions Alarms can be logged automatically or managed by an operator Log data can be saved either in a file or in a database Saved data can undergo additional processing in other programs e g for analysis purposes Displaying log contents You display log contents on the HMI device To do so you must configure an alarm view 6 4 3 Alarm logs editor Introduction Open 196 In the Alarm logs table editor you configure alarm logs for logging alarm classes and define their properties Double click on Alarm logs in the project window in the Log group to open the Alarm log editor WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Creating an Alarm System 6 4 Alarm logging Structure E ww weve OO imene ep ne Work area rn f Property view gt Work area All alarm logs are displayed in a table in the work area You can edit the properties of the alarm logs in the table cells
59. List STEP 7 Accepting tags in WinCC flexible Activating tags in WinCC flexible 418 Array transfer to WinCC flexible 419 STEP 7 integration Advantages 401 Requirements 4 20 Tags User Administration Structure element Tag 136 Structures Editor Work area Switch Symbol library 156 Symbol server integrated project 414 Symbolic IO field 156 269 Synchronization Manual 313 Recipe view and recipe screen With PLC Synchronize tags in the recipe view synchronizing Of objects in the script Of tags in the script Synchronizing Recipe tag 221 Syntax emphasis 306 Changing 308 System alarm System Alarms editor System Alarms editor System dictionary Editor Structure of editor 336 System ra 2 System function 451 Index Application 297 298 Call up in the scri t B11 In anok POE list 2 Goal B 298 302 in script 298 2 In the script 311 Language dependenc 298 311 Parameter delivery 3 Particularity when calling up Use 298 System limits 429 HMI device 428 T Tab tag Internal tag Tag Access with VBS 310 Acquisition cycle 126 128 Array Communication with a PLC MR 126 Data log 1 250 External tag 1 117 7 118 Importing pio an HMI device 141 Index tag 1 Indirect a ino Limit range linear scaling 130 Linear Scaling 126 Local 310 Logging 129 256 Logging cycle 135 Multiplexing 131 Property Property view
60. O e A 25 1 2 5 1 Licenses and License Key ccc ccceccstececevciccees sas ee cevinscevesnacecevinnen cena deesvanscessanacevevsnbeedeanseatieesevintey 1 2 5 2 WinCC flexible without liCENSING essaia annaa AENEA A A n AAAA 1 3 Automation CONCE PIS isinen ekaa aaa aa E EEEa A aaa 27 1 3 1 Automation concepts with WinCC flexible 2 ec ceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeestaeeeenianeeees 2 1 3 2 Remote access to HMI devices esseesssesesrreeeerrerearsnnestinnarrnuadteanaarinaatinadatnnndtunaaatenaaatanaannnaennans 30 1 3 3 Automatic alarm diS Patch essen E 31 1 3 4 Distributed IMI s2 heetetnce dete neil ce eel ei Geen lee vealed 3 1 4 Configuration COnCe pts isscch tiscecsasdececiidccveladedslecechideaceenecautesseeacesseueueeiavcavenaveedeeneeeunenevdeeeecnnenaed 1 4 1 CONMGUFATION SUPDOM ieesdsattceaiechesuaedzeceehanles scented chances a a a a a A E der venadet aa ONEA 33 1 4 2 Scalable Configuration TOOIS ccccccccccscsceeceseesecnecseeeceeceseceeesecseeecaseaseseensensecsesaees teenaeeaees 34 1 4 3 PLC independent configuration cccccccsccecceeeeenecnsecsecseeneceecsecsecnecesececseeeesesesasesseseaeeaeens 35 1 4 4 MSC esti sa aac E O cage ey a 2 dbezsa te tececseddaeoeatanada seni guaysadtanivceedes 35 1 4 5 IntelligGnttOOls oats ate ieee een aelec le ete Peta odes ei es Sele 36 1 4 9 1 Bulk data proc SSiNgi ssrin eai ana a aaa a e aA E RER A 36 1 4 5 2 Configuring movement Paths eee eect eee ee eee
61. Preface This Manual Conventions Getting Started e WinCC flexible for first time users Based on a sample project this is a step by step introduction to the basics of configuring screens alarms and recipes and screen navigation e WinCC flexible for advanced users Based on a sample project this is a step by step introduction to the basics of configuring logs project reports scripts user management and multilingual projects and integration into STEP 7 e WinCC flexible options Based on a sample project this is a step by step introduction to the basics of configuring the WinCC flexible Audit Sm rtServices Sm rtAccess and OPC Server options Online availability The following links provide direct access to technical documentation on SIMATIC products and systems in English German French Italian and Spanish IMATI ide Technische Dokumentation in Deutsch ttp www ad siemens de simatic portal html_00 techdoku htm MA id Docu A Jide for Technica mentation in English ttp Awww ad siemens de simatic portal html_76 techdoku htm Structure of this manual e Introduction to WinCC flexible Chapter 1 e Working with WinCC flexible Chapters 2 17 e Transferring a project to an HMI device Chapter 18 e Integration of WinCC flexible in STEP 7 Chapter 19 e Appendix Chapter 20 A distinction is made in the naming conventions for the configuration and runtime software e WinCC
62. STEP 7 WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 Creating an Alarm System 6 4 Alarm logging 6 4 Alarm logging 6 4 1 Basic principles of alarm logging Introduction Alarms indicate fault states and operating states of a process in a project They are generally triggered by the PLC and displayed in a screen on the HMI device WinCC flexible lets you log alarms and document operational states and error states of the plant Note Archiving is not available on all devices Principle You can configure alarm logging The alarms to be logged are assigned to an alarm log via the alarm class Every message belongs to a specific alarm class You assign the alarm log that is to be used when configuring an alarm class In doing so a log can include alarms of several alarm classes When you create a log you specify the log properties and select the log behavior The log records the following data of each logged alarm e Date and time of alarm e Alarm text e Alarm number e Alarm status e Alarm class e Alarm procedure e Values in the tags contained in the alarm text e Controller Note The alarm text and controller are only logged if this has been configured in the properties of a log WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO 195 Creating an Alarm System 6 4 Alarm logging 6 4 2 Alarm logging
63. STEP 7 a Configuring in STEP 7 ALARM_S alarm configuring in SIMOTION configuring in STEP 7 Configuring in STEP 7 Filtering a display 192 Analog alarm Analog alarms editor Analog alarm procedure Analog alarms editor Application Project documentation 441 Index Recipe view 239 Report object 270 Application example 363 Entering recipe data offline for reports Recipe with manual production sequence Area pointer Connections editor Data record Arrange Object in the screen 160 Array Indirect addressing h31 Array element Array tag Array transfer from STEP 7 Asian characters Input on the HMI device Interpretation 3 Memory requirements Asian language Configuration Asian operating system Assigning a function key Automatic synchronization Automatic translating 335 Automation Automatic alarm dispatch Concept 27 Control with one HMI device Distributed HMI HMI System with centralized functions 29 Mobile units PLC with several HMI devices Remote access Single user System B Backing up HMI data 3 Bar Basic k Alarm 191 Data log 254 Script 308 Behavior Recipe view Bootstrapping Operating system Branch 372 373 442 Bulk data processing 36 Advantages Button C central user administration Change A connection Default propert Change log 379 Changing Code formatting in the script 309 Object prope
64. Standard Advanced 250 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Logging and displaying tags 9 1 Basics 9 1 3 Trends Introduction A trend is a graphic representation of the values that a tag takes during runtime In order to display trends configure a trend view in a screen of your project To configure the trend view specify a trend type for the values to be displayed e Log For displaying the logged values of a tag e Realtime pulse triggered For time triggered display of values e Realtime bit triggered For event triggered display of values e History bit triggered For event triggered display with buffered data acquistion Displaying logged values The trend view shows the logged values within a definable time period In runtime the operator can shift the time period to view the desired information logged data EMSS EK Time window in the trend Auxiliary line go zwe zx EEEN 28 8s zs e Pulse triggered trends The values to be displayed are determined individually with a definable time pattern Pulse triggered trends are suitable for representing continuous courses such as the changes in the operating temperature of a motor Bit triggered trends The values to be displayed are event driven by setting a defined bit in Trend transfer tags The bit is reset after reading has been completed Bit triggered trends are useful for displaying fast changing values such as the injection pressure
65. TP 270 and therefore also from WinCC flexible Standard VBScript is supported as a programming language The use of runtime scripting allows flexibility in the realization of configurations Create scripts with Runtime scripting if extra functionality in runtime is needed e g e Conversion of values You can use scripts to convert values between different measurement units e g temperatures e Automation of production sequences A script can control a production sequence by transferring production data to a PLC The status can be checked with the return values and if necessary appropriate measures can be taken You can save your own VB script code in a script You can use the script just like a system function in the project You have access to the tags of the project and the runtime object model of WinCC flexible in the script In addition you can use all standard VBS functions in the script You can call other scripts and system functions in the script Execution of system functions and scripts Recursion level 296 System functions and scripts are executed in runtime after the onset of a configured event e g a mouse click on a button The recursion level in scripts is limited by the stack size of the HMI device In Runtime an unrestricted number of recursions leads to a system error message Therefore please limit the number of recursions in a script WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2
66. Tags in the Project window Layout The tag editor displays all tags that are in a folder Eei evan RO Aerenes Sopp hen Project view Object view Property view i Tag editor WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 120 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Working with Tags 4 2 Elements and basic settings Work area All tags are displayed in a table in the work area You can edit the properties of the tags in the table cells You can sort the table according to the entries in a column by clicking on the column header You can configure the selection of columns to suit your needs Some columns are not available depending on the HMI device for which you are configuring The configured column selection will be saved whenever the project is saved It is linked with the user name that you used when logging into Microsoft Windows Property view Here you configure tags The property view offers the same information and settings as the work area table The property view has a tree structure on the left from which you can select the various property categories The fields for configuring the selected properties category are shown on the right in the property view 4 2 2 Basic Settings for Tags and Arrays Introduction You can configure the properties of tags and array elements in the tabular editors and also in the corresponding property view The respective property view offers the same informa
67. WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 80 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Working with projects 3 3 1 Basis for working with projects 3 1 1 Working with projects Projects in WinCC flexible The WinCC flexible configuration software is used to configure the user interface for controlling machines and systems These can involve simple text display units for reading parameters but also complex operating stations for the production line for example WinCC flexible has a modular design You decide which HMI device types can be configured through the selection of a WinCC flexible edition If necessary a WinCC flexible edition can be upgraded to a later edition without any problem You can configure a maximum of 8 HMI devices in a WinCC flexible project A WinCC flexible project contains all of your configuration data for a plant or an HMI device Configuration data includes e Process screens to display the process e Tags to transfer data between PLC and HMI device in runtime e Alarms to display operational states in runtime e Logs to save process values and alarms All data related to a project is stored in the database integrated in WinCC flexible WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 81 Working with projects 3 1 Basis for working with projects Application example 3 1 2 Principle 82 WinCC flexible can be used for example to
68. Working with projects 3 6 Reusing project data Replacing objects Existing objects in the target project may be replaced by the copied objects in the clipboard When doing an extensive copy the complete contents of the copied objects will be compared with the contents of the existing objects in the target project Existing objects with the same name will be replaced Containing child objects will also be replaced If the copy contains references the system will compare these references with existing references in the target object A dialog opens by determining which existing references need to be replaced In the dialog select the type of references which need to be replaced 3 6 4 Replace Application Process Source project 106 You can use the Replace command in WinCC flexible to integrate new or updated objects into your WinCC flexible project for example objects of a ProAgent project With the Replace command objects are accepted or updated from other projects The objects can be activated without resolving the project structure Objects can be individual objects e g screens or the complete configuration of an HMI device Using the menu command Copy you are creating an extensive copy of an object During copying both the references as well as the objects with a parent child relationship are copied In order to insert the copy use the Replace menu command The object names are checked to see if an object
69. added to the Tag editor in integrated projects Insert a new tag in the tag editor Position the mouse pointer over the field in the Symbol column and click to display the selection button Press the selection button to open the Selection dialog and navigate to the S7 program in the required PLC Select the required symbol from the symbol list or from a data block 01_Merkerbit 200 0 m 200 0 vii Merkerbit 200 0 wees Project sess SIMATIC HMI Station 1 01_Merkerbit 200 0 M 200 0 BOOL Merkerbit 200 0 B Ei UT_6521 57 031e 02_Merkerbyte 201 MB 201 BYTE Merkerbyte 201 4 SIMATIC 300 CPU315 2DP 03_Merkerwort 202 MW 202 WORD Merkerwort 202 1 04 _MerkerInt 20 4 MW 204 INT MerkerInt 204 SIMATIC 400 CPLI414 2DP OS_MerkerDword 206 MD 206 DWORD MerkerDword S E CPU 414 2 DP 06 _MerkerDInt 210 MD 210 DINT MerkerDInt 210 O7_MerkerReal 214 MD 214 REAL MerkerReal 214 08_MerkerTimer 218 MW 218 SSTIME MerkerTimer O09 _MerkerDate 220 MW 220 DATE MerkerDate 220 10_MerkerTOD 222 MD 222 TOD Merker Time_of_D TZE l S E 57 Program 414 2DP S Symbols H DB oe i Click on the kA command button The symbolic name from STEP 7 will be accepted as the tag name The relevant data from the symbol table or data blocks will be integrated in the WinCC flexible tag The tag names transferred from STEP 7 to the WinCC flexible project are generated from the components of the general STEP 7 symbol The tag name Mot
70. alarm classes and specify their properties in the Alarm classes tabular editor Open In the project view double click Alarm classes in the Alarms gt Settings group Layout Bh wens wre SO beens Soe ee fen Property view pi lt Work area The work area shows in tabular form all the established alarm classes and the associated settings You can edit the properties of the discrete alarms in the table cells WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 189 Creating an Alarm System 6 2 Elements and basic settings Property view Configure the alarm classes in the property view The view offers the same information and settings as the work area table 6 2 2 6 Alarm groups editor Introduction You create alarm groups and specify their properties in the Alarm groups tabular editor Open In the project view double click Alarm groups in the Alarms gt Settings group Layout Bh wens wee NOD imene ep hen Object view Property view Work area The work area shows in tabular form all the established alarm groups and the associated settings You can edit the properties of the alarm groups in the table cells WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 190 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Creating an Alarm System 6 2 Elements and basic settings Property view The name of the alarm group is modified in the property view The alarm gro
71. and On exit zones Assign the ActivateScreen system function to the events You can only assign a transponder to one zone so that the zones do not overlap 15 2 2 Zones working area Introduction The Zones working area displays the zones and the transponders assigned to them in table format You create a list of transponders and assign certain transponders to a zone The limit of the zone is defined by the maximum distance from the transponders Principle The working area consists of the Zones and Transponders tables T 2 ae ee MixingPlant MixingPlant 1 8m MV Transponder_1 1 Mi M Transponder_2 2 MixingPlant FillingPlant FillingPlant 2 7m Transponder_3 3 tL I Transponder_4 l TFillingaxisControl L If you select a zone in the Zones table the Transponder table displays the following e Transponder enabled The transponder is assigned to the selected zone e Transponder deactivated The transponder is not yet assigned to any zone e Transponder not available The transponder has already been assigned to another zone To undo the assignment switch to the relevant zone and deactivate the transponder The zone and transponder IDs are initially assigned automatically They can be changed however Please note the following e A maximum of 254 zones may be configured e The zone ID must be unique and fall within the range from 1 254 e You can initially configure transponders without
72. and reliably The Mobile Panels Wireless build upon the standardized WLAN technology and are specially tailored for the requirements of automation e Unrestricted mobility and flexibility e Innovative and future proof network architecture e Reliable and deterministic wireless transmission in real time e Maximum reliability and security during wireless transmission e Sufficient bandwidth and monitoring of the signal strength e Functions are compatible with the stationary HMI devices and hard wired Mobile Panels e Can be fully integrated into existing systems e Information protected by access control authentication and encryption e Fail safe due to safety functions and communication via PROFIsafe e Rugged construction for harsh industrial conditions 15 1 2 How the Mobile Panel Wireless works Overview 352 Certain spatial parts of the plant are of particular importance for operator control and monitoring via a wireless network the zones and the effective ranges A zone or an effective range is determined by the following e A certain part of a plant or machine e The overall planning of the wireless network e The configuration and parameter settings for the component involved e The distribution of transponders around the plant To give a basic understanding of all this the following section described the interaction between e HMI device e Zone e Effective range e Transponder WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard
73. and removing buttons e Changing the position 2 2 3 Work area Introduction The work area is used to edit project data either in table format e g the tags or in graphic format e g a process screen O Start Screen Description Each editor is opened in a separate tab control on the work area In the case of graphic editors each element is displayed on a separate tab control Only one tab is active when several editors are open simultaneously To move to another editor click the corresponding tab You can open up to 20 editors in parallel WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 45 WinCC flexible Engineering System 2 2 WinCC flexible user interface 2 2 4 Introduction Description 46 Project View The project view is the central control point for project editing All component parts and editors available in a project appear in a tree structure in the Project View Each editor is assigned a symbol which you can use to identify the corresponding objects Only those elements which are supported by the selected HMI device are displayed in the project window In the project windows you have access to the device settings of the HMI device the language settings and the version management lua Recipes A Device_1 0P 77B 2 Screens 3 Add Screen O Template C Mixing Station C Start Screen Vag Communication 2 Tags Ay Connections Cycles
74. are indicated next to the menu commands WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO 303 System functions and runtime scripting 12 3 Elements and basic settings Scripts toolbar The commands for synchronizing objects an tags as well as for checking script syntax are located in the Script toolbar Advanced Edit toolbar The commands for the following actions are located in the Advanced edit toolbar e Working with bookmarks e indenting and outdenting code e Commenting on code e Jumping to a specific code row IntelliSense toolbar The commands for displaying selection lists e g all objects of the object model available system functions or VBS constants are found in the IntelliSense toolbar Work area Create and edit scripts in the work area The creation of scripts is supported by syntax emphasis and IntelliSense Property view Configure the script in the property view You determine whether the script is a procedure or a function Furthermore you can declare parameters for the script Script Wizard In the Script Wizard system functions and scripts can be set up with assigned parameters just as in a function list The filed system functions and scripts can also be transferred to the active script from the Script Wizard In this way you only need to perform the parameter assignment once If system functions or scripts have already been configured on an e
75. be used to create a project in which several HMI devices are configured This type of project is used for example when the machine or system controlled is operated from several different points Common objects can then be used in the project This method means that a project need not be created for each separate HMI device but rather all HMI devices are managed in the same project A WinCC flexible project consists of all the configuration data which enables the system to by operated and monitored Each configured unit only displays the functions which the specific unit supports Functions which are not supported are hidden but remain a component part of the project data Project for use on different HMI device A project can be created for a specific HMI device and loaded onto several different HMI devices When loading onto the HMI device only that data is loaded which is supported by the HMI device WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 83 Working with projects 3 2 Types of projects 3 2 2 HMI device dependency of projects Principle The functions of the HMI device determine project visualization in WinCC flexible and the functional scope of the editors Selecting Operating Unit Types You select the type of the first HMI device when you create a project The HMI device type can be changed in the Project View shortcut menu of the HMI device You can retroactively insta
76. comment gt lt Empty comment gt K3 You are continually developing your project Changes are being added to changes step by step If you are regularly versioning your project sequential project versions are being created All project versions with whole number such as 1 2 3 etc form the trunk of the development Several branches may exist as well The branches for example 2 1 1 2 1 2 2 1 3 are created when you edit the older project version 2 and version it regularly 370 WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 Managing project versions 17 3 Trunk 17 3 Trunk Principle You create a new project version to record the current state of the project The new project version is a copy of the current project The first project version is assigned version number 1 NOTICE Once a project version is saved in the version management it can no longer be changed Changes are always passed along to the next project version You are continually developing your project in WinCC flexible Changes you are now making are based on the project state with the version 1 Version 1 is the current version The continuing development reaches a new milestone You create a new project version to record the current state of the project Version 2 is the current version When the next project version is created the project status is saved as version 3
77. configure To configure an HMI device which is not supported in your current WinCC flexible edition you can migrate to another WinCC flexible edition All existing functions remain available As of the WinCC flexible Compact edition you can use the PowerPack to upgrade the WinCC flexible edition WinCC flexible Asia editions 22 Only the Advanced and Standard editions are available for the WinCC flexible ASIA version WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 Introduction to WinCC flexible 1 2 WinCC flexible system overview 1 2 3 WinCC flexible Runtime Principle In runtime the operator can control and monitor the process This involves in particular the following tasks e Communication with the automation systems e On screen visualization of images e Operating the process for example by setting setpoint values or opening and closing valves e Archiving of current runtime data e g process values and alarm events Performance spectrum of WinCC flexible Runtime WinCC flexible Runtime supports a certain number of process variables Powertags which is determined by your license e WinCC flexible Runtime 128 Supports 128 process variables e WinCC flexible Runtime 512 Supports 512 process variables e WinCC flexible Runtime 2048 Supports 2048 process variables You can increase the number of process variables with a PowerPack 1 2 4 Available options
78. deactivate the entries in the pop up menu of the column table header Property view Here you configure data logs The property view offers the same information and settings as the work area table 9 2 2 Basic settings for data logs Introduction The properties of a data log can be defined in the Data log editor or in the Property view for logs Structure of the property view The Property view has a tree structure on the left from which you can select all property categories The fields for configuring the currently selected properties category are shown on the right of the Property view You can set the following properties for data logs in the Property view General properties e Name The data log may be given any desired name but the name must include at least one letter or number e Storage location The data log may be stored in an ODBC database only on a PC or in a separate csv file Select File or Database as the storage location correspondingly Depending on the configuration of the HMI device you can select the local hard disk of the PC or the storage card of the panel or if present a network drive as path If you choose an ODBC database as a storage location you have the following possibilities for the names of the data source System defined data source name if you want the name to be assigned by the system You will also need on the target system a special instance of the Microsoft SQ
79. default properties of the objects are coupled to the user names under which you are logged on in the operating system WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO 265 Working with reports 10 4 Working with reports In order to change the default properties you open the pop up menu of an object in the toolbox view Select the command Edit default properties The Properties dialog box is displayed Adapt the default properties of the object to the requirements of your project Displaying the toolbox view 10 4 10 4 1 Introduction With menu View gt Toolbox view you can display or hide the toolbox view Working with reports Creating a report When creating a report you specify the individual sections and contents Configure the contents of the following sections e Report header e Page header e Page e Page footer e Report footer Configuration overview 266 Objects from the toolbox view are available for designing a report and configuring the data for the output Some objects have a limited functional scope when used in a report compared to similar objects of the screen editor An IO field can for example only serve as an output field When a report is created in the report editor it is displayed as wysiwyg The dynamic objects for outputting the data for example Print alarm and Print recipe are exceptions The configured height of these objects i
80. device WinCC flexible offers the following options for displaying alarms on the HMI device e Alarm view The alarm view is configured for a certain screen More than one alarm can be displayed simultaneously depending on its configured size More than one alarm view can be configured for different alarm classes and in different screens The alarm view can be configured in such a way that it includes only one alarm line e Alarm window The alarm window is configured in the screen s template and is thus a component of all screens in a project More than one alarm can be displayed simultaneously depending on its configured size An event can trigger closing and reopening of the alarm window Alarm windows are saved in their own layer for the practical reason that this allows them to be specifically hidden during the configuration Additional signal Alarm indicator The alarm indicator is a configured graphic symbol that is displayed on the screen when an alarm activates The alarm indicator is configured in the screen s template and is thus a component of all screens in a project The alarm indicator can have one of two states e Flashing At least one unacknowledged alarm is pending e Static The alarms are acknowledged but at least one of them is not yet deactivated Function lists can be used to configure HMI device responses 6 1 4 2 Filtering the display of alarms Introduction In the extended Alarm View and Alarm Window you ha
81. does not support right to left languages such as Hebrew or Arabic e Language specific fonts are not available e Non editable texts stored in WinCC flexible are displayed in English The following languages are differentiated within the project languages e Reference language The reference language is the language that you use to configure the project initially During configuration you select one of the project languages as the reference language You use the reference language as a template for translations All of the texts for the project are first created in the reference language and then translated While you are translating the texts you can have them displayed simultaneously in the reference language e Editing language You create the translations of the texts in the editing language Once you have created your project in the reference language you can translate the texts into the remaining project languages For this purpose you select one of the project languages as the editing language and edit the texts for this language You can change the editing language at any time Note When switching the project languages the assignment to the keys on the keyboard also changes In the case of some languages e g Spanish switching the keyboard assignment is not possible due to the operating system In this case the keyboard assignment is switched to English e Runtime languages Runtime languages are those project language
82. editor recognizes are displayed in bold Unknown words are underlined with a red wavy line g to to AY ge og l C Start Scree Sub SyntaxHighlighting 1 This is a comment Dim objScreen HmiRuntime Screens Screen 1 Dim objTag SmartTags Mixer RotationSpeed era tou i Smart Tags Value 0 1 SmartTags Value _02 Anon bwN End Sub Line 6 Column i char 1 The table shows the pre set colors for the most important keywords Color Meaning Example Blue Keyword VBS Dim If Then Gray Keyword object model HmiRuntime Cyan Script FahrenheitToCelsius Brown System function IncreaseValue Red Tag Tag_1 Green Comment This is a comment Synchronization of objects Object list 306 When opening the script instances of objects e g tags are automatically synchronized with the configuration data If a tag has been renamed in the Tag editor e g this change also affects the script When change is made and the affected script is open the renamed object will be underlined with a blue wavy line The synchronization can then be performed manually in the script editor Using the key sequence lt Alt Right gt the object list can be called up in which all available objects are displayed depending on the context The object lists can be called up during the assignment of parameters e g or when using listings Example You want to reference an exist
83. features for translating projects This is of particular advantage when configuring large projects with a large share of text Use the following editors to translate texts in WinCC flexible Toolbar Project languages Short description Managing languages for the project texts Languages and fonts Defining the languages and fonts used in runtime Project texts Managing language dependent project texts Graphic browser Managing local graphics Dictionaries Managing the system and user dictionaries WinCC flexible multilingual user interface 90 You can change the GUI language in WinCC flexible in the course of configuring for example if several engineers of different nationality are working on a project configuration During the installation of WinCC flexible select the languages that will be required later German MV English French Spanish Italian Japanese Chinese Taiwanese F Korean Book cael WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Working with projects 3 4 Editing projects The Setup language is installed as the default GUI language of WinCC flexible The following languages can also be installed e Western European languages German Spanish Italian French e Asian languages Japanese Chinese Taiwanese Korean Note WinCC flexible 2007 CHINA provides Chinese simplified as GUI language
84. given alarm screen AlarmViewAcknowledgeAlarm Acknowledges the alarms selected in the given alarm view AlarmViewShowOperatorNotes Displays the configured operator notes of the alarm selected in the given alarm screen AcknowledgeAlarm Acknowledges all selected alarms SetAlarmReportMode Switches the automatic reporting of alarms on the printer on or off ShowAlarmWindow Hides or shows the alarm window on the HMI device ShowSystemAlarm Displays the value of the delivered parameter as a system alarm on the HMI device For details on these system functions refer to Working with WinCC flexible gt Reference gt System functions WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 181 Creating an Alarm System 6 7 Basics Events for alarms and objects for alarm indication The following events can occur during runtime in the case of alarms and in the case of objects for alarm displays A function list can be configured for each event Object Discrete alarms Configurable events Activate Deactivate Acknowledge Edit Analog alarm Activate Deactivate Acknowledge Edit Alarm view Enable Deactivate Alarm window Enable Deactivate Alarm indicator Click Click when flashing For details on these events refer to Working with WinCC flexible gt Reference gt System functions 182 WinCC flexibl
85. gt lt Right gt The shortcut menu of the display area opens lt Up gt lt Down gt Selects the previous next entry lt Pg Up gt lt Pg Down gt Moves the display up or down one page lt Home gt lt End gt Selects the first last entry The first last entry is selected WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 241 Structure of a recipe management system 8 3 Viewing and editing recipes in Runtime The table below shows the operation of the shortcut menu Button I Key Function lt Esc gt The menu is closed The display area opens Input of the number The menu command is executed of the menu command Shortcut menus of the simple recipe view 242 A command option selection can be called in for each display area by pressing the gt button The command selection lists those commands that are available in the current display area A number is assigned to each command The command is executed when you enter this number e Recipe list Menu command New Function A new recipe data record is created for the selected recipe If a start value is configured it is shown in the input field Viewing info text The info text configured for the simple recipe view is displayed Open The record list of the selected recipe opens e Data record list Menu command Function
86. have characteristic access rights the authorizations assigned to them Required operation authorizations are configured for objects For example operators only have access to specific function keys Commissioning engineers on the other hand have unlimited access during runtime Definition Users user groups and authorizations are administered in the user administration The user administration controls access to data and functions during runtime You can administer users locally and transfer them to the HMI device SIMATIC Logon also supports central user administration on a server In Runtime you manage the users and passwords by using the User view Example of an application You create and configure an access protection in order to protect operating elements such as input fields and function keys against unauthorized operation Only specified persons or operator groups can change parameters and settings and call functions CAUTION Access protection does not protect against incorrect operations You are responsible for ensuring that only correspondingly trained and authorized personnel design commission operate and maintain etc plants and machines Access protection is not suitable for defining work routines and monitoring their observance WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 279 User administration 11 2 Structure of the user administration
87. i TANU D a T ip Print Selection Ctrl W 23 IZ Cross Reference Export m x Import UDVaADVowowTyD o 7 TT TT Janes eee m o NAU aerer The object e g a screen is created in the Project View and displayed in the work area 3 To open an existing object double click on the object in the Project View or Object View The object e g a screen is displayed in the work area WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 63 WinCC flexible Engineering System 2 7 Working with WinCC flexible Opening a tabular editor A tabular editor is opened by double clicking on the tabular editor in the Project View The editor appears in the work area E WinCC flexible Advanced Project hmi Project Edit view Insert Format Faceplates Options Window Help Pe New be MPO cs Re Yoeoe 2 5m hee ML GRA English United States lue Project weer Device WinCC flexible Runtime A ee re pe I BY Add Screen H 100 57_300 400 v pacca C Template v DB 1 DBW 0 C lt Undefined gt O Bidi te Communication lt a57 Connections e Cycles B 4 Alarm Management B Analog Alarms EA Discrete Alarms ol Settings E3 Bj Recipes amp a Historical Data m Scripts E3 a Reports tae Text and Graphics Lists E ag Runtime User Administration Ei E Device Settings E s1 langage Settin
88. i Alarm Management E Analog Alarms EA Discrete Alarms oO Mixing Station Project texts Name Orange Display name Recipe_1_1 Number 1 Elements Data records iH ig Settings g ey Recipes Water lt undefined gt lt undefined gt BB Add Recipe Concentrate lt undefined gt lt undefined gt Ell Orange 7 gt E i Text and Graphics Lists Sugar lt undefined gt lt undefined gt E tag Runtime User Administration Aroma lt undefined gt lt undefined gt gt Device Settings amp Lanquage Settings S a B Version Management s Editor specific operating elements include e Toolbars e Toolbox e Menu commands WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO WinCC flexible Engineering System 2 4 Working with windows and toolbars Placement The default position of editor specific toolbars is on the right hand side or below the existing toolbars Default position of editor specific toolbox views is the screen margin on the right hand side Editor specific commands are added to the corresponding menus The positions of editor specific operating elements are restored the next time you start WinCC flexible if you have rearranged these in a previous session to suit your individual requirements 2 4 Working with windows and toolbars Introduction WinCC flexible allows you to customize the layout of frames and toolbars You can hide certain frames which are n
89. image or the dial layout for example Trend view In the Trend view you can show a group of trends which represent process values read from the PLC or from a log The trend coordinates are configurable i e the scaling units etc Recipe view The operator can use the Recipe view in runtime to view edit and manage data records Alarm view In the alarm view the operator can view selected alarms or alarm events in the alarm buffer or the alarm log in runtime CE Alarm window In the Alarm window the operator can view selected alarms or alarm events in the alarm buffer or the alarm log in runtime You always edit the template to configure the alarm window Alarm indicator The Alarm indicator warns the operator of alarm events which are not acknowledged yet You always edit the template to configure the alarm indicator Help indicator The help indicator indicates available help texts for the screen being displayed or the objects contained on the screen The help indicator is available for the HMI devices OP 73 and OP 73micro You always edit the template to configure the help indicator Note Some of the toolbox objects are either available with restricted functionality or not at all This depends on the HMI device you are configuring Unavailable properties of an object are displayed as deactivated and can not be selected WinCC flexible 2007 Compact
90. in a function list that is from the first to the last system function In order to avoid waiting times system functions with a longer running time for instance file operations are processed simultaneously For instance a subsequent system function can already be performed even though the previous system function has not yet been completed An example for the configuring of a function list can be found under Example Changing the operating mode on the HMI device with the current display e Script In a script you are able to use system functions in connection with orders and requirements in the code This way you can execute a script depending on a specific system state In addition return values of system functions can be evaluated for example Depending on the return value test functions can be carried out for example which in turn affect the course of the script WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO System functions and runtime scripting 12 1 Basics 12 1 4 Scripts Introduction You program VB script codes in a script You can use finished scripts in the project just like a system function When creating a script you determine its type and define transfer parameters Scripts of the type Function have a return value Scripts of a type Sub are referred to as procedures and have no return value Properties of scripts You can call up other scripts and system fu
91. in the following cases e To hide the labeling of objects when editing e To hide objects e g alarm windows while configuring screens further WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Creating Screens 5 7 Object libraries 5 7 Object libraries Introduction Project library Shared libraries Libraries are a collection of screen object templates They enhance the collection of available screen objects and programming efficiency because library objects are always available for reuse without the need to reconfigure them Your WinCC flexible software package is supplied with comprehensive libraries which contain for example Motor or Valve objects You may however define your own library objects Libraries are managed in the Libraries toolbox window of the Screens editor The toolbox displays write protected libraries in italic font The write protected system library is always displayed in italic fonts Write protected libraries cannot be edited There is one library for each project Objects of the project library are stored alongside with the project data and are available only for the project in which the library was created When you move the project to a different computer the project library created therein is included The project library remains hidden as long as it does not contain any objects In the context menu of the library view select the command Dis
92. m Overview Mouse functions Function Effect Left click Activates any object or executes an action such as a menu command or drag and drop Right click Opens a shortcut menu Double click left mouse button Starts an editor in the Project View or Object View or opens a folder lt Left mouse button Generates a copy of the object in the project view drag and drop gt lt CTRL left mouse button gt Selects a number of individual objects from the Object view one after the other lt SHIFT left mouse button gt Selects all objects within the rectangle lasso you have drawn with the mouse in the Object view WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 57 WinCC flexible Engineering System 2 6 Keyboard control 2 6 Keyboard control Introduction WinCC flexible provides a number of hotkeys which you can use to execute frequently required menu commands The menu shows whether a hotkey is available for the relevant command or not WinCC flexible also integrates all the standard hotkeys provided by Windows Important hotkeys The table shows you the most important hotkeys for use in WinCC flexible Hotkeys Effect lt Ctrl Tab gt lt Ctrl Shift Tab gt Activates the next previous tab in the work area lt Ctri F4 gt Closes the active view in the work area lt Ctri C gt Copies a selected object to the cl
93. media may be used depending on the HMI device e Memory card e USB stick e Hard disk 8 1 6 Configuration of recipes Introduction Recipes are configured differently depending on the intended use e If you are editing recipes with a recipe view in your project the values are only saved in recipe data records e If you are editing recipes in a recipe screen in your project the values are saved in recipe tags The following possible settings determine how the recipe data records recipe tags and PLC all interact Synchronize tags deactivated The data in a data record is only displayed and can only be edited in the recipe view Using these same tags outside of the recipe view does not affect their values WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 220 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Structure of a recipe management system 8 1 Basics Synchronize tags enabled Differences may occur during runtime between the values displayed in the recipe view and the values saved in the associated tags when you edit recipes with a recipe view and ina recipe screen To prevent this the recipe data record values must be synchronized with the values of the recipe tags P Redne ___ Recipe 3 HMI device Fevipe view synchronize i Bes Recipe tag Recipe screen Note Recipe tags can only be synchronized in the enhanced recipe view The values of the recipe view and the asso
94. must specify one value range on the HMI device and one on the PLC The value ranges will be mapped to each other linearly HMI device WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 130 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Working with Tags 4 3 Working with Tags As soon as data from the HMI device is written to an external tag it will be automatically mapped to the value range of the PLC As soon as data from the HMI device is read from the external tag a corresponding transformation will be performed in the other direction Note You can also use the system functions LinearScaling and InverseLinearScaling to automatically convert process values Application example 4 3 9 Principle The user enters length dimensions in centimeters although the controller expects inches The entered values are automatically converted before they are forwarded to the controller Using linear scaling the value range 0 100 on the PLC can be mapped to the value range 0 254 on the HMI device Indirect addressing of tags In multiplexes a type of indirect addressing the tag used is first determined at runtime A list of tags is defined for the multiplex tags The relevant tag is selected from the list of tags in runtime The selection of the tag depends on the value of the index tag In runtime the system first reads the value of the index tag Then the tag which is specified in the corresponding place in the
95. name is entered in the Communications dialog of the control panel and should not exceed 15 characters If you enter a longer name via SNMP in the MIB II database the device name in the control panel of the device will be reset to WinCE WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Structure of a recipe management system 8 1 Basics 8 1 1 Basic principles of recipes Introduction Using recipes Recipes are a collection of data that belongs together e g machine parameter settings or production data Examples e Machine parameter settings that are needed to convert production to a different product variant e Product components that result in different compositions for different end products A recipe has a fixed data structure The structure of a recipe is defined once at the configuration stage A recipe contains recipe data records These differ in terms of their values but not their structure Recipes are stored on the HMI device or on an external storage medium If for example production data is stored on a server in a database you can import the production data via a CSV file at runtime A recipe data record is generally transferred in full between the HMI device and PLC ina single step Recipes can be used in the following situations e Manual production You select the required recipe data and display it on the HMI device You modify the recipe data as required and
96. need on the target system a special instance of the Microsoft SQL server This instance is only available on a PC with an installed WinCC flexible ES If the configuration is to be carried out on a computer on which only WinCC flexible RT is installed the SQL Server has to be installed from the WinCC flexible CD The Setup file is located on CD 2 in the directory WinCCflexible Setup MSDE DISK1 This setting is not available on the Panel PC 477 User defined data source name if you want to assign the name of the data source yourself Size The size of the log is calculated from the number of data records and the rough size of an entry The size of an entry is dependent amongst other things on whether the alarm text and associated tag values which are also to be logged Alarm log properties 198 The following general properties can be established for alarm logs e Start up behavior Under Enable you can specify that logging starts when runtime is started Enable Enable logging at runtime start You can also control the behavior at runtime start in other ways Inorder to overwrite already enabled data with the new data enable Reset log In order to add logged data to an existing log enable Continue log WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Creating an Alarm System 6 4 Alarm logging Note System functions can be used to control the restart of
97. not match for example when using an incompatible DP slave Always check the DP configuration and the existence of appropriate DP modules in HW Config when you replace an HMI WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 85 Working with projects 3 2 Types of projects Selecting the operating system version of the HMI device 3 2 3 Principle 86 When you configure a new HMI device WinCC flexible automatically selects the latest operating system version If you want to use a new version on an HMI device with an older operating system version you must transfer an image of the relevant firmware version to the HMI device WinCC flexible provides the required images for the supported HMI devices You can find further information in chapter Operating System Transfer If you must use an older operating system version for compatibility reasons you must convert the WinCC flexible project to the previous version The version of the HMI device is automatically set to the previous version during conversion You can find further information in the chapter Converting projects If you want to use an older version on an HMI device with the current operating system version you must transfer an image of the relevant firmware version to the HMI device WinCC flexible provides the required images for the supported HMI devices You can find further information in chapter Operating System Tra
98. on a computer other than the original configuration computer at a later time NOTICE The source data file can be stored on the HMI device for back transfer purposes only if sufficient memory is available externally on the HMI device Overwriting the password list and recipes When the compiled project file is transferred the password list and recipes present on the HMI device are overwritten by the corresponding configuration data Consequently the option exists to create recipes and passwords as part of the project which are then available on each HMI device to which the project has been transferred During transfer the compressed recipe data is transferred to the HMI device When the transfer has ended runtime starts on the HMI device and decompresses the recipe data It then imports this into the project After import a system alarm is generated Prior to concluding import you must not export any recipe data You can only start an export or import of recipe data on the HMI device once the system alarm for a successful import export has been issued WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 390 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Transfer 19 1 Basics To prevent overwriting existing passwords and recipes clear the respective check box Another option for retaining the existing password list and recipes is to first back them up from the HMI device Once the transfer operation has been performed the
99. operating system To do this open the Control Panel and select Regional and Language Options On the Languages tab activate the check box Install files for East Asian languages Then click on Details under Text Services and Input Languages The dialog Text Services and Input Languages is opened On the Settings tab add the required default input language under the Installed Services For entering Asian characters on Western operating systems the Input Method Editor must also be installed To install under Windows XP in the Control Panel open Regional and Language Options gt Languages gt Details In the Text Services and Input Languages add the necessary default input language under Installed Services Under Windows 2000 you ll find the default input language in the Control Panel under Regional Options gt Input To enter Asian characters when configuring switch to the Asian entry method in the Input Method Editor Settings on Asian operating systems 13 3 3 Introduction Open If you are configuring on an Asian operating system to enter ASCII characters e g for object names you must switch to the English default input language As the English default input language is included in the basic installation of the operating system you do not need to install an additional input locale Project Languages editor You select the languages for creating your project in the Project Languages Editor e Th
100. process automation term and its translations In order to find the translation for a particular term quickly you can sort the table alphabetically according to the entries in a column To accomplish this click the header of the appropriate column WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 336 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Structure of Multilingual Projects 13 5 Working with dictionaries 13 5 3 User dictionary editor Introduction You can view and edit the terms of a user dictionary in the User dictionary editor Opening the User dictionary editor User dictionaries are displayed in the Localize gt Dictionaries gt User dictionaries group in the project view To open the User dictionary editor double click the name of a user dictionary Structure of the User dictionary editor Bi wns wvee KOO teeenes Soe hen Project view f Work area Work area The text of the user dictionary is shown in tabular form in the work area When creating a user dictionary you select the languages the user dictionary should include The table in the editor contains one column for each of these languages Each table row contains a term in the reference language and its translations provided you have entered these translations in the user dictionary WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 337 Structure of Multilingual Projects 13 6 Use
101. range for numerical tags Principle You can specify a value range with an upper and lower limit range for numerical tags If the process value of a tag falls into one of the limit ranges you can have an analog alarm e g a warning sent If the process value exceeds the value range you can configure this to trigger an analog alarm message or a function list If the operator enters a value for the tag that is outside the configured value range the input is rejected and the value will not be entered Note The text of the analog alarm message which is sent when the limit value is exceeded can be changed using the analog alarms editor Application example Use the limit values e g to warn the operator in time if the value of a tag enters a critical range 4 3 5 Start value of a tag The value of a tag at the beginning of a project You can configure a start value for numerical tags The tag will be preset to this value at runtime start In this manner you can ensure that the project begins in a defined state In the case of external tags the start value will be displayed on the HMI device until it is overwritten by the PLC or an operator input WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 127 Working with Tags 4 3 Working with Tags Application example You can preset an IO field to a default value Enter the desired default value as start value for the tag th
102. record e Date time e Date time PLC e Coordination The availability of the various area pointers is determined by the HMI used Communication between WinCC flexible and automation systems Industrial communication using WinCC flexible means that data are exchanged using tags and area pointers To acquire the data the HMI sends request messages to the automation system using a communication driver The automation system AS returns the requested data to the HMI in a response frame Communication drivers 204 A communication driver is a software component that develops a connection between an automation system and an HMI device The communication driver hence enables the tags in WinCC flexible to be supplied with process values WinCC flexible supports the interconnection of different automation systems with various communication drivers Users can select the interface the profile and the transmission speed for each specific communication partner WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Working with a connection 7 1 Basics Communication between HMIs The SIMATIC HMI HTTP Protocol is available for the communication between HMls This protocol is a component of the Sm rtAccess option The protocol can be used on PCs with WinCC flexible Runtime and on Panels as of the 270 series For detailed information refer to the SIMATIC HMI HTTP Protocol documentation Communicatio
103. regularly on the screen both in WinCC flexible Engineering System and in WinCC flexible Runtime Requesting a new License Key Contact customer support if the storage location of your License Key was damaged or lost The storage location of the License Key may be a floppy disk or USB stick WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 26 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 Introduction to WinCC flexible 1 3 Automation concepts 1 3 Automation concepts 1 3 1 Automation concepts with WinCC flexible Introduction WinCC flexible supports the configuration of many different automation concepts The following automation concepts can be implemented by default using WinCC flexible Control with one HMI device An HMI device which is directly connected to the PLC via the process bus is referred to as a single user system PROFIBUS Single user systems are generally used near production but can also be deployed to operate and monitor independent part processes or system sections WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 27 Introduction to WinCC flexible 7 3 Automation concepts PLC with several HMI devices Several HMI devices are connected to one or more PLCs via a process bus e g PROFIBUS or Ethernet PROFIBUS Such systems are deployed for example in a production line to operate the plant from several points WinCC flexible 2007 Compact
104. screens with the permanent window e Show tab order outputs the screens with the tab order 14 3 2 Outputting of data of selected objects Introduction WinCC flexible offers you the possibility to output the configuration data of individual objects The output can also be carried out for several selected objects Overview Select the objects for the data output in the project view or in the object view The output of the configuration data of a selected object is always performed with the standard layout The desired output options have to be set in this layout Selection of another layout is valid for the documentation of individual object data The configuration data of the selected objects are opened in the preview Outputting to a printer can be started from the preview The P button can be used to copy the data to the clipboard for further use WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO 349 Project documentation 14 3 Creating a project report 14 3 3 Selecting Objects for the Project Documentation Introduction WinCC flexible offers various options for outputting the configuration data of individual or multiple objects of a WinCC flexible component Start the output using the e The main menu e The toolbar e The shortcut menu of selected objects Selecting the objects Activate the object view and select the desired WinCC flexible component in the project vie
105. set the bus type to MPI DP under Mode If the settings for the routing are not displayed the system cannot identify a persistent routing connection Check the settings and the network addresses of the concerned stations The configured parameters must match the configuration of the stations on the system A routing connection for the transfer can only be established in an integrated project Note The routing transfer to PC based HMI devices with enabled station manager is not possible WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 417 Integration of WinCC flexible in STEP 7 20 3 Tag configuration 20 3 Tag configuration 20 3 1 Introduction Configuring tags with the Tag editor To simplify editing the absolute addresses of operands have symbolic names symbols in STEP 7 These symbols and their associations are listed in a symbol table In integrated projects WinCC flexible tags are connected directly to the symbols from the STEP 7 project The associated operands are automatically assumed The symbol selection also enables direct access to symbols within data blocks DB In order to rewire a tag which directly accesses a DB double click the icon in the Rewire dialog box to open the DB directly in STEP 7 Modify the tag connection in the open DB Accepting tags from STEP 7 418 To accept tags from STEP 7 open the tag editor in WinCC flexible A Symbol column is
106. systems used for controlling and monitoring production plants represent the upper end of the performance spectrum These include high performance client server systems Integration of SIMATIC WinCC flexible WinCC flexible is the HMI software for future proof machine oriented automation concepts with comfortable and highly efficient engineering WinCC flexible combines the following benefits e Straightforward handling e Transparency e Flexibility 1 2 WinCC flexible system overview 1 2 1 Components of WinCC flexible WinCC flexible Engineering System The WinCC flexible Engineering System is the software for handling all your essential configuring tasks The WinCC flexible edition determines which HMI devices in the SIMATIC HMI spectrum can be configured WinCC flexible Runtime WinCC flexible Runtime is your software for process visualization You execute the project in process mode in Runtime WinCC flexible options The WinCC flexible options allow you to expand the standard functionality of WinCC flexible A separate license is needed for each option WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 20 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Introduction to WinCC flexible 1 2 WinCC flexible system overview 1 2 2 WinCC flexible Engineering System Introduction WinCC flexible is an engineering system for all your configuring tasks WinCC flexible has a modular design With each higher edition you expand the spectr
107. tag If the process value which should be stored in the tag enters one of the limit ranges alarm messages can be sent If the process value lies outside the value range a function list for sending messages can be processed WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Working with Tags 4 3 2 Introduction Principle Addressing 4 3 Working with Tags e Start value You can configure a start value for every tag The tag will be set to this value at runtime start In this manner you can ensure that the project will begin in a defined state every time it is started e Logging and Logging limits To ease documentation and later evaluation data can be stored in different logs You can set the frequency and mode of logging Furthermore in WinCC flexible it is possible to limit logging to data that is within or outside specified logging limits All properties which were configured when the tag was created can be modified with the object list later where the tag is used Example Create a tag and configure its limit values Link this tag to an IO field The limit values which were set when the tag was created can be modified with the object list later when the IO field is configured Communication with the PLC using external tags External tags are used to exchange data between an HMI device and PLC An external tag is the image of a defined memory location in the PLC
108. the HW configuration 20 1 7 Working with objects Introduction Perform the following steps to create an integrated WinCC flexible project e Create a new HMI station in the SIMATIC Manager e Integrate a WinCC flexible project in STEP 7 Creating an HMI station Creating an HMI station in the SIMATIC Manager basically creates a new WinCC flexible project Inserting multiple HMI devices in a WinCC flexible project If you require multiple HMI devices in a WinCC flexible project you must insert the HMI devices in the project in WinCC flexible WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 404 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Integration of WinCC flexible in STEP 7 20 1 Basic Principles Inserting WinCC flexible objects Once a WinCC flexible project has been integrated in STEP 7 the project is displayed in the project window of the SIMATIC Manager A WinCC flexible project is displayed in the project window of the SIMATIC Manager in the same way as in the project window of WinCC flexible If you select a WinCC flexible element in the project window the objects of the WinCC flexible project are displayed in the work area KR SIMATIC Manager UT_B521 S7 031e C programme Siemens Step s proj UT_B BAR Fie Edit Insert PLC View Options Window Help A Historical data Me Reports Text and graphic lists ig Runtime user administration Device settings Screens Page Communication 4 Alarm managemen
109. the Properties group configure the behavior of the recipe at runtime under Settings Under Settings define e Synchronization between the recipe view and recipe screen e Transfer of the recipe tags between the PLC and HMI device m General Options gt Properties m Data Medium Settings Options z Synchronize tags m Transfer m Infotext I Tags offline In the Properties group define whether the transfer of recipe data records between the PLC and HMI device should be synchronized under Transfer Note If transfer of the recipe data record is to be synchronized you must set up the Data record area pointer for the selected connection m General gt Properties m Data Medium Settings m Options ae Transfer MV Synchronization ee Synchronize with Connection 1 gt WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 230 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Structure of a recipe management system 8 3 Viewing and editing recipes in Runtime 8 3 Viewing and editing recipes in Runtime 8 3 1 Recipe screen and recipe view You can display and edit recipes on the HMI device with a recipe view or recipe screen Recipe view The recipe view is an off the shelf screen object in WinCC flexible The recipe view is available in the following views e As enhanced recipe view e As simple recipe view The operating elements of the enlarged recipe view and the possible operations in
110. the HMI device version before making changes to the existing project After conversion of the HMI device versions all the existing configuration data are still included in the project file In the engineering system only the functions are still available and only the configuration data that are supported by the current HMI device in the selected version are displayed You can find further information in the chapter Project HMI device dependency WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Working with projects 3 6 3 6 1 Overview 3 6 2 Flat copy 3 6 Reusing project data Reusing project data Copying mechanisms In WinCC flexible copy the objects into the clipboard and insert the copied objects on another HMI device in the same project or into a different project In order to understand the different copying processes in WinCC flexible two different types of object connections need to be differentiated The Reference specifies a non exclusive connection between two objects The reference object may also be referenced by additional objects A tag or an log may for example be used by different objects of a program In comparison to a reference there are objects with an exclusive relationship to each other a so called Parent child relationship Parent child relationships are for example a screen and the objects contained in it or a screen folder containing screens
111. the editors supported by the HMI device currently in use This means that configuration is simple and easy to follow If you want to log projects it is sufficient to back up the project name hmi project name _log ldf files Before you continue with delta compilation you must also back up the project name rt and project name _RT_log LDF files The fwx and pwx files can be generated as required WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Working with projects 3 2 3 2 1 Principle 3 2 Types of projects Types of projects Types of projects Different types of projects can be created using WinCC flexible The type of project is dependent on the system configuration the size of the system or machine the required representation of the system or machine and the HMI devices used for operating and monitoring The following project types can be configured in WinCC flexible e Single user project Project which is used for a single HMI device e Multi user project Project in which several HMI devices are configured e Project for use on different HMI device Single user project Multi user project In most cases only one HMI device is configured During the configuration phase a project always displays precisely the function range which is supported by the currently selected HMI device If several HMI devices are used to operate a system WinCC flexible can
112. the help text configured for the simple recipe view e Element list Menu command Function Display help Displays the help text configured for the simple recipe view Rename Renames the selected data record A dialog box opens where you can enter the name Previous Opens the data record list Mouse control or touchscreen control of the simple recipe view 1 Select the desired recipe from the recipe view 2 Click on the gt button The shortcut menu is opened 3 Select the desired menu command The menu command is executed 4 Alternatively open the desired recipe in the recipe view The data record list is displayed 5 Open the desired data record Alternatively use the gt button to open the shortcut menu and select a menu command The menu command is executed Using the keyboard with the simple recipe view 1 Press the lt Tab gt key until the simple recipe view is selected 2 Select the desired recipe with the cursor keys 3 Press lt Right gt The shortcut menu is opened 4 Press the lt Down gt key until the desired menu command is selected 5 Press lt Enter gt to confirm the command 6 Alternatively press the number of the desired menu command The menu command is executed WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 243 Structure of a recipe management system 8 3 Viewing and editing recipes in Runtime 8 3 8 Reactio
113. the selection dialog by pressing the selection button Select the display class you want Close the selection dialog by pressing the A button In the SFM Alarms column of a link specify whether system errors should be displayed For more information consult the STEP 7 documentation Maximum number of ALARM_S alarms The maximum number of ALARM_S alarms in WinCC flexible is 32767 In practice the maximum number of configurable alarms is limited by the memory available on the HMI device Alarm class layout The ALARM_S and ALARM_D alarms are assigned to particular alarm classes in STEP 7 To edit the display options for these alarm classes select Alarms Settings gt Alarm Classes in the WinCC flexible project window Open the shortcut menu and select the Open Editor command You can recognize alarm classes by the S7 prefix in the alarm class name A oo j cl We ALA RM C SLA p gt Je mie i a a I On incoming lt No log gt OFF lt No log gt OperationMessage Off lt No log gt seratorInputRequest off lt No log gt ProcessControlMaintainance lt No log gt Off lt No log gt OFF lt No log gt On incoming lt No log gt off lt No log gt On incoming lt No log gt Off lt No log gt HUUUUUUUUURE HOUUUUUUUUUEE Off lt No log gt You configure the display options for the alarm classes using the Alarm Classes editor WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard
114. to the standard cycles available in WinCC flexible you can add cycles of your own which are based on the standard cycles Furthermore you can restrict the logging to those values that are within or outside of a tolerance band In this manner you can distribute tag values specifically to different logs for separate analysis later WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 129 Working with Tags 4 3 Working with Tags If you log a tag upon request this tag should not be logged in a sequence log in which the tags cyclically continued or if changed are logged If the logging upon request occurs only rarely then the sequence log is for example completed with cyclically logged values and the next sequence log is set up If there is then an access to the tag that has been logged upon request the tag cannot be shown as in runtime the current sequence log is being accessed As a remedy for rarely logged tags set up a separate tag log e Processing logged tag values further The logged process tag values can be evaluated directly in your WinCC flexible project e g in a trend view or with another application e g Excel 4 3 8 Linear scaling a tag Introduction Numeric data types can be processed with linear scaling The data in a PLC for an external tag can be mapped to a specific value range in the WinCC flexible project Principle To apply linear scaling to a tag you
115. tocibox VIEW siseses sR E E E A E needa EET S 10 4 Working WIEN repris osis sinaesinegs inean ae osna Ek EEEE iee AAN EE EAO aa 266 10 4 1 Creating a FEPOM riiseni et iiss dee ole igiasaeeuieuedensslaenartenessstdcasebiswalcdbhd sdennetdicadslsans tedseatees 266 10 4 2 Adapting the report properties cccecececcecceceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeesescaaeeeecesesecaeeeeeeeesecseneeeeeseeeeeeess 267 10 43 Objects for report CreatlOne is2 cccece eevee veda decor al auie Ades obits fas eae ede eet 269 10 44 USe Of repor ODJOCtS ize sisi cis fee es tdateee Aa uted a eaten be neat A AENA inne dessa 2 10 5 Reporting AlAPMS 2322 ccccccee cosecce cei tnceecanccde evade Macdv ev snndec end cc vevanacd ebitgeevevins ce EEE 1091 Reporting Alaris i ciccccteveceecevedtecencev cence viet A cee eta tae 10 5 2 Process output parameters for an alarm protocoll ccccceceeeeecceeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeeeseeeneeeeeeeeeteees 10 6 Reporting recipes cecccccceceeeeeeceee cece teen cece ea eaaeae eases seaaaaaeeecedcaqaaaaeeeeeseseceaeaeeeseeeeeeeeeteeeenaees 10 6 1 Reporting recipes 5 sca cccisssisucein cia cone ca leenaa cecavesesedus aaa cane auanvan TE EE EA AE EAE A 10 6 2 Editing output parameters for a recipe report cceeeccceceeeeeeeeceeeeeesecencaeeeeeeeecenaeeeeeeeeesenaes 10 7 OUTPUTLIMNG a report sasina a aa a cadadeybaaactaeanadaaeamnasavaevaceusiateasnecds 278 User ACMINISH ANON secsccciei cic cccceciessetateccssssensateessecteea
116. update Comment Text field for entering the comment Multiplexing Activating and deactivating indirect addressing 122 WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Working with Tags 4 2 Elements and basic settings Entry in the tree structure Fields Logging Data log Type of sampling Logging cycle Logging limits Upper limit constant Upper limit tag Upper limit no limit value Lower limit constant Lower limit tag Lower limit no limit value Events Hi limit exceeded List of functions that will be processed if the hi limit is exceeded Value change Function list which is processed after the process value changes Only the Value change event is available if a value greater than 1 is entered in the Array elements column Lower limit exceeded List of functions that will be processed if the value drops below the lower limit WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O 123 Working with Tags 4 3 Working with Tags 4 3 Working with Tags 4 3 1 Introduction Principle 124 Properties of a Tag In WinCC flexible certain properties can be configured for every tag The properties determine how you can use the tag in your configuration The following properties can be set for tags Name Every tag has a name w
117. view and output in Runtime Russian and other 1 Byte languages are not affected by this restriction When using Sm rtAcess and Sm rtService only those characters that are known on the HMI device can be used User administration No Asian or other complex characters may be used for user names and passwords Project documentation You can optimize the appearance of the printout by selecting the respective Asian or Eastern font from the Configuration Dialog for the project documentation Integration in STEP 7 Asian language projects integrated in STEP 7 must be started via WinCC flexible If you start integrated Asian projects via STEP 7 you will receive error messages and display errors Displaying regional special characters Regional special characters included in texts based on the WinCC flexible character set may lack clarity when output in Runtime on OP 73micro TP 177micro OP 73 OP 77A and TP 177A HMls The WinCC flexible High character set should be used on these HMls If WinCC flexible does not offer this character set search for the WinCC flexible High character set in the Fonts folder of the OS installation folder then double click the entry WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 330 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Structure of Multilingual Projects 13 4 Creating a project in multiple languages Project names and object names Only Asian characters can be used for project names and object
118. 0 500 500 256 1000 10000 21 2 Performance features Mobile Panel 277 IWLAN 4000 200 80 8 512 250 500 200 200 10 300 1000 4000 500 64 KB 20 10000 400 1s 300 400 500 500 256 1000 10000 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN 4000 200 80 8 512 250 500 200 200 10 300 1000 4000 500 64 KB 20 10000 400 1s 300 400 500 500 256 1000 10000 431 Appendix 21 2 Performance features Scripts Number of scripts Communication Number of connections Number of connections based on the SIMATIC HMI http Protocol Maximum number of connected Sm rtClients including a service client Mobile Wireless Number of zones Number of effective ranges Number of transponders assigned at least 1 zone or 1 effective range Number of configurable transponders Help system Number of characters in a help text Languages Number of runtime languages Scheduler Tasks User administration User groups Authorizations Passwords Project Size of the project file fwx 432 Mobile Panel 170 320 10 50 32 50 768 KB Mobile Panel 177 320 10 50 32 50 2 MB Mobile Panel 277 50 320 16 48 50 32 50 6 MB WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Mobile Panel 277 IWLAN 50 254 255 65534 320 16 48 50 32 50 6 MB Mobile Panel 2
119. 00 505 serial e SIMATIC 500 505 DP e SIMOTION e SIMATIC HMI HTTP Protocol e Telemecanique Comment Any comment about the connection You can use up to 500 characters Line break The line break carriage return separates the entries for one connection from the entries of the next WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O 143 Working with Tags 4 8 Importing Tags Format of the Import File for Connections An import file for connections has the following format connection SIMATIC S7 300 400 connection example A comma for example can be used as the list separator character If a list entry is empty there are two consecutive list separator characters When you are finished defining the entries on a line you do not have to put a list separator character at the end of the line Note An example of an import file is located in the Support Tag Import folder on the WinCC flexible CD Editing the Import File You can use programs such as MS Excel or a text editor to edit the import file Do not double click on the import file to open it in MS Excel because this may change the data format and the import will fail Instead start MS Excel and then use the Open command from the File menu Select Text files prn txt csv from the File type list Open the file in a simple text editor to check that the file has the correct format
120. 007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO System functions and runtime scripting 12 1 Basics 12 1 2 System functions Introduction System functions are pre defined functions you can use to implement many tasks in runtime even without having any programming knowledge e g e Calculations e g increasing a variable value by a specific or variable amount e Logging functions e g starting a process value log e Settings for instance changing the PLC or setting a bit in the PLC e Alarms e g after a different user logs on Application You can use system functions in a function list or in a script You cannot change system functions since system functions are pre defined functions When configuring a function list select the system functions from a selection list that is sorted by categories Litre Water lt 00000000 Recipename No ee Live Concentrate 00000000 J p ilo Sugar lt 00000000 Data recordname Noi iii ede EE Function list gt Properties DP Animations 1 E LoadDataRecord in eat ck Recipes pr s DeleteDataRecord wi palass ExportDataRecords E Actoata GetDataRecordFromPLC m Deactivate 2 GetDataRecordName m Change GetDataRecordTagsFromPLC ImportDataRecords CEN When you want to use a system function in the script you can select it from a selection list You can call up the selection list in the script with lt CtrltSpace gt WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Sta
121. 007 WinCC flexible 2005 WinCC flexible 2004 SP1 WinCC flexible 2005 SP1 WinCC flexible 2007 WinCC flexible 2005 WinCC flexible 2004 SP1 WinCC flexible 2005 WinCC flexible 2007 WinCC flexible 2005 SP1 WinCC flexible 2004 SP1 WinCC flexible 2004 SP1 WinCC flexible 2007 WinCC flexible 2005 SP1 WinCC flexible 2005 WinCC flexible 2004 HF2 WinCC flexible 2007 WinCC flexible 2005 SP1 WinCC flexible 2005 The system automatically converts a project from an earlier version of WinCC flexible to the current version when the project is opened The command Save as version is available for saving a project in an earlier version WinCC flexible 2005 SP1 or higher versions support the conversion of projects which are integrated in STEP 7 or SIMOTION Scout You can find further information in the chapter Converting an integrated project WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 99 Working with projects 3 5 Converting projects 3 5 2 Differences between projects of different WinCC flexible versions Introduction A number of special features should be observed when editing projects for different versions of WinCC flexible You can only use new functionality for a project that is to be saved in an earlier version of WinCC flexible to a limited extent When carrying out configuration for an earlier version of WinCC flexible only use functionality that is supported in the
122. 1 1AB01 2ABO Working with a connection 7 3 Connections and Protocols 7 3 Connections and Protocols HMI functionality The HMI is used to read save and record alarms and tags In addition the HMI can be used to intervene in the process N CAUTION Ethernet communication In Ethernet based communication such as PROFINET IO HTTP Sm rtAccess Sm rtService and OPC it is the end user who is responsible for the security of his data network The proper functioning of the device cannot be guaranteed in all circumstances targeted attacks for example can lead to an overloading of the device Data exchange The prerequisite for the operating and monitoring functions is the connection of the HMI device to a PLC Data exchange between the HMI and the PLC is controlled by a connection specific protocol Each connection requires a separate protocol Criteria for selecting the connection Criteria for selecting the connection between the HMI and the PLC are for example e PLC type e CPU in the PLC e HMI device type e Number of HMI devices per PLC e Structure and any bus systems of an existing plant e Amount of components additionally required Protocols Protocols are available for the following PLCs PLC Protocol SIMATIC S7 e PPI e MPI 1 e PROFIBUS DP e TCP IP Ethernet SIMATIC S5 e AS511 e PROFIBUS DP SIMATIC 500 505 e NITP e PROFIBUS DP SIMATIC HMI HTTP Protocol e HTTP HTTPS Ethern
123. 2 The whole number portion 37986 is the date calculated from 31 12 1899 In Excel you can now convert the time stamp into days To do this assign to the cell that contains the time stamp a respective format form the Date group Result 37986 results in 31 12 2003 3 The value after the comma 0 476928 indicates the time Multiply the value 0 476928 by 24 to obtain the hours 11 446272 Multiply the remainder 0 446272 by 60 results in the minutes 26 77632 Multiply the remainder 0 77632 by 60 results in the seconds 46 5792 Sum 11 26 46 579 This conversion is supported by Microsoft Excel for example WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 201 Creating an Alarm System 6 4 Alarm logging 6 4 8 Accessing the ODBC log database directly Introduction Application Principle 202 The storage location of a log can be a database or a file The database is addressed by means of its Data source name DSN Select the database you would like to use in WinCC flexible in the Windows Start menu under Settings gt Control panel gt ODBC data sources To store log data specify the Data source name DSN instead of a directory name when making your configuration settings With the DSN you are referencing the database and the storage location The entire functional scope of the database is available for additional processing and evaluation of log da
124. 2 7 Output View Introduction Description 50 The output window displays system alarms generated for example in a project test run Time 10 52 34 45 10 52 34 95 10 52 34 95 10 52 34 95 10 52 34 95 10 52 34 95 10 52 34 95 10 52 34 95 10 52 34 95 10 52 34 95 10 52 34 95 10 52 34 95 ia Category Compiler Compiler Compiler Compiler Compiler Compiler Compiler Compiler Compiler Compiler Compiler Compiler x Description Compiling started Linking target Bediengeraet_1 ES2RT Analyzing Converting images Converting fonts Invalid location or size phisis ti inDild t Checking results Writing output files Succeeded with 0 errot Copy Time stamp 09 05 200 maximal 262016 bytes Compiling finished Copy all messages Clear all The output view normally displays system alarms in the order they occur The categories define the corresponding WinCC flexible module which has generated a system alarm For example system alarms for the Generator category are generated during the consistency check To sort system alarms click the header of the corresponding column The pop up menu can be used to jump to an error location or a tag and copy or delete system alarms The output view shows all system alarms of the last action A new action overwrites all previous system alarms You can still retrieve old system alarms from a separate log file WinCC flexible 2007 Comp
125. 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 377 Managing project versions 17 6 Working with project versions 17 6 17 6 1 Principle Introduction 378 Working with project versions Comparing versions The current project with its current status is compared to a project version This can be the same project version on which the current project is based or a project version with a lower or higher version number The project version is opened and compared with the current project status The results of the comparison are displayed in the Compare versions table similar to the change log A language change does not influence the object names determined by version comparison To visualize object names in the new user interface language repeat the version comparison The Compare versions table shows all the objects that have been created deleted or modified Created The object exists in the current project but not in the project version Deleted The object exists in the project version but not in the current project Changed The object exists in the current project and in the project version However the object properties are different When you select a changed object in the Compare versions table and this object has been changed in the current project a second table is displayed The second table shows which properties were changed for the selected object WinCC flexible 2007
126. 2ABO WinCC flexible Engineering System 2 8 WinCC flexible Start Center 2 8 WinCC flexible Start Center Introduction With WinCC flexible supports the accelerated opening of projects For the accelerated start while the operating system is booting some services for WinCC flexible are launched in the background To operate the WinCC flexible Start Center during the installation a symbol is created in the Taskbar Notification Area the so called Tray area of the taskbar Start Center Symbol WinCC flexible Start Center Menu Commands The popup menu for operating the Start Center is opened with a right mouse click on the symbol in the Tray area of the taskbar This includes the following menu commands Menu command Function Start WinCC flexible Starts WinCC flexible and opens the project wizards WinCC flexible Start Center gt Enable Enables the quick start for WinCC flexible necessary services for the quick start are loaded during start up of the operating system WinCC flexible Start Center gt Deactivate Disables the quick start for WinCC flexible no additional services are launched during start up of the operating system Help Opens the WinCC flexible Start Center online help Info Opens a window displaying the version information for the Start Center End Ends the Start Center Start WinCC flexible During the installation of WinCC flexible WinCC flexible Start Center is also automati
127. 310 Log contents Display 196 Log database Direct access with ODBC 202 Log of changes 383 In integrated project 379 In integrated projects 399 405 446 Log type Circular log Level dependent Segmented circular log Logging Alarms Basic principles 195 Circular log 250 Log type 196 250 Segmented circular log 196 Tag value 249 Tags 129 256 Logging a change Field of application Operator control element Working area 386 Logging changes 379 Application 379 Logging cycle Tag Logical error M managing Graphics 162 Managing Project version 369 374 Managing project versions 369 Application example 369 Control element 375 Field of application 369 Property view 377 Working area 376 Memory requirements Reci e 425 Menu Command 44 Menu command Simple recipe view Migrating WinCC or ProTool projects Migration 60 Principle 60 Mobile Units Use Mobile Po ss 351 352 356 357 358 Field of application 3 How it works 352 Working area 357 Modifying recipe structures Mouse functions WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Index Movement path 37 Multiple selection Multiplexing Multi user project N Navigation 153 Navigation arrow Navigation control navigation structure Specifying Navigation Structure NetPro Editing connections O Object 269 Access 3 adding Activ
128. 4 Applies to N Data record name lt 13 characters N 12 Data record name gt 12 characters N 40 D1 D2 and D3 are rounded to the next higher number Note If you use both tags and arrays in a recipe you have to add the results of both formulas to calculate the total memory required WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 426 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Appendix 21 2 Performance features 21 2 1 7 Memory space requirements for recipes of special devices Introduction The following calculation of memory requirements of recipes is only valid for the OP 77A and TP 177A devices Restraints The HMI device provides 39 KB of memory space for recipes This memory space may not be exceeded The total memory space for recipes is calculated as follows Total of all recipes recipe with highest memory requirement Each recipe may not exceed a maximum memory space of 19 KB Calculation of memory requirements The memory space requirement of each recipe in KB is calculated based on the three addends D1 D2 D3 Rule e D1 number of data records x M Rule for M size of a data record M 1 x number of elements of a byte 2 x number of elements of 2 bytes 4 x number of elements of 4 bytes 8 x number of elements of 8 bytes K Rule for K size of the string elements K number of string elements x string length 1 x 2 e D2 data record size D2 4 number of lan
129. 5 3 Working with objects 5 3 5 Object Groups Introduction Groups are several objects that are grouped together with the Group function You edit a group in the same way as any other object Overview WinCC flexible offers the following three methods of editing multiple objects together e Multiple selection e Creating object groups e Creating faceplates The following table shows how the three methods differ from one another Table 5 1 Methods of editing multiple objects together Multiple selection Creating object groups Creating faceplates Groups Editor Faceplates Resizing v v vA Scale group v v vA Changing the position v vA v Changing the display v Special case Store in library v Editing mode In order to edit an object of a group individually change the editing mode in the shortcut menu In this mode you can access an individual object and its properties Expanding groups You can add further objects or groups to a group The group is then increased by the new objects If you then split the group again all the objects are ungrouped even those objects that you have added to the group as a group The sequence in which you have grouped the objects is not taken into consideration Rectangle surrounding the object With a group only one rectangle surrounding the object is shown for the entire group However in the case of a multiple selection the rectangles surrounding all objects are dis
130. 67 WinCC flexible Engineering System 2 7 Working with WinCC flexible No function appears in the first line of the function list when no function has been configured for the object Click on the No function field A selection button is displayed Use the selection button to open the list of available system functions The system functions are arranged in the selection list according to categories Select the desired system function gain xiri EE Function list gt pigs 1 lt No Function gt X aay Ef System Functions C 4 limit All system Functions Alarms Calculation Edit bits Other Functions Screens Settings System i a a a System functions If a parameter is needed for the system function the entry No value appears after the selection of the system function in the next line Click on the No value field A selection button is displayed Use the selection button to open the object list and select the required parameter m General BE Function list p Properties P Events lE SetBit Change value 1 eee Ee m High limit ca ai m Low limit 2 lt No function gt fl Ls lt Undefined gt Tag lt No address gt Tag_0 lt No address gt Tag_1 vw O Tag_3 lt No address gt Tag_ lt No address gt 4 4 m fm 4 fm 4 4 Parameter selection The function is configured in the function list Configure other functions as required Using the buttons and change the sequence of the
131. 691 1AB01 2ABO Appendix Alarms Number of discrete alarms Number of analog alarms Character length of an alarm Number of process values per alarm Size of the alarm buffer Number of queued alarm events Screens Number of screens Number of fields per screen Number of tags per screen Number of complex objects per screen Recipes Number of recipes Number of elements per recipe User data length in bytes per data record Number of data records per recipe Number of recipe elements in the project Reserved memory for data records in the internal Flash Logs Number of logs Number of entries per log file including all log segments Number of log segments cyclical trigger for tag logging Trends Number of trends Text lists and graphic lists Number of graphic lists Number of text lists Total number of lists Number of entries per text or graphic list Number of graphic objects Number of text elements Mobile Panel 170 2000 50 80 8 256 64 500 50 50 100 200 800 200 50 100 300 300 30 1000 2500 WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 Mobile Panel 177 2000 50 80 8 256 64 500 50 50 100 200 800 200 50 100 300 300 30 1000 2500 Mobile Panel 277 4000 200 80 8 512 250 500 200 200 10 300 1000 4000 500 64 KB 20 10000 400 1s 300 40
132. 7 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 59 WinCC flexible Engineering System 2 7 Working with WinCC flexible Creating or Loading a Project After starting WinCC flexible a wizard guides the user through all the steps which are necessary to create a new project The user is prompted for example to enter a name for the project and select an HMI device If WinCC flexible is already open select the New command to create a new project In some circumstances a wizard will appear to guide you through the process To load an existing project select the Open command from the Project menu Device based dependency WinCC flexible only provides the functionality supported by the HMI devices selected The Project View displays the editors available for configuration Migration If an existing ProTool or WinCC project is opened in WinCC flexible the data is converted The user is guided through the conversion process and informed of the progress of the conversion 2 7 3 Editing Multiple Projects with WinCC flexible Principle WinCC flexible only allows one project to be open for editing at any time If projects should be copied globally for example restart WinCC flexible and then open the required project Note If both ProTool and WinCC flexible are installed on your PC you can only open one of the programs at a time Several HMI devices can be set up parallel in each project Each opened WinCC flexible is shown in the Windows t
133. 77F IWLAN 50 254 127 255 65534 320 16 48 50 32 50 6 MB Appendix 21 2 Performance features Table 21 3 Panels OP73 OP77A OP77B TP170A TP170B TP177A TP177B TP270 TP 277 OP 170B OP 177B OP270 OP 277 Tags Number of tags in 1000 1000 1000 500 1000 500 1000 2048 2048 the project Number of power tags Number of elements 50 100 1000 100 1000 250 1000 1000 1000 per array Number of local 500 250 500 500 1000 1000 tags Alarms Number of alarm 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 classes Number of discrete 500 1000 1000 1000 2000 1000 2000 4000 4000 alarms Number of analog 3 10 50 50 20 50 200 200 alarms Character length of 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 an alarm Number of process 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 values per alarm Size of the alarm 256 256 256 128 256 256 256 512 512 buffer Number of queued 16 64 64 16 64 64 64 250 250 alarm events Screens Number of screens 500 500 500 250 500 250 500 500 500 Number of fields per 20 30 30 20 50 30 50 200 200 screen Number of tags per 20 30 30 20 50 30 50 200 200 screen Number of complex 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 10 10 objects per screen WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 433 Appendix 21 2 Performance features OP 73 OP77A OP77B TP170A TP170B TP177A TP177B TP270 TP 277 OP 170B OP 177B OP270 OP277 Recipes Number of recipes 100 100 100 300 300 Number of elements 200
134. A specific area effective range or zone is defined by the maximum distance from one or more transponders Transponders send their ID in a conical pattern while the HMI device measures its distance from the transponder The configured zones and effective ranges are stored on the HMI device The HMI device is exactly within an area if the following conditions are fulfilled for at least one transponder in the area e The HMI device is within the radio cone of the transponder so that it receives the transponder ID e The HMI device measures a distance from the transponder that is less than the configured distance of the area WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Mobile Wireless 15 1 Basic principles Example e A uniform distance of 8 m from both Transponder1 and Transponder2 is configured for the MixingPlant zone This together with the opening angle of the radio cone defines the outer limit of the zone for a screen change e Ascreen change to the MixingPlant_1 screen is configured on entering the MixingPlant zone e A uniform distance of 5 m from Transponder1 is configured for the MixingAxisControl effective range This together with the opening angle defines the outer limit of the effective range in which safety related operator input is possible The HMI device measures the following distances e A distance of 7 m from Transponder 1 e A distance of 12 m from T
135. Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO 331 Structure of Multilingual Projects 13 4 Creating a project in multiple languages 13 4 4 Project texts editor Project texts editor You have access to all texts of a project in the Project texts editor Examples e Texts in screens e Alarms e Comments e Operator notes e Texts of recipes Central text display Opening the Project texts editor To open the Project texts editor double click Project texts in the Localize group in the project view Structure of the Project texts editor E WinCC flexible 2005 Advanced Projekt hmi Proet Edt We Insert Format aceplates Optior 3 x Project texts Reference language e column a egener n pu v Group identical texts Refres J ca Display empty text elements WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 332 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 Structure of Multilingual Projects 13 4 Creating a project in multiple languages Elements in the Project texts editor In the Project texts editor a single column is created for each project language you have set The text of a configured object is represented in all languages in a single row in the table The rows are divided into the following columns e Reference language column The first column displays the texts in the reference language e Reference column The Referenced by column indicates the editor where the texts originated
136. B01 2AB0O 111 Working with projects 3 12 Debugging projects 3 12 Debugging projects Testing projects using the simulator The simulator enables the project to be simulated directly on the configuration computer You can simulate your projects for all configurable HMI devices The simulation program is an autarkic tool which is installed alongside with WinCC flexible The simulator enables you to test the response of the configuration by setting values for tags and area pointers Tag values can be simulated via a simulation table or the system communication with a real PLC can be simulated Testing projects for Windows CE devices 112 Note the following information when simulating a project for a Windows CE HMI device The simulator may generate Runtime error messages if the project contains scripts with VBS objects Reason some VBS objects are dependent on the operating system The project for the Windows CE HMI device is simulated on a Windows operating system such as Windows XP In this case the Windows XP script engine is used for simulation If VBS objects that are only supported by Windows CE are contained in the script corresponding error messages are displayed The online help VBScript for Windows CE provides a list of functions which differ from those listed in VBScript for Windows WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Working with projects 3 13
137. C flexible projects please ensure that you convert all the projects to the same version You must convert the project after having copied an HMI device in STEP 7 or NetPro which was not created in the current version of WinCC flexible The system requests you to confirm conversion of the project You cannot copy the Runtime of a project which is not converted to the current version The Runtime is excluded from the copy operation you initiated This copy of the HMI device is therefore incomplete and must be deleted System requirements for converted projects To edit a converted project you require WinCC flexible in the version selected during conversion A service pack in the version specified must be installed Please also note the system requirements and any service packs required for the operating system Information on the system requirements can be found in the documentation of the respective version of WinCC flexible or STEP 7 With regard to an invalid HMI device check whether a hardware support package is available for the corresponding version of WinCC flexible For more information please refer to the chapter Retroactive installation of new HMI devices WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 407 Integration of WinCC flexible in STEP 7 20 1 Basic Principles 20 1 8 2 Converting an integrated project to the current WinCC flexible version Introduction Requirement Pro
138. Cener essri EEE EEE Working with projects cccsccceeeeeceeeeeece aaaea aE Eaa a aa aa ae Aaaa ae aaa SES EE ERAEN E 3 1 Basis for working With ProjeCts ccceeeneeeeeceeeneeeeceeeaeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeseeaaeeeseeaeeeeedaeeeseeeeeseeeeeeaes 8 3 1 1 Working wii pro O CUS ics iiecces sicexcee toewceecasturae ive ete cha engduiie A 8 3 1 2 Component parts of a projetir inaaianei eanan ia aeda aiaa aa i ia aidaa aai 8 3 2 TYPGS Of ProjeiS orneroieekaiiii iari aE RE T E RO 8 3 2 1 Typesol Mol E nora e E E edad 8 3 2 2 HMI device dependency of Projects ecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeseeaeeeeeaeeeseeaeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeseenae mant 84 3 2 3 Configuring a project for several HMI devices ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeseneeeeseneaeeesenaees 8 3 2 4 Creating a project for use on different operating units 0 ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeteeaeeesenaeees 88 3 2 5 WinCC flexible integrated in SIMOTION and STEPT ccccccceeceeeeneeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeenaeeeeseaas 8 3 3 Multilingual configurati cc ieiesietee diese aes dias ease dsliadiiibauiniieddsliadsi eecdianie 3 4 Editing PrOj CtS ics it ccccvieesdeiviten cette detesscduens edi edevenie ientiieadei TEET 91 3 4 1 Editing projeCtSiiiciicc vinesdeisiedeiviteicdviesieedeividelie E egestas T 91 3 4 2 Displaying PIO OCIS esensi E vanes ches ven S EEE A TES E UEO Ea 93 3 4 3 Working in the Project View cecccceeeeeeeee eee cneeeeeeeneee ete ee eee aeeee tees Anat EEEn Ennas
139. Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Logging changes 1 8 18 1 Applications for the change log Definition The change log documents all changes made in a project in a continuous table The table contains the changed objects and object properties Changes of STEP 7 and SIMOTION are not explicitly identified in an integrated project Application example 1 Certain industrial sectors have a special interest in complete and authentic verification of the entire lifecycle of a product and the production conditions The evidence of who did what when where and why is archived It can then be documented even years later One example is the pharmaceutical industry 2 The American authority FDA Food and Drug Administration for example is responsible for specifying the regulations for food and drugs Not only do the FDA and various technical inspection companies require documentation of project changes but many other industrial sectors and products are subject to this documentation regime 3 Engineering businesses process customer orders in their project configuration The customers often demand changes that go beyond the framework of the contract The change log helps to document these changes and creates a basis for calculating the additional costs WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO 379 Logging changes 18 2 Change log of a project
140. Default value Least sion Ba Ba bit an Image version Import of variables se Project text 333 Recipe data record Index tag 131 Indirect addressing Initializing Password 390 Recipe 390 Insert Object 104 object 04 Object Installing Option Instance Reusing integrated project Log of changes Integrated project Change log 379 Log of se 399 Version management 550 Integration in SIMOTION SCOUT 89 Integration in STEP 7 IntelliSense Internal communication Ina PC station Internal tag 3 Introduction Project documentation IO field 156 445 Index L Language In various editors Language dependenc System function 311 Language support Toolbar 331 Language switching In Runtime 322 ProSave 394 Language dependent format Layout Cover sheet 345 Editing 346 347 Project report 344 Property Regional format of the date time currency and numbers 326 Runtime security setting Simple recipe view 241 Least significant bit set 72 Library 48 108 169 Global 49 Project related 49 View in the Toolbox 169 Library object License for option 26 for WinCC flexible ES 25 for WinCC flexible Runtime 25 License Key Transfer to an HMI device License key diskette 397 License Key stroage location Licensing order 26 Limit range List entry 70 in the graphic list in the text list Local assignment of a function key Local tags
141. E Eastern characters Input on the HMI device Edit objects in SIMATIC Manager 405 In the SIMATIC Manager 405 Editing Layout 346 Project 91 Report property Editing connections With NetPro With WinCC flexible 403 Editing language 325 Editing possibilities Project report 348 Editor 64 Brief aba of the editors Closing Cross reference list Graphical editor 61 93 Open 6 Possible WinCC flexible editors Project documentation Properties Screens System dictionary 336 Tabular editor 62 91 i ee objects Editor 6 Effective range 353 358 359 360 Overview 361 Runtime 360 Working area Effective ranges editor Effects in Runtime Runtime security setting Element list 232 Ellipse 156 269 Engineering support Overview Enhanced recipe view 232 Ethernet 209 211 ead Event 364 365 444 Configuring Time based event 365 execute Scripts in runtime Export Project text Exporting Recipe data record External communication With a PC station External image file Creating a folder reference managing 160 External tag 310 F Faceplate 108 Application Dynamic control Faceplate instance Reusing instances Structure 136 Faceplate instance 172 Reusing Fault 1 363 Logging a change 379 Managing project versions Planning jobs 363 User administration Filtering of the Alarm View 179 Flip Object 160 Function Dependency on th
142. E 120 4 2 2 Basic Settings for Tags and Arrays 4 3 Working With Tags iE eee 4 3 1 Properties ofa Tag xicccc savcceecdavece ceaenceecndencataeceacnccecdanccendaneaee E R EE 4 3 2 Communication with the PLC using external tags s sessssesesrnessnnesesnnenssnnntennesssnnaatnneenannaaeenne 4 3 3 Changing the tag CONfIQUIATION 0 0 eee cence te eeeee ee teee eee eeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeaaeeeseeaaeeseeiaeeeseeaeeeseeeeeeaaes 4 3 4 Tag limit Values iceceticentectiens tcecedisecclosnetbedleauiyieceaiyieldaaiy cesauaesaeeanaseedinaveettataeedbangeedn doses anteeetnise 4 3 5 Sart Value o ALAC cesiecee ceased E A T S A S A eden vondaeetiad 4 3 6 Updating the Tag Value in Runtime 2 00 ececee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeteaeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeseeeaeeeseaeeeeeees 4 3 7 Datalogi ee E E N 4 3 8 Linear scaling atagia aeania eee E GR Gia ete R 130 4 3 9 indirect addressing OF TAGS wits csccteeeised neice ana a AEA DE ENAA AA R EANAN 4 4 Array DASICS urcenia ini Eea EREE SREE R 4 5 Examples Of AI ayS mercii danii cerier PAi EEEE ELENE AAEE EATE EEE EA 134 4 6 Cycle DASICS icri ER EATE AEE 4 7 Working with structures 4 7 1 SIPUCTUIE DASICS sira a E E eect ane alee 4 7 2 SUUCTUES Edo sac evisede tanticcn vides A S a a E ancien 4 7 3 Managing Structures 0 cccececcceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeseaeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeseneaeeeseeaeesaeeeeeenaeees 4 8 importing TAGS acco cectiee ceeetdaaee ceca ceecbides pucdhdads sees shiees testing deuateneessnsadessdiced
143. Example You have created two screens in the Screen Editor Screen_1 and screen_2 3 faceplate instances are inserted in Screen_1 and 4 faceplate instances in Screen_2 Each faceplate instance is linked with an external tag of a structure data type The structure contains 10 structure elements Screen 1 3 faceplate instances 10 structure elements corresponds to 30 external tags 30 PowerTags Screen 2 4 faceplate instances 10 structure elements corresponds to 40 external tags 40 PowerTags In WinCC flexible Runtime 70 PowerTags are counted for both screens This also applies to the structure elements that are not required 4 7 2 Structures Editor Introduction You create the structures and structure elements in the Structures Editor Structures are project global data and apply to all HMI devices within the entire project Open Double click on Add structure in the Structures group of the project view A new structure is generated in the project view and the work area is opened with a new structure WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 137 Working with Tags 4 7 Working with structures Structure Bi wink ewe MO tirones e Object view EFE Work area The structure elements are displayed in table form in the work area You use the table cells to edit the properties of the structure elements To sort the table by its column entries simply click the colu
144. Introduction Options are available for the following components e WinCC flexible Engineering System e WinCC flexible Runtime on PC based HMI devices e Non PC based HMI devices You can operate device dependent runtime options on the HMI devices Each option requires a license WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 23 Introduction to WinCC flexible 1 2 WinCC flexible system overview Options for WinCC flexible Engineering System Options available for the WinCC flexible Engineering System SIMATIC Function Availability WinCC flexible options WinCC flexible Version management and modification WinCC flexible Compact ChangeControl tracking Standard Advanced Options for WinCC flexible Runtime The options depend on the target system used The following options are available for WinCC flexible Runtime on PC based HMI devices or for non PC based HMI devices 24 SIMATIC Function Non PC based HMI SIMATIC panel WinCC flexible RT devices PCs options WinCC flexible Archiving functionality in runtime From Panel 270 x Archives WinCC flexible Recipe functionality in runtime Device dependent x Recipes available no licensing necessary WinCC flexible Remote control and remote From Panel 270 x Sm rtAccess monitoring as well as communication between different SIMATIC HMI systems WinCC flexible Remote maintenance and serv
145. L server This instance is only available on a PC with an installed WinCC flexible ES If the configuration is to be carried out on a computer on which only WinCC flexible RT is installed the SQL Server has to be installed from the WinCC flexible CD The Setup file is located on CD 2 in the directory WinCCflexible Setup MSDE DISK1 This setting is not available on the Panel PC 477 User defined data source name if you want to assign the name of the data source yourself WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 254 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Logging and displaying tags 9 2 Elements and basic settings e Size The size of a log is calculated as follows The number of items the length of each tag value to be logged In the Property view the minimum and maximum sizes of the log using the currently selected Number of data records are shown under the Number of data records input field The maximum size of a log is limited by the amount of storage on the HMI device Settings for the log behavior e Start up behavior Under Enable you can specify that logging starts when runtime is started Enable the checkbox Enable logging at runtime start You can also control the behavior at runtime start in other ways Enable Reset log if you want to overwrite previously logged data with the new data or Append data to existing log if you want to append new data to an existing log Note You can use sys
146. O i 19 2 3 Effective ranges csc lesseeccecisceccecen educate ceueudeaats eceeuenh eueueevendcadig dd adap eevches E TEATE covers ecaananies k 15 2 4 Effective ranges working area sssssrsisxusisninnnne nani nn innn RENAN ANANN ANANA ANNARA ANNA NANANA ANNARA ANAA SN 15 3 Working with effective ranges srsssinsanisnnin innnan aa N NA A AEA A PANNING JODS ae E E T E A A E E O 16 1 Field of application of the scheduler ccceccecceceeeeeeeceeceeeteeeeecaeeeeeeeeeecenaeeeeeeesesecnieeeeenaness 16 2 Working with jobs and events 0 0 ee cecececeeeeeee ce eeeeeeeeeeteaeeeeseaeeeeesneeeeseneeeeeseneeeeseeaeeesenaeeaaeess 16 3 EIGMOMt E E E E A E S A E k 16 3 1 Scheduler dilo sarespoiain arn EE k 16 3 2 Work area of the Scheduler editor ssssessrsnesssnnnnssnuneennnnnnnnaannnaatannanennannannaannnnaaannaaan anann i Managing project Versions i nenie a a d a a eee todarare a 17 1 Applications for project versioning ccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeecaeceeeeeeesecceeeeeeeesecsenieeeeeaaeess 17 2 Basics of Version MANAGEMENL eeeceeeeeneeeeeene ene eeeeeaeee states ANNAN A NANANA A NAA ANANA ARRA ANA AANA 17 3 TUN Ken A A a E A a E A 17 4 Brane hieecceneree iea a e a E E E A E E 17 5 Elements onasini a ea adea A aaa aaa aia aai eia adaa aaaea a K 15 1 Projeci versions COLON nessis erinan A K 17 5 2 Change log operator controlS seeeesseeesreeesriesreerrneeeerreeeereatiuaaarnnnetraaaaitnnaatenadtnnnad
147. OOT CLSID 834128A2 51F4 11D0 8F2000805F2CD064 VersionIndependentProgID Default ScriptDebugSvc ScriptDebugSvc The LocalServer32 file path must point to the installation folder of Microsoft Script Debugger You must edit the path name accordingly if Microsoft Script Debugger is installed in a different folder WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO 319 System functions and runtime scripting 12 6 Runtime behavior of functions in runtime 12 6 12 6 1 Principle Runtime behavior of functions in runtime Completion of the function list in runtime In runtime a function list is completed from top to bottom A distinction is made between synchronous completion and asynchronous completion so that no waiting periods ensue during completion The distinction is made by the system by evaluating the different runtimes of the system functions Scripts are always processed synchronously independent of the runtime If a system function returns an error status the completion of the function list is cancelled Synchronous completion During synchronous completion the system functions in a function list are performed one after another The previous system function must be finished before the next system function can be performed Asynchronous completion 12 6 2 Principle 320 System functions which perform file operations such as storing and reading have a longer runti
148. Older project version rae pe To access an older project state open the respective project version for example version 2 A copy of version 2 is then created in the project folder with the name Project_2 and opened in WinCC flexible You can now edit the older project state in Project_2 The changes are based on version 2 Version 2 is the current version WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 371 Managing project versions 17 4 Branch 17 4 Principle 372 Branch e Trunk Branch 2 1 In order to record the project status of Project_2 in the version management create a new project version of Project_2 Since version 3 already exists the new project version is saved as version 2 1 1 Version 2 1 1 is the current version The next version is 2 1 2 Now there is a branch based on version 2 in addition to the trunk development e amp Trunk Branch 2 1 To continue the development of this branch you always open Project_2 in the project folder When you create another new version of Project_2 it will be saved as version 2 1 2 Version 2 1 1 is now the current version Branch 2 1 is formed by all project versions 2 1 1 2 1 2 2 1 3 etc Note A branch always begins with a version for example version 2 Several branches may arise from the same version This is why a branch is always assigned an extended version number f
149. Options WinCC flexible 20 Application 20 Consistent configuration 2 Customizing the user i Editing connections Edition 59 Engineering support 33 Engineering System 22 Individual configuration Multilingual user interfaces Quick start Runtime software 453 Index Start 79 Starting 79 without licensin Working with WinCC flexible WinCC flexible WinCC project Migratin Windows 54 Collapse 55 Combining 55 Docking 54 Wireless 351 Wireless network WLAN WLAN area Work area Effective range l Managing project versions of the screen editor Planning jobs Script editor 304 Screen oe on Structures Ame B34 editor 121 186 454 User administration 284 working in the Object View 96 with cross reference list 109 with projects 8 Working area 359 Logging a change 386 Mobile Wireless 357 359 Zone 3 Working environment resetting User dependency 78 Working step 62 Restoring 6 to create screens 152 Undo Write permissions for the initial start of WinCC flexible 80 Z Z 3 an ta 187 189 190 497 253 336 Zones editor 3 WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O
150. Runtime project on a PC WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 Preface WinCC flexible Migration Describes how to convert an existing ProTool project to WinCC flexible Describes how to convert an existing WinCC project to WinCC flexible Describes how to migrate ProTool projects with an HMI migration from OP3 to OP 73 or OP 73 micro Describes how to migrate ProTool projects with an HMI migration from OP7 to OP 77B or OP 77A Describes how to migrate ProTool projects with an HMI migration from OP 17 to OP 177B describes how to migrate ProTool projects with HMI migration from RMOS graphic devices to Windows CE devices Communication Communication Part 1 describes the connection of the HMI device to SIMATIC PLCs Communication Part 2 describes the connection of the HMI device to third party PLCs Operating Instructions Operating instructions for SIMATIC HMI devices OP 73 OP 77A OP 77B TP 170micro TP 170A TP 170B OP 170B OP 73micro TP 177micro TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B TP 270 OP 270 TP 277 OP 277 MP 270B MP 370 MP 377 Operating instructions for mobile SIMATIC HMI devices Mobile Panel 170 Mobile Panel 277 Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Mobile Panel 277 IWLAN Operating instructions compact for SIMATIC HMI devices OP 77B Mobile Panel 170 WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O
151. S MiniWeb HTML Pages via Internet Explorer 80 HTTP 443 HTTPS MiniWeb HTML Pages using internal Pocket Explorer 80 HTTP 443 HTTPS WebServices SOAP 80 HTTP 443 HTTPS OPC XML CE as OPC Master 80 HTTP 443 HTTPS OPC DCOM SendEmail 25 Transfer via Ethernet CE Stub PC Loader PC 2308 alternative 50523 Logging via Ethernet CSV File 139 445 137 138 Logging via Ethernet database 211 Working with a connection 7 5 SNMP and MIB on HMIs 7 5 SNMP MIB 212 SNMP and MIB on HMIs The SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol is the Internet standard protocol for monitoring network components or also end devices e g HMI devices SNMP is part of the TCP IP protocol suite and works in accordance with the client server model SNMP was developed by the Internet Engineering Task Force IETF HMI devices support version 1 SNMPv1 and community based SNMP Version 2 SNMPv2c HMI devices have SNMP agents The SNMP agents give information about the device configuration This information is managed in a data structure the Management Information Base MIB The MIB is a standardized data structure made up of different SNMP tags The devices use MIB Il RFC1213 The public community is supported for the reading and writing of SNMP tags on HMI devices Points to note with device names The device name used under MIB II is not the PROFINET IO name but rather the device name used in the network The device
152. SIEMENS SIMATIC HMI WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual This manual is part of the documentation package with the order number 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 07 2007 A5E01024750 01 4 D D QO D gt O rom fa fal fe 5 a 5 O O flexible WinCC flexible Engineering System _ NO Working with projects Working with Tags Creating Screens Creating an Alarm System Working with a connection Structure of a recipe 3 D 5 D eo D 3 3 e N D 3 0 m O O Q gt O ie m a Q cS ie gt O ie Q N O lt e orking with reports C 2 s fo Q 3 n o o p O J System functions and runtime scripting ep n a 5 Q 9 O h 5 Q c o Projects y Ke D Q o fe a g 3 D 5 3 S O 5 V D J g D m e z So 3 a f n fe m te Q m Q e So D Q lt T O m changes O O Q gt O ransfer 5 r D Q o O 5 eo Q O O D x or D in STEP 7 Appendix NT ES E ey ee ES es eS O O OINO ODAO N N lt Safety Guidelines This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety as well as to prevent damage to property The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
153. Sonoty om Runtime User Administiats H p gt Reports E Device Salling k a Ge Test and Graphics Lists a Sq Runtime User Administration a EE Device Settings ty Language Seling i Mig Version Management 2 7 5 Editor Properties Introduction WinCC flexible provides a special editor for each configuring task WinCC flexible differentiates between two different types of editors graphical editors and tabular editors You can open up to 20 editors in parallel Graphical Editors Graphical editors such as the Screen editor display the elements belonging to both the Project View and Object View You open each object in the work area with graphical editors WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 61 WinCC flexible Engineering System 2 7 Working with WinCC flexible Tabular editors Editor properties 62 Tabular editors such as the Tag editor only display the associated objects in the Object View When a tabular editor is opened to edit the objects all associated objects are displayed in a table in the work area The following properties apply to all editors and their objects e Changing contents Changes take effect directly after exiting an input field and affect projects globally All the objects affected by a modification are automatically updated If a tag parameter is changed at the place of use in the Screens Editor for example the change has a di
154. Standard Advanced 338 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Structure of Multilingual Projects 13 6 Use of language dependent graphics Structure of the Graphics editor Bi ww wre NOOO hewn ee Soe ee hee Object view Preview Work area Here all of the configured graphic objects are displayed in a table A separate table column is created for each project language which contains the versions of the graphics for that language In addition you can specify a default graphic for each graphic to be displayed whenever a language specific graphic for a project language does not exist Preview Here you can preview the graphic displays on various HMI devices WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO 339 Structure of Multilingual Projects 13 7 Languages in Runtime 13 7 Languages in Runtime 13 7 1 Languages in Runtime Using multiple runtime languages You can decide which project languages are to be used as runtime languages on a particular HMI device The number of languages that can be available simultaneously on the HMI device is dependent on the device To enable the operator to switch between languages during runtime you must configure a corresponding operator control element When runtime starts the project is displayed according to the most recent language setting When runtime starts the first time the language with the lowest number in the Ord
155. Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 159 Creating Screens 5 3 Working with objects 5 3 2 Introduction 160 Editing options of objects Objects are graphic elements which you use to design the screens of your project The following options for editing objects are available Cutting copying inserting and deleting objects To do this use the following commands in the Edit menu Cut Copy Insert Delete If you copy an object in a screen and the screen already includes an object of the same name the name of the object is changed In order to access the properties of screen objects in scripts all the objects within a screen and the template must have unique names Maintaining the default size of the objects you are inserting or customizing their size on insertion Changing the properties of an object e g the size Positioning an object Moving an object in front of or behind other objects Rotating objects Mirroring objects Changing default properties of the objects Defining the tab order for objects Stamping Inserting several objects of the same type Selecting several objects simultaneously Repositioning and resizing multiple objects ActiveX controls that are registered in the Windows operating system can be added to or deleted from the User controls object group You can assign external graphics to objects e g in the Graphic View You can view only the im
156. Symbol Object Line Instructions You can select straight rounded or arrow shaped line ends Polyline A polyline consists of linked paths and can have any number of corners The corner points are numbered in the order of their creation The corner points can be modified or deleted individually You can select straight rounded or arrow shaped polyline ends The polyline is an open object Although the start and end points may have the same coordinates the area they enclose cannot be filled in A Polygon The corner points of a polygon are numbered in the order of their creation The corner points can be modified or deleted individually You can fill a polygon area with a color or a pattern Ellipsis You can fill an ellipsis with a color or a pattern Circle You can fill the circle with a color or a pattern E Rectangle The corners of a rectangle can be rounded You can fill the rectangle with a color or a pattern gt Text box You can enter one or several lines of text in a Text box and define the font and the font color You can add a background color or pattern to a text box I O box An I O box may have the following runtime functions e Output of the values in a tag e Operator input of values these input values are saved to a tag e Combined input and output the operator can here edit the output value of the tag and thus set a new value You can de
157. TUMCUONS wicines te cdeoen tn cadvete cgeusewe peeled caunade seuuecuesng sen avscudadeteteawesileneavtaencueveancueyeetexeuscmetaneeay 12 1 3 Use of System TUNCHONS 2c cccccdicccccreecatiectecdescneesesdaiveses sli dessus eceevandveesvaduceds sla veevansdelieeeevanaes V2 WAL SCIPS uneneen a a sauna de wansldes yonnm linens cede ste a e a 2 1215 USEOf SCIPS ennienni aiaei a E a a a a a E a i 12 2 Working With TUMCHION liStS snieni ienien sia aa ia satuunensaedees A a x 12 2 14 Basic principles of the functions list ccccceeeeeeceeee cece ee eeeeeaaeeeeeeeesecaaeeeeeeeesecsacaeeeeeneeeeeeees i 12 2 2 Properties of a function list cccecceecceceeecececeeeeesesaeeeeeeeeeseaaeaeceeeeesesenaeeeeeeesesaaeeesaaaaeeeeeeeess 12 3 Elements and basic SONGS icc cis cccevcetecedevensadevus da tadedecusdecesuaagdcesuuased eetasaded sanededuatsvexeeunectelveeteeres k 12 3 1 Seript editor erotaan aaa a aaa Eaa aaa aa aaa a EAE AR K 12 3 2 Properties of the Script editor cccccccececceceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeetedeneeceeeeeeececaeeeeeeeeesessaneeeeeaneeeeeeess 12 3 3 Basic SONGS 2i ccvnerseseieee terete a eed ee eee rei ete 12 4 CHrEatINGSCHPtS cccaseteeesiivets E A eee ee WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Table of contents 1241 ACCESS TO AJS Re een rN eanes aaa ee oe eee Ten eee eer a een ee 310 12 4 2 Call up of scripts and system functions in the sc
158. The text qualifier is used to identify text and strings The characters enclosed in quotation marks will be interpreted as text For example when you import text that includes characters used as control characters for the import they should be enclosed in quotation marks Quotation marks are the default text qualifiers but other characters can also be used You can specify the separators for decimals and thousands to identify numeric data Select from the list of characters offered in the respective fields These two characters cannot be the same Quotation marks cannot be used for these separators The Use folder delimiter option allows you create a folder tree with the tag names The folder tree is created in WinCC flexible and the tags saved in the folders Select the separator for the folder tree in the Folder delimiter field Example The tag name is Folder1 Tag_01 The folder separator is In WinCC flexible Folder1 is created in the project window under Communication Tags and Tag_01 is saved in it WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 142 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Working with Tags 4 8 Importing Tags 4 8 3 Format of the Connection Data for the Import Introduction This section describes the format required for the file with connection data used for imports The connection data file must be in Format of Connection Data We csv format Each connection is on a separat
159. There are two different copy mechanisms available for copying Using the command Flat copy the selected object and contained child objects will be copied References are not copied during a flat copy The command Copy will copy the selected object together with the child objects and the existing references Flat copy Flat copy will copy those objects with a parent child relationship completely If you want to copy a screen then all the contained objects will be copied With Flat copy the reference will simply be copied as an open reference A place holder object is copied which only saves the name of the reference WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO 103 Working with projects 3 6 Reusing project data Insert objects Example for a flat copy Originating object Variable connection x Variable_1 I O field_1 Properties of variable_1 WinCC flexible Display 1 Simple copy Object name as placeholder object Variable connection f e H gt Variable name 1 0 field_1 WinCC flexible Display 1 The WinCC flexible screen contains an I O field with a tag connection A flat copy will copy the WinCC flexible screen including the I O field because the WinCC flexible screen and the I O field have a parent child relationship Because we are dealing with a reference only the object name of the tag is copied Objects copied into
160. Transferring projects 3 13 Transferring projects 3 13 1 Basic Principles of the Transfer Operation Transfer A transfer operation refers to the transfer of a complete project file to the HMI devices where the project is to run After you have completed a configuration process check the consistency of the project by using the menu Project gt Compiler gt Check Consistency After completing the consistency check the system generates a compiled project file This project file has the same name assigned to it as the project however with the extension fwx Transfer the compiled project file to the configured HMI devices Note Because of the diagnostics messages the fwx file can be fairly large If the size of the fwx file is preventing you from transferring this file to the HMI device you should disable the diagnostics messages in the alarm settings The HMI devices must be connected to the configuration computer to transfer the project data If the HMI device is a PC it is also possible to perform the transfer operation using data media such as diskettes Compile the project again if the pwx is not found and you receive an error message while transferring the data Basic procedure 1 Enter the transfer settings for the individual HMI devices in your WinCC flexible project 2 Enter the transfer mode on the HMI device where the project is to be transferred 3 Transfer the compiled project file from the configurati
161. User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Structure of a recipe management system Element name Assigned tag Default value Text List Decimal point Infotext 8 2 Elements and basic settings The element name identifies a recipe entry uniquely within the recipe You can assign unique descriptive names or designations such as axis designations on a machine or ingredients such as flavoring Each Recipe entry is assigned a recipe tag in which the value of the recipe data record value is stored at runtime The default value is used as the default entry when you create a new recipe data record Text is assigned to a value or value range in a text list This text can then be displayed in an output field for example In a recipe data records you can only use text lists that are selected by a range The number defines exactly how many decimal places will be displayed for the value of the recipe data record at runtime You can enter a help message about the recipe entry in the Help text field This message will then be displayed to the user at runtime WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 227 Structure of a recipe management system 8 2 Elements and basic settings 8 2 3 Recipe data records Structure of the Data records tab Recipe number Recipe data record name Elements in the Data records tab The individual entries on the Data records
162. Visible elements abihb Alarm number a Time yY Alarm status Alarm text v Date Class name y Alarm group v Note The height of the Print alarm object configured in the report is irrelevant to the output Since a large amount of data can occur during the report output the Print alarm object is extended dynamically so that all the data arising can be output If the page length is exceeded an automatic page break is carried out 10 6 Reporting recipes 10 6 1 Reporting recipes Introduction Configure a report of recipe records in WinCC flexible Output data of a recipe In order to create a recipe report insert the Print recipe object from the toolbox view into a report Select the object in order to have the properties displayed in the property view Configure the data selection for the report in the property view Specify the data selection in the General category in the property view Select the recipe records for your report The following selections are possible e All the records of a recipe e A record range of a recipe e All the records of several or all of the recipes e A record range of several or all of the recipes When several recipes are selected you can select only one range of consecutive recipes The system uses the numbers of the recipes as an orientation The same behavior also applies to a data record range 274 WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Sta
163. a E A a Aa I a Ea ea EEEa ENE 8 1 1 Basic principles Of recipes bec sicszanedeadeces aanauatachacdecxehasiatedacscxeue aa aia aA a E EaR 8 1 2 Example Tor USING TeCipeS ssassn in aa aN EE E E aaa iied 2 8 1 3 Struct re Of NECIDES esenea ei i aaa ida aa eel teed 8 1 4 Display Of TECIDOS aisen nenie aaa a a a a a a a aE AEE aaa aa aidai 8 1 5 Transfer of recipe data reCOrds ccccccceeceeceneneeceeeeeeeecaaeeeeeeeeeseaeaeeeeeeesecacaeeeeeeneetenieeecaenaeees 8 1 6 CONTQUrATION Of FECIPCS si eciet eiecnest eden eects dar eeesess etereshecanttin wean ceeeteety edeeny eect eee ema eeeeined 8 1 7 Special features of the OP 77A and TP 177A 00 ce cccececeeceecce cece eeeennceeceeeeeseeaeceeeeeeesenieeeeeeeenenes 8 1 8 Synchronization of recipe data records with the PLC y 8 2 Elementsand basic Settings iccsscccicestec savedeenecdibecca e aa N EAE 8 2 1 RECIPES COIR enrii onna a a aa EE aaa a A A e AEA AA SOA RA Aa 8 2 2 Recipe elements cccccecceccccececeeeeenae cenaeeeceeeeeceaanaeceeeeeeqeecaeceeeeeeesaaaeeeceseeeeesanaees EENE nenen EE 8 2 3 Recipe data recordsiin aaia aaa aaa a a a aa aE aa aiaa a aaa aiaia 8 2 4 Recipe Senne ssc cciiseccescacctents seweeicus e Ni E NEPA ENRERE 8 3 Viewing and editing recipes in RUNTIMG ccccccceceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeesececaaeeeeeeseeensieaeeeeenees 8 3 1 Recipe screen and recipe VieW ceceecccecce cee ceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeee eee eaaeaeeeeeesedeaeaeeeeeeseseneana
164. a log during runtime e Logging method Here you can specify what should happen when the log is full You can choose one of the following options Circular log When the log is full the oldest entry will be overwritten Segmented circular log Multiple logs of the same size will be created and filled one after the other When all logs are completely full the oldest log is overwritten Display system alarms with If a defined level is reached a system alarm is shown Trigger event The Overflow event is triggered as soon as the log is full e Settings Define whether the alarm text and error location should be stored each time an alarm is logged The alarm texts will be logged in the current runtime language e Comment Here you can enter descriptive text regarding the log 6 4 5 Alarm logging Introduction In runtime alarms can be stored in logs for later evaluation You must specify the following in order to log alarms of an alarm class e In which log the alarms are to be saved e Whether the associate alarm text and tag values are also to be saved Principle The following steps are necessary for alarm logging e Creating and configuring alarm logs When creating an alarm log the following must be defined General settings e g name size storage location Behavior at runtime start Behavior when the log is full e Configuring logging of the alarms in an alarm class You can can be specify an alarm l
165. a record names correspond to the respective bar code names This will enable the PLC to load the necessary recipe data record from the storage medium of the HMI device The recipe data record is displayed for inspection on screen You want to be able to correct the transferred production data online if necessary Requirements e The recipe has been created The recipe has the following settings Synchronize tags has been enabled Tags offline has been deactivated Note The changes are transferred immediately to the PLC e There is a recipe screen available There may also be an operating element for saving the recipe data records in the recipe screen WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 246 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Structure of a recipe management system 8 4 Scenarios Sequence HMI device N Recipe lt Comme screen Synchronous Recipe tag Looe A Offline PLC Behavior when the recipe view is used If the recipe view is used it is not possible to transfer changes immediately You must use the operating element to transfer the recipe data record to the PLC 8 4 3 Scenario Automatic production sequence Objective You want production to be executed automatically The production data is to be transferred directly to the PLC either from the recipe memory in the HMI device or from an external storage medium The screen
166. a routing connection In the figure above a routing connection is established between the SIMATIC HMI station 1 and the SIMATIC 300 automation device The SIMATIC 400 automation device is acting as a router In integrated projects this type of routing connection can be established directly This is done by setting up a connection in the SIMATIC HMI station and directly selecting the SIMATIC 300 automation device as the connection partner The routing connection is detected automatically by the system The connection is displayed as a routing connection in the connection properties in WinCC flexible Station MP 370 InterFace Routing treere 34 ETHERNET Si HMI device PLC device Type Address Address 2 IP 172 16 1 52 ee Expansion slot lo Subnet Mask l Rack lo 255 2255 0 0 Access point 57ONLINE M Cyclic operation A routing connection between a SIMATIC HMI station and an automation device can only be created in an integrated project WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 413 Integration of WinCC flexible in STEP 7 20 2 Configuring communication settings 20 2 2 Introduction 414 Project transfer via S7 routing WinCC flexible supports the download of a WinCC flexible project from a configuration computer to an HMI device across different subnets To establish a connection between different subnetworks a router must be interposed In
167. ack transfer you are prompted to save and close it Then the project back transferred is decompressed and opened in WinCC flexible When saving the project you must assign a name for the back transferred project N CAUTION WinCC flexible cannot check whether the source data file on the operating unit actually belongs to the project running on the device If you have performed a transfer operation in the interim that did not include the source data file old project data may still be on the HMI device Under certain circumstances the data will then no longer match the project that is currently running Note Use the back transfer process preferably for small and medium sized configurations in order to keep transfer times as short as possible You have the following options when there are numerous project files Transfer the project file as a compressed arj file onto a CF card for example using the backup function of the project manager WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 Working with Tags 4 4 1 Basics 4 1 1 Basics of tags Introduction External tags enable the communication data exchange between the components of an automation process e g between the HMI device and the PLC Principle An external tag is the image of a defined memory location in the PLC You have read and write access to this storage location from both the HMI device and t
168. act Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O WinCC flexible Engineering System 2 2 WinCC flexible user interface 2 2 8 Object view Introduction If folders or editors are selected in the Project View their content is displayed in the Object View The following figure illustrates how the selection in the Project View affects the display in the Object View leas Recipe lua Recipes a weer Device_1 OP 77B Device_1 0P 77B 2 Screens Ss Screens Y Add Preen B Add Screen C Template C Template 0 Mixing Station CO Mixing Station Pag Communication Pag Communication 7 lt 5 2 Tags a57 Connections a57 Connections Cycles Cycles 4 Alarm Management ig Alarm Management E Bz Recipes E Ez Recipes atp Reports 4 iz Reports i Text and Graphics Lists rs te Text and Graphics Lists E EA Runtime User Administration aw A Runtime User Administration D Device Settings B Device Settings Device twinCC flexible RT pees Device 2fwinCC flexible AT 8 Screens Screens J Add Screen J Add Screen C Template C Template O Mixing Station v 0 Mixing Station O a 2 GramAroma DB 1 DBBO OverviewScreenF 2 KiloSugar DB 10 DW O Templates 2 LitreConcentrate DB 1 DBW 0 Mixing Station Screen No 2 Litrew ater DB 1 DBW 0 lt iil gt lt m Description Double click an object in the OBJECT View to open the corresponding editor Drag and drop functions are available f
169. activate all the buttons in the Buttons area of the Properties group WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 234 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Structure of a recipe management system 8 3 Viewing and editing recipes in Runtime The process screen then displays only two drop down lists in which the recipe and recipe data record can be selected ex General P Properties Genera P Animations Recipe Data record View type D Events Recipe name Tag for number name gt M Advanced view Tag For number name C Simple view gt Enable edit mode 7 Display selection list is table Visible items Configuring an event on the recipe view When you select or exit the recipe view at runtime this is an event for which you can set up a function list to be processed e Select the recipe view The properties of the recipe view are shown in the Properties dialog 1 In the Properties dialog box select the Events group then click the event you want to configure The Function list dialog box opens 2 In the Function list dialog box assign a function list to the selected event Note You can only configure events for the OP 77A and TP 177A HMI devices for the simple recipe view Constraints on the simple recipe view Note The Simple recipe view object cannot be operated dynamically with a script In the Engineering System you can dynamically control for exam
170. aeeecaaeseaaeedeneesceeesaeeesaeeeeaeeseeeaaeeseaeeseeeeseieeen 14 2 2 Editing a layout for the project CocUMENtATION eee eect eeeee ee eete teeter ee ee taeeeetaeeeeetnaeeeeenaeeaa i 14 3 Creating a ProjeCt Tepo x c2 t csveact eisteesd eeeseeteeaseeetest paeeesh aeseinn deseneneeaee dete ade eee eae 14 3 1 Selecting the data for a project report cece cence e ene eeeeeeneeeee tines eesaeeeeeseeeeetaeeeetiieeeeeeeereaa 14 3 2 Outputting of data of selected objects 0 00 cece ee eteee erent eter tee ee teee ee taeeeeeaeeeeetieeeeeeeeeead WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 15 Table of contents 15 16 17 18 19 16 14 3 3 Selecting Objects for the Project Documentation ssssesesrsessnnsseennansnnunennnannennaaennaanannaneenaana Mobile Wireless 3 wtsi c2 cece teeiasslecevavcclecusetieevastenatcessecdtcqeesacstvasdtegenavebecesuncesand obits cay sunecs KEDER ENEAN hea 15 1 Basic PrinGipleS a i i dissenieniilesi ei endive Ales dea die idee eee eee ideas K 15 1 1 Field of application for the Mobile Panel Wireless c ccceesecceceeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeensees k 15 1 2 How the Mobile Panel Wireless WOrKS cceecececeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeaaeeeseeaeeeseenaeeeeeenteeeas 15 2 Elements and Dasic setings escini E A E dan aicee ideas K 19 2 C ZONES desni ee a a N AeA aE r NEEE E A a Aa Raa 4 1o22 Zones WOPKING ANCA siea
171. afe operation function manual Effective range at runtime 360 To log on to the effective range at runtime only the display name of the effective range appears to the operator in the runtime language The operator reads the effective range ID in the plant and enters it on the HMI device This ensures that it is the right machine that is being used The acknowledgment buttons are activated after successful logon WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Mobile Wireless 15 3 Validity Introduction 15 3 Working with effective ranges Working with effective ranges The next chapter applies only to the Mobile Panels Wireless which support failsafe operation e g Mobile Panel 277 IWLAN Configuration examples for Mobile Panels Wireless that do not support fail safe operation can be found in the Working with zones section The following configuration guide describes the steps needed to set up an effective range for fail safe operation on a Mobile Panel Wireless NOTICE More information in this regard is available in the Failsafe operation function manual Procedures overview 1 Configuring the effective range You configure the MixingAxisControl effective range as a conical area around Transponder1 at a distance of 5 meters 2 Configuring logon to the effective range Configure the Effective range designation object so that an op
172. ag Supply the tag in runtime with a start value for example via an input field Requirement The tag must be of the type Date and time Display end Used to select the last alarm for outputting the alarms of a specific period Connect the field via the selection list to a tag Supply the tag in runtime with an end value for example via an input field The tag must be of the type Date and time Select the Appearance subcategory in the Properties category Configure the foreground color the background color the style and the font settings m General gt Properties gt Ice m Layout m Misc a Appearance Colors Styles Foreground color E v Back Style Solid v Background color X Border Style Solid v Font jArial 12pt Select the Display subcategory in the Properties category Configure the position and size of the Print alarm object Select the columns for the output in the report in the Visible elements area The following columns can be output e Alarm number e Time e Alarm status e Alarm text e Date e Alarm class e Alarm group e Diagnosable e PLC WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 273 Working with reports 10 6 Reporting recipes m General gt Properties m Appearance m Misc Qa Layout Position amp size Vertical position
173. ag changes in the PLC the Update ID indicates the number of the tag Comments Any comment about the tag You can use up to 500 characters Line break The line break carriage return separates the entries for one connection from the entries of the next Format of a tag import file An import file for tags has the following format tag Connection DB 1 DBD 0 Real 1 3 1 min 20 10 2 1 1 100 10 10 1 15 5 33 Comment for tag A comma for example can be used as the list separator character If a list entry is empty there are two consecutive list separator characters When you are finished defining the entries on a line you do not have to put a list separator character at the end of the line The default value is used for a list entry with no value Note An example of an import file is located in the Support Tag Import folder on the WinCC flexible CD Editing the Import File You can use programs such as MS Excel or a text editor to edit the import file Do not double click on the import file to open it in MS Excel because this may change the data format and the import will fail Instead start MS Excel and then use the Open command from the File menu Select Text files prn txt csv from the File type list Open the file in a simple text editor to check that the file has the correct format WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Creatin
174. ages you have previously stored in the image browser of your WinCC flexible project You can save graphics in the image browser as follows Via drag amp drop from the Graphics object group to the working area As graphic files in the following formats bmp dib ico emf wmf gif tif jpeg or jpg Asan OLE object You either create a new OLE object or save an existing graphic file as an OLE object To save an OLE object an OLE compatible graphics program must be installed on the configuration computer WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Creating Screens 5 3 Working with objects 5 3 3 Repositioning and resizing multiple objects Possible modifications After you have selected multiple objects you can edit these as follows e Shift using the mouse To change the absolute position of the marked objects position the mouse pointer over an object and shift the multiple selection with the mouse button pressed In order to scale the object proportionally keep the lt Shift gt key pressed while resizing it using the mouse e Shift using the functions of the Alignment toolbar Change the position of the marked objects with respect to each other Align the height and width of the marked objects 5 3 4 External graphics Introduction In WinCC flexible you can use images created with an external graphic editor In order to us
175. alling WinCC flexible the user defines whether WinCC flexible should be integrated in SIMOTION SCOUT HMI devices with SIMOTION SCOUT connection are configured in the SIMOTION SCOUT working environment When WinCC flexible and SIMOTION SCOUT are installed on a configuration computer WinCC flexible is integrated in the SIMOTION SCOUT working environment Work is then performed in a single working environment for all tasks from the SIMOTION SCOUT or WinCC flexible environment A WinCC flexible project appears as a node in the SIMOTION SCOUT project tree All operating units configured in a project appear as sub entries of the project tree The WinCC flexible editors are opened parallel to the SCOUT editors in the SCOUT user interfaces Further information about using SIMOTION SCOUT is provided in the SIMOTION SCOUT documentation WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 89 Working with projects 3 3 Multilingual configuration 3 3 Multilingual configuration Multilingual configuration You can configure your projects in multiple languages using WinCC flexible WinCC flexible supports the multilingual configuration of practically all objects with texts displayed in runtime WinCC flexible can be used for configuration in all languages installed in the operating system In addition to direct text input in the editors WinCC flexible provides easy to use export and import
176. and loaded within a STEP 7 project The target device cannot be initialized over the routing connection MPIC Nl WinCC flexible ES Illustration of a routing connection for the transfer operation In the above figure a routing connection was established between the WinCC flexible ES WinCC flexible Engineering Station and the Operator Panel 8 OP77B HMI device The SIMATIC 300 Station 1 automation device functions as the router You configure the transfer connection between the concerned devices with NetPro The interface of the configuration computer must be assigned The association is indicated by the yellow connection line to the subnetwork and the yellow arrow in the symbol of the station After the configuration in NetPro save and recompile the project WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 415 Integration of WinCC flexible in STEP 7 20 2 Configuring communication settings A routing connection for the transfer can also be established over several routing partners MPI 1 MPI SIMATIC 300 Station 1 ji WinCC flexible ES Ethernet 1 Industrial Etherne SIMATIC 400 Station 24 PROFIBUS 1 PROFIBUS Operator Panel 8 OP77B Routing over several stations Requirements for routing over several stations e The WinCC flexible Engineering Station must be connected to an MPI bus or to a PROFIBUS e The HMI dev
177. ange g 71 30 kg Data record name 30 2S Nectar 7 a Save Data from the PLC Load Data to PLC Z fo You can configure a recipe screen in the TP 170B and higher models Configuration of a recipe screen offers you the opportunity for customization You can spread large recipes over several process screens according to topic and display them vividly using features such as graphical screen objects e Spreading recipes over several process screens according to topic You can distribute recipe data records with multiple entries across several process images E g for each plant section you can configure a process image containing the associated input screens for the recipe data records Splitting recipes among several process screens is useful for HMI devices with small displays For one thing you can avoid having to scroll in tables during runtime Visual machine simulation You can visually simulate your machine in a process screen using graphical screen objects This enables you to display parameter settings more clearly by positioning IO fields directly beside machine elements such as axes or guide rails You can use this to produce a direct reference between the values and the machine WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 237 Structure of a recipe management system 8 3 Viewing and editing recipes in Runtime Synchronize tags You must enab
178. anguages tab The Input Method Editor IME is available in Windows for configuring Asian texts Without this editor you can display Asian text but not edit it For more information on the Input Method Editor refer to the documentation for Windows If language dependent project texts such as alarm texts should be displayed in the simulator in Asian characters the operating system must be switched to the respective language Regional format of dates times currency and numbers WinCC flexible specifies a fixed date and time format in the Date Time field for the selected project language and runtime language In order for dates times and numbers to be presented correctly in the selected editing language this language must be set in the Regional Options on the Control Panel Displaying ASCII characters With text output fields the display of ASCII characters as of 128 depends on the set language and the operating system being used If the same special characters are to be displayed on different computers then the computers must use the same operating system and country settings WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 326 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Structure of Multilingual Projects 13 3 Language Settings 13 3 2 Operating system settings for Asian languages Settings on Western operating systems If you want to enter Asian characters you must activate the support for this language in the
179. anual When you select a effective range from the Effective ranges table the Transponder table displays the following e Transponder enabled The transponder is assigned to the selected effective range e Transponder deactivated The transponder is not yet assigned to any effective range e Transponder not available The transponder has already been assigned to another effective range To undo the assignment switch to the relevant effective range and deactivate the transponder e The zone assigned to the transponder is displayed in addition to the effective range WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO 359 Mobile Wireless 15 2 Elements and basic settings The effective range and transponder IDs are initially assigned automatically They can be changed however Please note the following A maximum of 127 effective ranges may be configured The effective range ID must be unique and fall within the range from 1 127 The display name of an effective range must not be the same as its ID You can initially configure transponders without assigning them to an effective range There may be no more than 255 transponders assigned to a zone an effective range or both The transponder ID must be unique and fall within the range from 1 65534 The transponder IDs are set on the transponder NOTICE More information in this regard is available in the Fails
180. aracters in a help text Languages Number of runtime 5 languages Scheduler Tasks User administration User groups 25 Authorizations 32 Passwords 25 Project Size of the project 256 file fwx KB Table 21 4 Multi Panels Tags Number of tags in the project Number of power tags Number of elements per array Number of local tags OP 77A 320 50 32 50 256 KB OP 77B 320 10 50 32 50 1MB WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 TP170A TP170B TP 177A OP 170B 4 4 4 320 320 5 5 5 10 ce 50 50 2 32 32 50 50 320KB 768KB 6 512 KB 10 1024 KB MP 270B MP 277 2048 2048 1000 1000 1000 1000 21 2 Performance features TP 177B OP 177B 320 10 50 32 50 2 MB MP 370 2048 1000 2000 TP270 TP 277 OP 270 OP 277 6 3 10 2 320 48 50 32 50 2 MB 6 3 320 16 48 50 32 50 4 MB MP 377 2048 1000 2000 435 Appendix 21 2 Performance features Alarms Number of alarm classes Number of discrete alarms Number of analog alarms Character length of an alarm Number of process values per alarm Size of the alarm buffer Number of queued alarm events Screens Number of screens Number of fields per screen Number of tags per screen Number of complex objects per screen Recipes Number of recipes Number of elements per recipe User data length in by
181. ards Prescribed Usage Trademarks Note the following WARNING This device may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical description and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or recommended by Siemens Correct reliable operation of the product requires proper transport storage positioning and assembly as well as careful operation and maintenance All names identified by are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described Since variance cannot be precluded entirely we cannot guarantee full consistency However the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions Siemens AG Ordernumber 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 Copyright Siemens AG 2007 Automation and Drives 07 2007 Technical data subject to change Postfach 48 48 90437 NURNBERG GERMANY Preface Purpose of this manual This user manual is part of the WinCC flexible documentation The manual provides you with a complete overview of configuring with WinCC flexible The manual supports you in creating new projects i
182. are creating an extensive copy of an object With an extensive copy the references as well as the objects with a parent child relationship will be copied Example of a copy Originating object Variable connection Variable_1 I O field_1 Properties of variable_1 WinCC flexible Display 1 Copy Variable connection e gt Variable_1 I O field_1 Properties of variable_1 WinCC flexible Display 1 The WinCC flexible screen contains an I O field with a tag attach When copying using the menu command Copy the screen the I O field and the tag including its properties will be copied Objects copied into the clipboard may be inserted into another device in the same project or into a different project If an object with the same name exists in the target project the copied object will be saved under the same name with a consecutive number If several objects with the same name and consecutive number exist the next available number will then be used Parent objects child objects and references will be inserted If the copy contains references the system will compare these references with existing references in the target object If the existing references have suitable features they will be connected to the inserted objects If a reference is not suitable the copied reference will then be inserted WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO 105
183. ask bar 3 Start ICH WinCC Flexible 2 7 4 Functional scope of a project Introduction If WinCC flexible is used to edit projects for different HMI devices the functional scope is not identical for the configuration Different functionality is available according to the HMI device WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 60 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O WinCC flexible Engineering System 2 7 Working with WinCC flexible Principle The functional scope available is dependent on the HMI device selected Only configure the functions supported by the selected HMI device This procedure is advantageous for efficient configuration The editors displayed in the Project View can be used for example to quickly detect which functions are supported by the HMI device selected The diagram illustrates the functional scope of two different HMI devices based on the Project View G x x basal Progect hoop Aecpe A El een Device 1UAnCE Henbie AT J mm Device _IWnEC ilexble RT mm Device AWnEE feable AT 5s Screens i Screens E Ade Semen A Add Screen CI Template C Template O Ming Station O Mring Station a Communication C Stat Screen ij Aleem Management ti Te Commuricaticn My Recipe z a Alom Management E Adi Respe By Analog Aloems Ei Orange Discrete Alem Sp Histoncs Dats t hy Selhnigs br Scnpts H E Recipes b Repais l a Histoncal Data i i Test and Graphics Lists L
184. assigning them to a zone e There may be no more than 255 transponders assigned to a zone an effective range or both e The transponder ID must be unique and fall within the range from 1 65534 The transponder IDs are set on the transponder WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO 357 Mobile Wireless 15 2 Elements and basic settings 15 2 3 Effective ranges Introduction Open Structure Working area 358 The following section applies only to the Mobile Panels Wireless that support failsafe operation e g Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN The Effective ranges working area is only visible for these HMI devices You set up effective ranges in order to control safety related operations An effective range is defined by the maximum distance from one or more transponders NOTICE More information in this regard is available in the Failsafe operation function manual Double click on Effective ranges under Device settings to open the working area in the project view Bi wick uwao XO tenes Property view The Effective ranges working area displays the effective ranges that have been set up and the transponders assigned to them WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Mobile Wireless 15 2 Elements and basic settings Property view When an effective range is selected you can
185. at is linked to the IO field 4 3 6 Updating the Tag Value in Runtime Introduction Tags contain data which change during runtime Value changes are handled differently at internal and external tags Principle If a start value has been configured for the tag the tag will be set to this value at runtime start Tag values change in runtime In runtime you have the following options of changing the tag value e by executing a system function for example SetValue e by operator input for example at an IO box e A value assignment in a script e A value change in an external tag in the PLC Updating the value of external tags Method for updating the value of an external tag e Updating after an acquisition cycle Normally tags are updated after an acquisition cycle as long as the tag appears in a picture or is logged The acquisition cycle determines the update cycle for tag value updates on the HMI You can either choose a default acquisition cycle or define a user specific cycle e When the setting Cyclic continuous is activated If this setting is activated the tag will be updated in runtime even if it is not found in the currently open screen This function is set for example for tags which are configured to trigger a function list in the event of a change in their value Only use the Cyclic continuous setting for tags that must truly be updated Frequent read operations increase communication load WinCC flexib
186. ating system Introduction If the operating system version on a Windows CE device is not compatible with the configuration the transfer of the configuration is cancelled A message appears indicating the operating system must be updated Updating the operating system Note The operating system can only be updated on Windows non PC based HMI devices If an HMI device is connected to a configuration PC you can update the operating system from the configuration PC by using WinCC flexible If the computer does not have WinCC flexible installed you have the option of using ProSave to update the operating system of the HMI device NOTICE Do not use a serial connection to transfer the operating system The transfer operation can take up to an hour if a serial cable is used When an operating system is updated all of the data on the destination device including authorizations are deleted Therefore use the Authorizations function to transfer the authorizations back onto the license diskette beforehand If you want to continue to use any user data such as passwords and recipes stored in the internal Flash memory once the operating system is updated you must export the data to an external data memory beforehand and reload them onto the HMI device following the update WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 396 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Transfer 19 2 Managing Files on the HMI Device
187. ation Note Navigation buttons when changing HMI devices Recompile the project after changing the HMI device The compiling ensures that all screens are converted to the current HMI device If you then change the HMI device again without first generating it is possible that the navigation buttons will be shown differently in the individual screens WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO 155 Creating Screens 5 3 Working with objects 5 3 Working with objects 5 3 1 Overview of Objects Introduction 156 Objects are graphic elements which you use to design the process graphics of your project The Toolbox contains various types of objects which are frequently required for use in process screens The Toolbox view can be faded in and out using the Toolbox command in the View menu The Toolbox view can be moved to any position on the screen The Toolbox contains various object groups depending on the currently active editor When the Screens editor is opened the toolbox provides objects in the following object groups e Simple objects Simple objects are graphic objects such as the Line or Circle and standard control elements such as the I O field or Button Enhanced objects These objects provide an enhanced functional scope One of their purposes is to display processes dynamically e g integrating bars or Active X controls in the pr
188. ay another section of your view e You can show a single screen including all its child screens e You can hide or show all child screens e You can toggle between a horizontal and a vertical view Unused screens The Unused screens view contains all the project screens which are not included in your navigation system You can drag and drop Unused screens from this dialog box onto your view and interconnect these with other screens Property view The Properties dialog box of a screen allows you to enable the navigation control to change the screen number and to configure direct screen connections 5 2 3 Using the navigation control Using the navigation control You can open a navigation control in all screens The navigation control contains a number of preconfigured screen navigation buttons These buttons can be used in runtime to call further screens of the project Customizing the navigation control The navigation control is adapted in the Screen Navigation editor e You can display or hide the navigation control e You can configure the navigation control and the command buttons contained in it The button is disabled if it is not assigned a target In this case the button appears in runtime without a label When you copy a screen which is used in screen navigation with a disabled navigation bar to the Project View and insert it in a different HMI the copied screen is not displayed there in an existing screen navig
189. ayed The cactus image is displayed if neither an image nor a default value is configured for the least significant bit Any configured default value is configured the image configured for this default value is displayed Enable the Bit selection in text and graphic lists in the Runtime settings area of the device settings in order to visualize only the text that is assigned to the least significant bit For reasons of downward compatibility the setting is disabled as standard The setting applies to all graphic lists of the HMI device WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO WinCC flexible Engineering System 2 7 Working with WinCC flexible 2 7 12 Displaying Help Shortcut help A tooltip will appear after moving the mouse pointer over any object icon or dialog element CI WinCC flexible Advanced Project Edit Yiew Insert Format Faceplates Options Window Help fn Nts MO Ygn t ORR Add anew object r A question mark next to the tooltip indicates that a shortcut help is available for this user interface element To call up an additional explanation to the short description click on the question mark press lt F1 gt if the tooltip is activated or move the mouse cursor to the tooltip i WinCC flexible Advanced Project hmi Project Edit View Insert Format Faceplates Options Window bl Bio os aie ba English Add a new object Creates a ne
190. ayed in the property view Establish from the property view the data that is to be configured Specify the alarm classes which you want to output for the selected source Specify the sequence of the alarms for the output Oona A OON To output the alarms of a certain interval select the respective tags for the Display beginning and Display end fields The tags can be supplied in runtime with the date and time for the first or the last alarm of the period 10 5 2 Process output parameters for an alarm protocol Introduction You process the output parameters for an alarm protocol in the properties window The Print alarm object has to be inserted in a report in order to display the properties The property view has to be open WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 271 Working with reports 10 5 Reporting alarms Output parameters of Print alarm Select the Print alarm object in the work area The properties of the object are displayed in the Property view Select the data source and configure the selection and the layout of the data for the output in the General category g x General General gt Properties Settings Alarm classes Alarm events Alarm source Errors Sorting Newest alarm First Diagnosis Events ESIE Warnings Lines per item 2 lt OOS Alarm log 4 Header visible Display beginning 4
191. bject property of a screen element with VBS in runtime this change remains effective only as long as the screen is active As soon as you change the screen or reload the screen the configured object properties are displayed Language switching When you change the language in runtime the foreign language labels are loaded from the configuration data In case you changed text with VBS this text is then overwritten 12 6 5 HMI device dependent system functions in the script Principle If you use system functions in a script which are not available on the set operating unit you will receive a warning message In addition the respective system function in the script will be underlined with a wavy blue line WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 322 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 Structure of Multilingual Projects 13 1 Working with multiple languages Multi language configuration in WinCC flexible You can configure your projects in multiple languages using WinCC flexible There are various reasons for creating a project in multiple languages e You would like to use a project in more than one country The project is created in multiple languages when the HMI device is commissioned only the language spoken by the operators at the respective site is transferred to the HMI device e You would like to provide multiple languages to the various operators in a plant The project is created in multiple languages be
192. ble host to host serial cable Transfer takes place by means of a serial cable or a USB cable connecting the configuration computer and HMI device Note Always select the highest possible transmission rate for a transfer operation by means of a serial cable At lower transmission rates it can easily take hours for the quantity of data to be transferred If the transfer via USB fails unplug the USB cable at both ends PC and HMI device and then insert it again Note ProSave running on devices with Windows CE operating system only supports transfers in standalone mode if you are using an USB PPI cable Ethernet network connection The configuration computer and HMI device are located in a network or are connected point to point The transfer operation between the configuration computer and the HMI device takes place by means of an Ethernet connection MPI DP The configuration computer and HMI device are in an MPI network or PROFIBUS DP network The corresponding protocol is used for the transfer operation Http Transfers are based on the http protocol for example via Intranet or Internet The settings described below are prerequisite for HTTP transfers Internet Settings of the configuration computer A permanent Proxy Server may not be set for the HTTP connections Internet Settings of the HMI device The Enable remote transfer check box must be activated on the Web Server tab A user with Engine
193. ble on the HMI device in the transfer settings WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO 329 Structure of Multilingual Projects 13 4 Creating a project in multiple languages 13 4 2 Specific features of Asian and Eastern languages in the engineering system Introduction When configuring for Asian languages or in an Asian language some specific features should be observed These specific features must also be observed for other languages that have complex characters Basic principles of configuration In order to ensure the full functionality of a project when configuring in WinCC flexible some elements should include no complex characters The restrictions apply for the following elements e Object names e Alarm texts The object names in WinCC flexible are unique names and therefore are not translated when switching between languages As the object names are used and processed functionally they are subject to some restrictions The object names may not include any special characters umlauts or complex characters Affected object names are for example project names tag names screen names etc If you want to log alarms with alarm texts then you may not use Asian Runtime language When using an Asian Runtime language you cannot log alarm text even if the alarm text itself is written for example in English The restriction applies merely to logging it is still possible to
194. ble recipe data is restored on a device configured using ProTool the Flash memory can no longer be read Delete the Flash memory in this case and transfer the ProTool project again Note Note the following when performing a complete data file backup and restore operation for Windows CE devices Authorizations are not backed up When a complete data restoration is carried out all of the data that were previously on the device including authorizations and the operating system are irrevocably deleted If an interruption occurred while data was being restored you must first reload the operating system onto the HMI device via the bootstrap mechanism before resuming the data restoration All installed options are also backed up but not the associated authorizations Basically all the data for the option that are still available after POWER OFF are backed up Note If at all possible you should use USB or Ethernet to back up and restore data because use of these interfaces will result in the shortest transfer times WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO 395 Transfer 19 2 Managing Files on the HMI Device Note For Windows CE devices a direct data backup can be performed from the device to an external storage medium namely a CF card or PC card For additional information refer to the relevant operating instructions 19 2 3 Updating the oper
195. cally installed and enabled Restart the computer in order for Start Center to take effect Select Run WinCC flexible in the Start Center popup menu to start WinCC flexible Alternatively launch WinCC flexible via the desktop icon WinCC flexible is activated and the project wizard displayed Then project wizard assists you with further instructions Information for an accelerated start of projects integrated in STEP 7 can be found in chapter Start WinCC flexible in STEP 7 WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 BAV6691 1AB01 2AB0 79 WinCC flexible Engineering System 2 8 WinCC flexible Start Center Note You need write permissions for the folders listed below during the initial start of WinCC flexible Documents and Settings All Users Application data Siemens AG SIMATIC WinCC flexible and Documents and Settings All Users Application data Siemens AG SIMATIC WinCC flexible 2007 Caches The system generates template files in these folders during initial startup in the current WinCC flexible GUI language You also require write permissions when you initially set up a new GUI language for a project Disable Start Center To disable WinCC flexible Start Center select the menu command WinCC flexible Start Center gt Deactivate in the WinCC flexible Start Center popup menu When you next restart the computer WinCC flexible components will no longer be launched in the background
196. cause the service personnel do not speak the same language as the operators Example An HMI device is used in China but the service personnel understand only English Translating project texts With WinCC flexible you can directly enter project texts in several languages in various editors for example in the Screens editor or the Project texts editor In addition WinCC flexible provides options for exporting and importing your configuration for translation purposes This is particularly advantageous if you configure projects containing a large amount of text and want to have it translated Language management and translation in WinCC flexible The following areas of the project view are used to manage languages and translate texts in WinCC flexible Area Project languages Short description Management of project languages editing language and reference language Languages and fonts Management of runtime languages and fonts used on the HMI device Project texts Central management of configured texts in all project languages Graphic browser Management of graphics and their language dependent variants Dictionaries Management of system dictionary and user dictionaries WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 323 Structure of Multilingual Projects 13 2 WinCC flexible terminology 13 2 WinCC flexible terminology La
197. ce ProSave can also be installed as a stand alone program on a computer where WinCC flexible is not installed stand alone operation Functional scope ProSave provides all of the functions needed to transfer files to the HMI device e Data backup and restoration of backed up data e Operating system update for Windows CE based devices e Transferring authorizations e Installing and uninstalling drivers and options as well as information on installed options and options that can be installed on an HMI device e Communication settings Integrated operation on the configuration computer ProSave is installed on the configuration computer as part of a standard WinCC flexible installation The complete functional scope of ProSave is integrated within WinCC flexible on the Project gt Transfer menu Stand alone operation on a computer ProSave can also be installed on a computer from the WinCC flexible CD and used without WinCC flexible being installed for example for service purposes When replacing a device for example you can use ProSave to back up a project from the original HMI device and restore it on a replacement device without having WinCC flexible installed If you are using ProSave outside of WinCC flexible you have the option to change the user interface language To select a language use the Language menu command in ProSave ProSave must be restarted for the language switch to take effect 19 2 2 Backup of HMI data
198. ce or device by back transferring the source data file to a configuration computer The back transfer operation enables you to subsequently perform analyses and make changes to an existing project even if the original configuration device is not available or the source file hmi for the project is no longer available on the configuration device Note You can also use WinCC flexible to transfer the source data file of a ProTool project back from the HMI device onto a configuration computer You can then perform a migration of the ProTool project to a WinCC flexible project The source data of a ProTool project which was configured for an operating device not supported by WinCC flexible must be transferred back to a configuration computer with ProTool Save the ProTool project Then execute a migration using WinCC flexible Requirements for back transfer 392 e The source data file can only be transferred to the HMI device as part of the transfer operation for the compiled project file The source data file is transferred along with the compiled project file to the HMI device if the Enable back transfer check box is selected in the transfer settings for the respective HMI device e There must be sufficient memory available on the HMI device to store the compressed source data file If the source data file for the back transfer operation is provided by a Windows CE device this device must have an external memory card If the HMI dev
199. ce amp support There you will find The newsletter which provides the latest information on your products Relevant documentation for your application which you can access via the search function in our service amp support database A forum where users and experts from all over ther world exchange ideas You local Automation amp Drives representative Information about on site service repairs spare parts Much more can be found on our Services pages WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 7 Preface WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 8 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Table of contents PROTACE iss secciends Mets pea vee ene a E coved E a ps al cnet ddd ea dean dusdts dd aA eae E Ea a EEEa 1 Introduction to WinCC flexible ecccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeee ee aaeeeeeaaeeeeeaaeeeeeaaaeeeeagaeeeseae eesaeeeseeeeeeeee 1 1 Introduction to SIMATIC HME seeps a E cee staasnestaeedenbeedeasee ened 1 2 WinCC flexible system Vernie W sses aesa a Saa NAAS RAEE 1 2 1 Components of WinCC fexiDlesss iiine a iea ak aa aT ada AAAA E Eaa 1 2 2 WinCC flexible Engineering System 1 2 3 WinGC flexible RUNTIME 002 c cecce vesesacevonneehennstecncvantancesenindantpeelantsoecnespiedacevsteceststebeedadecteed 23 1 2 4 AVallable Options aE E EAE fou se edebiaseateidaendpoetdstpoenttedaneseteusdsene 23 1 2 5 LICENSING a a Ghaddets ceed
200. cedure Result 408 An integrated WinCC flexible project from an earlier version is automatically converted if it is opened with a newer version of WinCC flexible Before conversion is started the system asks for your confirmation e You must have a STEP 7 project in which a WinCC flexible project from an earlier version of WinCC flexible is integrated e You must have STEP 7 and a newer version of WinCC flexible installed e The surrounding STEP 7 project must be open in the SIMATIC Manager 1 Open the project node of the WinCC flexible project in the project window of the SIMATIC Manager and select the WinCC flexible RT entry 2 Open the shortcut menu and select the Open Object command WinCC flexible is started A dialog warning you of the upcoming conversion is opened 3 To start conversion confirm the warning dialog with OK The conversion of the project to the current version of WinCC flexible is performed 4 If you click Cancel the process is canceled and the project is not opened The system has converted the integrated WinCC flexible project and it can be edited in the current version of WinCC flexible Functionality which is also found in the target version of WinCC flexible is fully converted post configuration is not necessary for this Functionality which is not supported in the target version is not available after conversion post configuration may be necessary for this Note The HMI devices in
201. cha de deus daddies te i a hada a an ee 9 1 1 Basic principles for data logging 9 1 2 Data logging in WinCC flexible o oo cece cece cece ee eeeeeeee sence ee aAA AAAA AN A SAAANA ANARA 249 9 1 3 Trends reaa e a ncae cate tine na tad ce anti E E E E E E i 9 2 Elements and basic settings ccccceceececceeeeceeeeeeeeceaeaeeeeeeseceaeaeceeeesesaaeaeeeeseseccacaeeeeeeeeeeeees 9 2 1 Data Logs edilo sedea A 9 2 2 Basic settings for data l00S w ci sceseisssierecasiett che taeecevesdbecreaaaceeviade dis AE sactendaasiadeieeeee 9 3 LOGGING tab Vales inaianei e ane daa agen cesanzsnduaezen cea iaaa 9 4 OUTPUTING 1OGG CO ate acc sicets ia cecssnauddees agents deaaanad cenanadeacs a aan nactaecava sec A AEA a E aa 9 4 1 OQuiputting tag values iN SCrOGNS ic sc2ceccseccetisaeecestcasececneneeectesneevseceeevenceaeessresuecetcasesdeiaaeeeeeeeerend 9 4 2 The structure of a csv file with tag values 9 4 3 Accessing the ODBC log database directly WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 13 Table of contents 10 11 12 14 Working WIth TOPOMts ncesi iirin ananasa enanas n dis eare a raaa AE less E Aaaa a a Tan aai 10 1 Principles on the report Systemi nsiciscecsi aieiaa E EA 261 10 2 Structure OF FEDOMNMS irns manresa a E AAE E AE A ENEE AT RN 10 3 Elements and basic settings 10 3 1 Edit r TEPOMS T irane aiaa a a a a EA aaa aaa aaia A EE A aaa tates 10 32 Using the
202. changes 20 1 2 Converting integrated projects Introduction The conversion of projects to other versions of WinCC flexible is also possible in integrated projects When using converted projects you have to use the released versions of the programs involved in integration For integrated projects a distinction should be made between the following constellations e WinCC flexible project integrated into STEP7 with additional ProAgent components e WinCC flexible project integrated in SIMOTION SCOUT project Converting a WinCC flexible project integrated in STEP 7 You can find information on converting a WinCC flexible project integrated in STEP 7 in the chapter Conversion of WinCC flexible projects integrated in STEP 7 WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO 399 Integration of WinCC flexible in STEP 7 20 1 Basic Principles Converting a WinCC flexible project integrated in SIMOTION SCOUT With a WinCC flexible project that is integrated in SIMOTION SCOUT you first have to save the surrounding SIMOTION project in the desired product version The target version of SIMOTION determines the valid version of the WinCC flexible project contained there If you select a SIMOTION project version without HMI support a message is displayed If the SIMOTION project is saved in the desired version the WinCC flexible project contained there is converted The conversion of the WinCC flexibl
203. ciated recipe tags are not synchronized automatically The recipe tags and the recipe view are not synchronized until you use the operating element with the RecipeViewSynchronizeDataRecordWithT ags function Synchronize tags and Tags offline enabled With this setting modified recipe values are not synchronized immediately between the recipe tags in the recipe screen of the HMI device and PLC There must be an operating element with the SetDataRecordToPLC and GetDataRecordFromPLC functions present in order to synchronize the values If recipe values are changed in the controller the modified values are displayed immediately in the recipe screen if you use the operating element with the GetDataRecordFromPLC function WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 221 Structure of a recipe management system 8 1 Basics Synchronize tags enabled and Tags offline deactivated 8 1 7 With this setting modified recipe values are synchronized immediately between the recipe tags on the HMI device and PLC When you change recipe values in the recipe screen these changes are applied immediately by the PLC and immediately influence the process If recipe values are changed in the PLC the changed values are displayed immediately in the recipe screen Special features of the OP 77A and TP 177A The TP 177A and OP 77A HMI devices behave differently to the other HMI devices in t
204. cific buttons of this toolbar All connections are visualized in the work area in tabular format You select the communication drivers from the table cells and edit the relevant connection properties To sort the table by its column entries simply click the column header Using the Parameters tab you can configure the settings for the communication drivers selected in the table Select the settings for the HMI the network and for the PLC Area pointer tab 7 2 2 Introduction Structure Using the Area pointers tab you can configure the area pointers of the connections Parameters for connections Select the Parameters tab of the Connections editor to configure the properties of a connection between the HMI and the communication partner The communication partners are visualized schematically on the Parameters tab This tab provides the HMI device Network and PLC areas where you can declare the parameters of the relevant interface used Parameters WinCC flexble RT Station Interface G lt _ _ _ ECEE HMI device Network PLC device Type Baud rate ZE Profile mpl v Address 2 11 187500 v RS Highest station address HSA Expansion slot o RS42 Address 1 5422 31 Rack 0 Rsaas Access point S7ONLINE Simatic Z Only master on the bus Number of masters 1 Z Cyclic operation WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 207 Working with a connection
205. clically continued or if changed are logged If the logging upon request occurs only rarely then the sequence log is for example completed with cyclically logged values and the next sequence log is set up If there is then an access to the tag that has been logged upon request the tag cannot be shown as in runtime the current sequence log is being accessed As a remedy for rarely logged tags set up a separate tag log e Processing logged tag values further The logged process tag values can be evaluated directly in your WinCC flexible project e g in a trend view or with another application e g Excel WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O 257 Logging and displaying tags 9 4 Outpuiting logged data 9 4 Outputting logged data 9 4 1 Outputting tag values in screens Introduction In runtime you can output tag values in the screens of the operator device in the form of a trend The data can be requested by the PLC from the current process or be loaded from a log database Displayed values You have to configure a trend view in a screen so that tag values are displayed at the operator device When configuring the trend view you specify which tag values are displayed e Current values from the PLC The trend can be continued either with individual values from the PLC display in real time or with all the values which are stored in a buffer between two read processe
206. cluded in the project are converted where necessary to the appropriate HMI device versions for the WinCC flexible version WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Integration of WinCC flexible in STEP 7 20 1 Basic Principles 20 1 8 3 Converting an integrated project to an earlier WinCC flexible version Introduction You can save an integrated WinCC flexible project from a current version to an earlier version of WinCC flexible Before conversion is started the system asks for your confirmation Requirement e You must have a STEP 7 project in which a WinCC flexible project from a current version of WinCC flexible is integrated e You must have STEP 7 and a current version of WinCC flexible installed e The surrounding STEP 7 project must be open in the SIMATIC Manager Procedure 1 Open the project node of the WinCC flexible project in the project window of the SIMATIC Manager and select the WinCC flexible RT entry 2 Open the shortcut menu and select the Open Object command The project opens in WinCC flexible 3 In WinCC flexible select the menu command Project gt Save as version A dialog with notes on conversion is displayed 4 Inthe dialog select the desired WinCC flexible version in the drop down list box Save as version 5 To start conversion click OK in the dialog The conversion of the project to the selected version of WinCC flexible is performed
207. communication recipes or logs A amp m El weee Device_1 MP 370 E a Screens aM Communication aM Alarm Management wM Recipes 4 a Historical Data E Maz Scripts Bp Reports E te Text and Graphics Lists E ig Runtime User Administration a i Device Settings e Global project data Global project data applies to all HMI devices within the entire project It applies to all data and objects in the Project View at the same level as the Device option e g Language or Version management A x Esae Device_1 MP 370 E seee Device_2 TP 1704 amp MG Language Settings os Version Management WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 87 Working with projects 3 2 Types of projects 3 2 4 Creating a project for use on different operating units Principle It is possible to create a single project and to load it on several different HMI devices Application example This type of configuration is typically used for several operating units of a similar type but with different performance for example Special aspects of configuration Proceed as follows to use a project for different HMI devices e Create a project for a specific operating unit type normally for the operating unit with the smallest functional scope e Copy the configuration for the operating unit in the Project View e Test the feasibility for other operating units by switching th
208. configuration a configuration table with the address parameters is automatically created During subsequent editing in STEP 7 or WinCC flexible the system accesses this configuration table and accepts the prepared parameters WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Integration of WinCC flexible in STEP 7 20 7 Basic Principles Using HW Config You use HW Config to create the hardware configuration for new stations or to add required modules to existing stations HW Config provides a catalog with the available modules and preconfigured components and stations HW Config checks the usability of the objects you wish to insert Thus unusable or illegal objects cannot be inserted Edit the properties of an inserted object directly in HW Config Open the context menu of the object and select Object Properties Edit the object properties directly in the dialog that appears For example you can create a PC station in the SIMATIC Manager Open the station for configuration in HW Config Insert a WinCC flexible runtime application Select a communication interface and insert it Edit the settings for the communication interface in HW Config The WinCC flexible runtime application will not open via HW Config To open it use SIMATIC Manager For more information consult the HW Config documentation 20 1 6 Configuring connections Introduction Data exchange between WinCC flexible and th
209. configured functions scripts Select a function and move the function up or down by clicking on the arrow buttons To delete a function mark the function with the mouse and press the lt Del gt key WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 68 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O WinCC flexible Engineering System 2 7 Working with WinCC flexible 2 7 10 Text List Introduction In a text list the values of a tag are assigned to various texts The text lists are created in the editor Text lists The attachment of the text list to a tag is configured on the used object for example on a symbolic IO field These are the following application areas for the text list e For configuring a selection list with symbolic IO field e For configuring a status dependent button label e For the configuration of a text output for the value of a discrete or analog alarm e For the configuration of a text output for the value of recipe data The texts in a text list can be configured multilingual In runtime the texts are displayed in a set runtime language Configure text list Open the editor Text lists by double clicking on the entry Text lists in the project view By double clicking on the first empty line in the editor a new text list is created TEXT LISTS Click the column Selection and open the drop down list box Selection WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691
210. configured globally for all HMI devices These screen objects are grayed out in the Toolbox view and cannot be selected For a TP 170 touch panel unit you can not configure any buttons for example 5 1 3 Screens Editor Introduction You configure your screens in the Screens editor This editor is formed by the combination of a graphic programming software and a process visualization tool You open the Screens editor from the project view Open Double click Add screen in the Screens group of the project view The work area opens with a new screen WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 150 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Creating Screens 5 7 Basics Layout Work area OC Tool window Property view d Object view 4 Output view 7 A ZN Menu bar The menu bar contains all commands required for operating WinCC flexible Any available shortcut keys are indicated next to the menu commands Toolbars You can hide or show a specific toolbar Work area You configure screens in the work area Toolbox The toolbox contains a selection of simple and complex objects which you can add to your screens for example graphic objects or operating elements In addition the toolbox also provides libraries containing object templates and collections of faceplates WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 151 Creating Screens 5 7 Basics Pr
211. ctional scope of the editors are dependent on the HMI device selected Please refer to your manual to determine which objects and editors are available on your HMI device 92 WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 Working with projects 3 4 Editing projects Tabular editors and image editors Graphical editors such as the Screen editor display the elements belonging to both the Project View and Object View You open each object in the work area with graphical editors Tabular editors such as the Tag editor only display the associated objects in the Object View When a tabular editor is opened to edit the objects all associated objects are displayed in a table in the work area 3 4 2 Displaying projects Principle All component parts and editors available in a project appear in a tree structure in the Project View Displaying a project in the Project View All editors available are displayed under the project node in the Project View The objects in a project can be edited using the various editors Folders are provided as sub elements of each editor in which you can save objects in a structured way In addition direct access to the configured objects is available for screens recipes scripts logs and reports A x ss Device_2 TP 1704 8 Screens gt Add Screen aA Folder_1 3 Add Screen C Screen_1 D Screen_2 a b Folder_2 Ld a C Template C
212. d Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 401 Integration of WinCC flexible in STEP 7 20 1 Basic Principles 20 1 4 Working with the SIMATIC Manager Introduction Requirement When you are working with WinCC flexible integrated in STEP 7 you can use the SIMATIC Manager for your WinCC flexible projects In STEP 7 projects the SIMATIC Manager is the central point for managing your projects including your WinCC flexible projects The SIMATIC Manager enables you to access the configuration of your automation systems and the configuration of the operator control and monitoring layer WinCC flexible is integrated in SIMATIC STEP 7 Working with the SIMATIC Manager In integrated projects the SIMATIC Manager provides the following options e Create an HMI or PC station with WinCC flexible Runtime e Insert WinCC flexible objects e Create WinCC flexible folders e Open WinCC flexible projects e Compile and transfer WinCC flexible projects e Export and import texts for translation e Specify language settings e Copy or move WinCC flexible projects e Archive and retrieve WinCC flexible projects within the framework of STEP 7 projects 20 1 5 Working with HW Config Introduction 402 The HW Config editor is provided in STEP 7 for configuring and assigning parameters to the hardware Use drag and drop operations to assemble the required hardware A catalog is provided for selecting the hardware components During
213. d subnets in the STEP 7 project will be displayed NetPro has a catalog of network objects that you can use to insert additional devices or subnets In integrated projects this catalog also includes the SIMATIC HMI station object You insert objects from the catalog in the work area of NetPro using a drag and drop operation Drag and drop individual stations to connect them to the subnets Use Properties dialog boxes to configure the connection parameters of the nodes and subnets You then save the configuration in NetPro to update the data management in the WinCC flexible project Connections which you configure with NetPro can only be read in WinCC flexible In WinCC flexible you can only rename the connection enter a comment for the connection and set the connection Online Editing of the connection itself is carried out exclusively with NetPro Note Subnet properties such as the data transmission rate are set automatically in STEP 7 for all nodes in a subnet If you create or modify the subnet properties yourself you must ensure that these settings are applied for each node in the subnet You can find more information on this topic in the NetPro documentation Note If a new HMI station is set up in STEP 7 the MPI DP nodes are set to MPI and Address 1 by the system If the HMI station is not networked and the HMI station should be networked via a different substation type the connection parameters must be changed in NetPro or in
214. d by means of the purchased license that is the License Key you installed e WinCC flexible Micro License agreement e WinCC flexible Compact Standard Advanced License agreement and License Key for WinCC flexible Compact on USB stick License agreement and License Key for WinCC flexible Standard on USB stick License agreement and License Key for WinCC flexible Advanced on USB stick Licenses for WinCC flexible Runtime WinCC flexible Runtime is licensed using the license agreement and the License Key WinCC flexible Runtime licenses support a different amount of variables e WinCC flexible Runtime 128 Supports 128 process variables e WinCC flexible Runtime 512 Supports 512 process variables e WinCC flexible Runtime 2048 Supports 2048 process variables WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 25 Introduction to WinCC flexible 1 2 WinCC flexible system overview Licenses for the options packages You receive a license and a License Key on USB stick for each option WinCC flexible Engineering System already contains the functionality of the Runtime options package You do not need a license on your programming computer for configuring the functionality of a runtime option 1 2 5 2 WinCC flexible without licensing Principle Without a license WinCC flexible runs in demo mode only and the software operability are restricted Alarms which need acknowledging appear
215. d external communication In a PC station the internal communication between WinCC flexible RT and a PLC device contained occurs via the softbus The internal connection over the softbus is configured in WinCC flexible The connection to the softbus is automatic You only need to select the PLC device in the Station column of the connection Communication with external automation devices takes place by means of either the integrated interface of the PLC device or a separate communication module that you insert with HW Config PC station WinCC flexible PLC Runtime DP Softbus Profibus S7 controller S7 controller The communication is managed by the Station Manager In order to enable management by the Station Manager the S7RTM flag must be set in the PC station properties An approved version of the SIMATIC Net Software must have been installed on the target station You can find more information on this topic in the SIMATIC Net documentation WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 411 Integration of WinCC flexible in STEP 7 20 2 Configuring communication settings 20 2 Configuring communication settings 20 2 1 Introduction 412 Configuring communication settings via routing If all stations in an automation system are not connected to the same bus subnetwork these stations cannot be accessed directly online To establish a conn
216. des access to screen object templates You can always add screen objects and thus increase programming efficiency either by multiple use or reuse of object templates The library is your central database for storing frequently used objects such as screen objects and tags The output window displays system alarms generated for example in a project test run The Object View shows all elements of the area selected from the Project View Note With the exception of the work area you can show or hide all windows in the View menu WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 43 WinCC flexible Engineering System 2 2 WinCC flexible user interface 2 2 2 Menus and Toolbars Introduction The menus and toolbars provide access to all functions you need to configure your HMI device When the corresponding editor is activated menu commands and toolbars specific to that editor appear When the mouse pointer is moved over a command the corresponding ToolTip appears Cll WinCC flexible Advanced Project Edit View Insert Format Faceplates Options Window Help mle A gt X Yont 72 2B Add anew object Positioning the Toolbars Menus and toolbars are as a standard positioned at the top edge of the screen when creating a new project The position of menus and toolbars is determined by the user who is logged on in Windows If the toolbars are moved using the mouse t
217. desired target version New functionality from a more current WinCC flexible version is not supported in an earlier version of WinCC flexible System requirements for converted projects To edit a converted project you require WinCC flexible in the version selected during conversion A service pack in the version specified must be installed Please also note the system requirements and any service packs required for the operating system Information on the system requirements can be found in the documentation of the respective version of WinCC flexible With regard to an invalid HMI device check whether a hardware support package is available for the corresponding version of WinCC flexible HMI devices in libraries The system automatically selects the HMI device version which matches the selected WinCC flexible version if you are using WinCC flexible to save a project in an earlier version HMI devices in libraries are not automatically converted to an older HMI device version If you want to use this kind of HMI device in the earlier WinCC flexible version you have to adjust the HMl device version after adding the HMI device using the dialog for changing the devices Displaying alarm classes When you save a WinCC flexible project in an earlier version no alarm classes are assigned to system events in the System event editor in the earlier version of WinCC flexible This problem is specific to the view in the engineering system The projec
218. different product version the project is converted A number of special features should be observed in comparison with a non integrated project If a WinCC flexible project is integrated in STEP 7 the WinCC flexible project is an integral component of the STEP 7 project The conversion of the WinCC flexible project is carried out in WinCC flexible During the conversion process only the WinCC flexible project is converted the surrounding STEP 7 project remains unchanged Conditions of conversion If you want to convert a project integrated in STEP 7 you must have a STEP 7 installation in which the corresponding WinCC flexible version is integrated Example You created a project integrated in STEP 7 with WinCC flexible 2005 SP1 and save the project in the version WinCC flexible 2004 SP1 WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 406 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Integration of WinCC flexible in STEP 7 20 1 Basic Principles To edit the project in this version you require WinCC flexible 2004 SP1 integrated in STEP 7 The STEP 7 version is the same for both WinCC flexible versions STEP 7 can be used from version V5 3 SP2 and later If newer versions are used please observe the information about supported WinCC flexible versions The integration of multiple versions of WinCC flexible in a STEP 7 installation is not possible For every version of WinCC flexible you need a PC with a STEP 7 installation Informati
219. display is not necessary Requirements e The recipe has been created The recipe has the following settings Sychronization is enabled under Transfer The production data is transferred to the PLC so it is necessary to synchronize with the PLC to prevent the data from being accidentally overwritten WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 247 Structure of a recipe management system 8 4 Scenarios Sequence HMI device AA PLC External storage medium Implementation You can control the flow of data in the following ways e The control program controls the automatic transfer via control jobs or if necessary via WinCC flexible system functions The sequence is controlled via the status information in the mailbox and via return values from the functions used e One or more scripts control the automatic transfer via WinCC flexible system functions The sequence can be checked using the values returned by the functions used You can implement the automatic production sequence with available system functions e ImportDataRecords This function loads data records from a CSV file onto the recipe memory on the HMI device e SetDataRecordToPLC This function transfers a data record from the HMI device s recipe memory to the PLC WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 248 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Logging and dis
220. ditor for creating and changing analog alarms System alarms editor for changing alarm texts of system alarms Alarm classes editor for creating and changing alarm classes Alarm groups editor for creating and changing alarm groups Working with the editors 184 The following functions are available in all editors Changing the column display Deleting and copying objects Automatically filling multiple table rows Copying properties per drag and drop Copying objects from the object window with drag and drop Sorting table contents WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Creating an Alarm System 6 2 Elements and basic settings Changing column displays Configure the column display as follows e Hide or show columns Select the column header in the shortcut menu This function is not available in the Alarm groups editor because this editor consists of only two columns e Change column width Drag the right edge of a column header to the desired width e Change the order of columns Select the column and drag the column header to the desired position This function is not available in the Alarm groups editor e Sort Click on a column header If you click again on the same column header you return to the sorting order again The corresponding column header is marked with an arrow The arrow direction indicates the sorting order Deleting and copying object
221. ditor specific Option Installing 398 Licensing 26 organizing Script 299 Output Project report Output data of a recipe Output medium Project report Output View 447 Index Properties 50 Overview Report system P PageDown Parameter Connections editor Parameter delivery Script 312 System function Password After conversion 101 Initializing 390 PC station configuring External communication 411 Internal communication 411 Performance features HMI device 428 Planning jobs 363 Application example 363 Field of application 363 Work area 367 Polygon 156 269 Polyline 156 269 Position an object Editing multiple objects 161 Print Selection 349 Print alarm Configuring output parameters Print recipe Configuring output parameters Process alarms Activating 194 Process screen Changing 38 PROFISafe 351 59 380 project 59 38 Editing 91 Functional scope 60 Load Multilingual projects 90 New Several projects 60 Testing with the simulator under version management 383 Working with Project 448 HMI device dependency 83 Migrating 98 Multiple HMI devices 83 88 project configuration changes 380 recorded an changes 380 Project data Updating Project documentation Application 343 Introduction 343 Project language 324 Editor Project Language editor Project library 108 Project navigation 38 Project report 343
222. dvanced 282 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O User administration 11 3 Elements and basic settings 11 3 2 Groups user administration Introduction In user administration you administer users and user groups in order to control access to data and functions in runtime The user administration is divided into the administration of the users and the administration of the user groups This section described the administration of the user groups Open You open the administration of the user groups in the project window by double clicking on Groups Structure Bh wick wrea XM tones Se Work area The Groups work area shows the existing user groups and their authorizations Property view When a user group or an authorization is selected you can edit the designation and the comment in the General group WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 283 User administration 11 3 Elements and basic settings 11 3 3 Users work area Introduction The Users work area lists the users and user groups in table form You administrate the users and assign them to a user group Principle The work area consists of the Users and Groups of the user tables Administrators 9 Users The Users table shows the existing users When you select a user in this table the Groups of the user table displays the user group to which the user is assigned WinCC f
223. dvanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 31 Introduction to WinCC flexible 1 3 Automation concepts Principle The Sm rtAccess option is required for implementation In order to send alarms as e mails the HMI system must have access to an e mail server The e mail client sends the alarms via intranet or Internet The automatic alarm dispatch ensures that all the people involved e g shift foreman and sales manager are informed of the status of the machine in good time 1 3 4 Distributed HMI Introduction Distributed HMI enables the operation of a machine from several synchronized operating stations All the operating stations display the same process screen The operating authorization is transferred intelligently Principle The Sm rtAccess option is required for implementation m aa Only one HMI device contains the configuration data and functions as the server The server can be controlled from the other operator devices All the HMI devices display the same screens WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 32 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 Introduction to WinCC flexible 7 4 Configuration concepts 1 4 Configuration concepts 1 4 1 Configuration Support Introduction WinCC flexible is used to configure user interfaces to operate and monitor machines and plants WinCC flexible provides support for the configuration tasks in the form of solution oriented c
224. e these graphics store these in the image browser of the WinCC flexible project You can save graphics in the image browser as follows e If you drag and drop graphic objects from the Graphics object group onto the work area they will be automatically stored in the image browser The graphic names are numbered in order of their creation e g Image_1 Use the lt F2 gt key to rename graphics e As a graphics file with the following formats bmp dib ico emf wmf gif tif jpeg or jpg e As OLE object which is embedded in WinCC flexible and linked to an external graphic editor With an OLE link the external graphic editor can be opened from WinCC flexible The linked object can be edited with the graphic editor An OLE shortcut will only work if the external graphic editor is installed on your configuration computer and it supports OLE Using images from the image browser You can use images from the image browser in your screens as follows e Graphic displays e Image lists e Function key labels WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 161 Creating Screens 5 3 Working with objects Transparent images In WinCC flexible you also use graphics with a transparent background When you insert an image with a transparent background in a WinCC flexible graphic object the transparency is replaced by the background color defined in the WinCC flexible graphic object
225. e 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Creating an Alarm System 6 2 Elements and basic settings 6 2 Elements and basic settings 6 2 1 Alarm Components and Properties Properties of alarms An alarm always comprises the following components e Alarm text The alarm text contains a description of the alarm Character formats supported by the relevant HMI device can be used to format the alarm text on a character by character basis The operator note can contain output fields for the current values of tags or text lists The alarm buffer retains the instantaneous value at the time at which the alarm status changes e Alarm number The alarm number is used to reference an alarm Each alarm number is unique within the following types of alarms Discrete alarms Analog alarms HMI system alarms Alarms from the PLC within a CPU e Alarm triggers For discrete alarms A bit within a tag For analog alarms The limit value for a tag e Alarm class The alarm class of an alarm determines whether or not the alarm has to be acknowledged It can also be used to determine how the alarm appears when it is displayed on the HMI device The alarm class also determines whether and where the corresponding alarm is logged Note If you want to integrate a project in SIMATIC STEP 7 you can configure a maximum total of 7 alarm classes in WinCC flexible and STEP 7 The
226. e Acquisition cycle The acquisition cycle determines when the HMI device will read the process value of an external tag from the PLC Set the acquisition cycle to suit the rate of change of the process values The temperature of an oven for example changes much more slowly than the speed of an electrical drive If the acquisition cycle is set too low it will strongly increase the communication load on the process e Logging cycle The logging cycle determines when data will be saved in the log database The logging cycle is always an integer multiple of the acquisition cycle e Update cycle The update cycle determines how often a screen will be refreshed The smallest possible value for the cycle depends on the HMI device that will be used in your project For most HMls this value is 100 ms The values of all other cycles are always an integer multiple of the smallest value If the standard cycles predefined in WinCC flexible do not satisfy the requirements of your project it is possible to define your own cycles These custom cycles must however be based on the standard cycles Application example Use cycles for example to log your process at regular intervals or to provide reminders of the maintenance intervals WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO 135 Working with Tags 4 7 Working with structures 4 7 Working with structures 4 7 1 Structure basics Intr
227. e Navigation buttons Recompile the project after changing the HMI device type The compiling ensures that all screens are converted to the current HMI device If you then change the HMI device again without generating first it is possible that the navigation buttons will be shown differently in the individual screens e Fonts If a font which has been configured is not available on the HMI device it is replaced by a similar one or the configured standard font The standard font is dependent on the HMI device selected WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 84 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Working with projects 3 2 Types of projects e Character sets with different font sizes In projects for the HMI devices OP 73micro TP 177micro OP 73 OP 77A and TP 177A avoid using many different font sizes For each font size a character set is loaded on the HMI device When you generate the data check the output view to determine HMI memory resources used by the character sets e Font size In order to display the text on HMI devices use small Windows fonts If you use large Windows fonts then depending on the size of the display the text will not be displayed in full If you use for the HMI devices OP 77A TP 177micro and TP 177A font sizes of 20 point or more then this effects the performance For an effective configuration note the following points Use the same font for all large characters t
228. e PC station Configuring a PC station A preconfigured PC station is provided in WinCC flexible To configure a new PC station insert a SIMATIC HMI station in the STEP 7 project and select the PCs WinCC flexible RT as the HMI device The system will create a SIMATIC HMI station with a PC type HMI device Additional configuration settings for the PC station such as adding a slot PLC ora soft PLC are made with HW Config In integrated projects the catalog of HW Config is expanded so that you can insert all required components in the PC configuration using a drag and drop operation EHW Config SIMATIC PC Station 1 Configuration UT_B521 S7 031e ER lly Station Edit Insert PLC View Options Window Help eS S 8 a e dli Mel 82 R Brfie Stendad SCS i 1 a Ej WinLc PROFIBUS DP n M PROFIBUS PA E SIMATIC 300 E SIMATIC 400 SIMATIC HMI Station maa WinCC flexible RT Controller JE CP 1612 CPU 412 2 PCI CPU 416 2 PCI 3 6 Wirt i SES 611 1PY00 0VB SES 611 4PY00 0VB WinLC PN Order number Fi M C WinLC ATX CP Industrial Ethernet g Wince 6ES7 611 4PY00 1 4 0 CP PROFIBUS ae ee es ee ee Ce a ee ee ee ee ee eee WinCC flexible RT S CP 1612 Press F1 to get Help WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 410 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 Integration of WinCC flexible in STEP 7 20 1 Basic Principles Internal an
229. e Project languages The remaining columns display the texts in the other project languages provided the texts have already been translated Translation methods You can translate the configured texts as follows e Internal translation of texts directly in the Project texts editor This method is recommended for texts with little to be translated e External translation of texts using the export and import function This method is recommended for large amounts of text to be translated or when there are many project languages The Project texts editor is linked to the other editors Texts introduced here are automatically available in other editors as appropriate You can also jump directly from the Project texts editor to the point of use of the object to be translated 13 4 5 Exchanging texts with translators Introduction External translation of project texts is advantageous when there is a large amount of text in multiple languages You can use the export function to transfer project texts to external translators You can then use the import function to reintegrate the translated texts back into your project Scope of export and import e Export and import of all project texts If you want to send all texts for translation in the case of a new project for example you export all texts from the project to a csv file for the translator You then import the texts following translation The translated texts are automatically assig
230. e automation layer requires connections for communication to take place In integrated projects you can create connections with the following applications e WinCC flexible e NetPro This configuration can be made with either WinCC flexible or NetPro Using WinCC flexible You can create new connections or edit existing ones In integrated projects the Station Partner and Nodes columns are also provided in the editor for connection configuration po a lt lalla r TIF ONNECTIONS UT_B521 57 0316 SIMATIC 400 CPU414 Mi CPU 414 2 DP DP on UT_B521 57 031e SIMATIC 300 CPU315 2DP CPU315 2DP CP343 1 On fa onnection_1 On gt simatic 57 300 400 a onnection_2 On SIMATIC 57 300 400 A mu m E When creating a connection select the station partner and connection node from selection lists The required connection parameters are automatically accepted in STEP 7 The project has to be saved after configuration has been completed Connections which you configure in WinCC flexible are not transferred to NetPro and can only be edited with WinCC flexible WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 403 Integration of WinCC flexible in STEP 7 20 1 Basic Principles Using NetPro NetPro is recommended for use with larger projects In NetPro you configure the connections on a graphically supported interface When you start up NetPro the devices an
231. e data loading and saving Overwrite during transfer Recipe data record Importing and a Transfer option 217 Using text lists 227 Recipe data record name Writing to a tag Recipe data record number WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 Writing to a tag Recipe list 232 Recipe name Writing to a tag Recipe number Writing to a tag Recipe report configuring Recipe screen Recipe tag Synchronize tags Visual machine simulation Recipe setting Recipe tag Online Synchronizing 221 Recipe view 231 Application 239 Behavior 236 Behavior with screen change Configurable events 2 Displaying one recipe onl Displaying values only Expanded 232 Operation 239 Operation using the function ba Operation with the keyboard 2 Operation with the mouse 240 Operator control 240 Recipe data record 216 Simple 232 down list Updating 232 Using as a drop Recipes editor 228 Data records 228 Elements tab 226 Work area 2 Rectangle Recursion level Reference Object 312 Reference language Reference text function Remote access Application possibilities 31 Replacing mo Character string Object Report object Application Report propert Editing Report system 449 Index Overview 261 Representatives 6 Restoring HMI data Restoring data HMI device 394 Return value 321 Library
232. e edit mode 7 Display selection list DN isplay table Visible items H Displaying a particular recipe If you only want to authorize access to recipe data records of a particular recipe in a process screen you can specify the recipe in the recipe view e Under Recipe in the General group enter the required recipe in the Recipe name field Once you have entered a recipe in the Recipe name field you can check or uncheck the Display selection list check box to determine whether the recipe name is output at runtime e Check Display selection list to display the recipe name at runtime Gx gt aes General gt Properties D Animations Recipe Data record View type gt Evon Recipe name Tag for number name Orange Advanced view C Simple view lt Undefined gt Orange ei Wl Recipe_1 visible items a Recipe_2 WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 233 Structure of a recipe management system 8 3 Viewing and editing recipes in Runtime Writing a recipe number or name and recipe data record number or name to a tag The following function is only possible with the Advanced View setting Both the recipe and the recipe data record can each be linked to a tag in the recipe view If you select a recipe or a recipe data record its number or name is stored in the tag Conversely you can use the tag to select a recipe or recipe data r
233. e faceplate you interconnect the event click of the button to a script This script calculates e g the average value of two process tags This dynamic control is integrated in the faceplate You can preconfigure the faceplate in such a way that every faceplate instance that is created from it possesses the same dynamic control Using faceplates After you have created it the faceplate appears as an object in your project library You can now insert the faceplate into your process screens and configure it in the Property view for the relevant usage location Faceplate instance Inserting a faceplate into a process screen creates an instance of this faceplate If you edit the faceplate in the project library the faceplate instance generated from this will be updated automatically Reusing the faceplate instance The dynamic controls that you have configured directly to the object properties of the objects contained in the faceplate are included in each faceplate instance Alternatively preconfigure the instance of a faceplate and then reuse it Each newly generated instance then carries out e g the same script or uses the same tag You can drag the final configured instance of a faceplate into a library and reuse it later This preconfigured faceplate instance can continue to be used even if the faceplate is changed This means however that the interface of the faceplate must remain essentially unchanged Configuring security levels
234. e line in the import file The import file with the connection data must have the following format lt Name of connection gt lt list separator character gt lt Name of communication driver gt lt list separator character gt lt Comment gt lt Line break carriage return gt Table 4 1 Meaning of entries List entry Connection name Description Specifies the configured name of a connection This entry is needed to match up to the corresponding entry in the import file of the tags The list entry for Name cannot be empty The name cannot contain an apostrophe List separator character The list separator character separates the individual entries in the list You can select the character to be used for the list separator in the dialog for importing The following characters are offered for use Semicolon comma and period Use the selection field to select a character other than that shown if needed Name of the communication driver Specifies the name of the communication driver used in WinCC flexible It must exactly match the name used in WinCC flexible The following names are available e Allen Bradley DF1 e Allen Bradley DH485 e Allen Bradley E IP C Logix e GE Fanuc SNP e LG GLOFA GM e Mitsubishi FX e Mitsubishi protocol 4 e Modicon MODBUS e Modicon MODBUS TCP IP e Omron Hostlink Multilink e OPC e SIMATIC S5 AS511 e SIMATIC S5 DP e SIMATIC 87200 e SIMATIC S7300 400 e SIMATIC 5
235. e operating unit type in the project Pay particular attention to the following aspects e After switching the operating unit type all configured data are still contained in the project file However only that configuration data is displayed which is supported by the operating unit currently in use This relates to editors objects and object properties e WinCC flexible not only checks the functional scope of an operating unit but also its limitations If only a specific number of tags can be used on an HMI device for example the corresponding error message appears when transferring the project to the HMI device or when testing it in runtime e Always define the HMI version when you change the HMI type Runtime and simulation can only be started if the new HMI device versions are configured Information on the HMI device versions used in WinCC flexible is available in the FAQs on the Internet at the article ID 21742389 http support automation siemens com WW view en 21742389 3 2 5 WinCC flexible integrated in SIMOTION and STEP7 Introduction WinCC flexible operation can be operated in SIMATIC STEP 7 and SIMOTION SCOUT starting with the WinCC flexible Compact edition Integration has the following advantages e The tags and texts are imported into the WinCC flexible project e Direct access to SIMATIC STEP 7 symbols and SIMOTION SCOUT symbols during process connection e The texts and attributes contained in the alarm configu
236. e output oa A OO N gt To output the alarms of a certain interval select the respective tags for the Display beginning and Display end fields The tags can be supplied in runtime with the date and time for the first or the last alarm of the period Integrating alarms with the alarm numbering procedure Configuring in SIMATIC STEP 7 192 ALARM_S and ALARM_D are alarm numbering procedures Alarm numbers are assigned automatically during STEP 7 configuration These numbers are used to uniquely assign alarm messages During alarm configuration in STEP 7 the stored alarms and attributes are placed in the STEP 7 configuration data WinCC flexible automatically imports the required data and transfers them later to the HMI device You filter the output of ALARM_S alarms WinCC flexible by means of display classes In the project view select Alarms gt Settings and double click the Alarm settings The existing connections are displayed in the Alarm Procedures area WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 Creating an Alarm System 6 3 Working with alarms e a prenon panen om SESA Alarm text and number OFF Alarm text and number OFF Alarm text and number Off IV all display class Alarm text and number off Vi M2 NM b4 V5 M6 Vo WM 10 Mi M14 lv In the row of the required connection select the field in the ALARM_S Display Classes column and open
237. e project languages for creating your project e The reference language in which you configure the project initially e The editing language in which you translate the text To open the Project Languages editor double click Project Languages in the Localize group in the Project view WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 327 Structure of Multilingual Projects 13 3 Language Settings Structure E wens wre NOD laene Soe mm hee Project languages Here you enable the project languages for creating your project Reference language Here you select the reference language from the project languages The languages displayed are limited to those that you enabled in the list of available languages Editing language Here you select the editing language from the project languages The languages displayed are limited to those that you enabled as project languages in the list of available languages WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 328 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Structure of Multilingual Projects 13 4 Creating a project in multiple languages 13 4 Creating a project in multiple languages 13 4 1 Creating a project in multiple languages Translation methods You first create a project for one language only and then test it Afterwards you configure all other languages required The following options are available e Direct tran
238. e project runs as a background process You don t need to open the project in WinCC flexible for conversion You can find further information in the SIMOTION SCOUT documentation in the chapter SIMATIC WinCC flexible integrated in SIMOTION SCOUT Note When you convert a WinCC flexible project in integrated mode the software checks the version The SIMOTION Scout project is converted first followed by the integrated WinCC flexible project Only the WinCC flexible versions that are released for the selected SIMOTION Scout Version are offered to you in the conversion dialog When you convert a WinCC flexible project in non integrated mode and open a SIMOTION Scout project from WinCC flexible you have to check the product version yourself Converting a project with ProAgent components When you convert a WinCC flexible project the ProAgent components contained there are also automatically converted When you open a WinCC flexible project from an earlier version with a newer version of WinCC flexible the project including the ProAgent components contained there is converted to the newer version When you save a WinCC flexible project in an earlier version the project including the ProAgent components contained there are converted to the selected version and saved The original project and the ProAgent components contained there remain unchanged The suitable ProAgent version for the selected WinCC flexible version is automatically
239. e recipe screen e RecipeViewSaveDataRecord e RecipeViewSaveAsDataRecord e RecipeViewSynchronizeDataRecordWithTags e RecipeViewDeleteDataRecord e RecipeViewNewDataRecord e RecipeViewGetDataRecordFromPLC e RecipeViewRenameDataRecord for simple recipe view only e RecipeViewShowOperatorNotes e RecipeViewMenu for simple recipe view only e RecipeViewOpen for simple recipe view only e RecipeViewBack for simple recipe view only The system functions for loading saving and transferring recipe data records and recipes are located in the Recipes group Operator input of the recipe view The recipe view is used to display edit and manage data records Recipe Name Orange Data Record Name No Nectar E Depending on the configuration you can e Create change copy or delete recipe data records e Synchronize recipe data records with the associated recipe tags e Read recipe data records from or transfer to the PLC WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO 239 Structure of a recipe management system 8 3 Viewing and editing recipes in Runtime Control objects The following operating elements can be configured in the recipe view Button Hotkeys Function The configured help text is displayed B lt Ctrl Space Creates a new recipe data record Bar gt If a start value is configured it is shown in the input field
240. e tag from symbol This tag will no longer be compared automatically with the STEP 7 symbol WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O 419 Integration of WinCC flexible in STEP 7 20 3 Tag configuration 20 3 2 Connecting a tag via the application point Introduction Connections between WinCC flexible objects and operands in the control layer are configured simply by selecting the symbols in the connected PLC Accepting tags from STEP 7 All WinCC flexible objects that can be connected to a tag can be used to accept tags via the application point For example when you make an IO field dynamic you open the selection dialog for the tag in the Properties window of the IO field Navigate to the S7 program in the required PLC Select the required symbol from the symbol list or from a data block Click on the kA command button The system automatically creates a WinCC flexible tag and connects it to the associated operand in STEP 7 The symbolic name from STEP 7 will be accepted as the tag name The relevant data from the symbol table or data blocks will be integrated in the WinCC flexible tag The tag names transferred from STEP 7 to the WinCC flexible project are generated from the components of the general STEP 7 symbol The tag name Motor_Speed is derived from Motor Speed for example For unique identification an index starting with 1 is assigned to identical tags Non suppo
241. e the function list to trigger the execution of system functions at an event The function list is configured for an event of an object e g a screen object or a tag The events which are available depend on the selected object Events occur only when the project is in runtime Events are for example e Value changes of a tag e Changing the value of the array changing the value of an array element e Pressing of a button e Alarm occurrences You can configure a function list precisely on every event Up to 16 functions may be configured in a function list When the configured event occurs in runtime the function list is completed from top to bottom In order to avoid waiting times system functions with a longer running time file operations for instance are processed simultaneously A subsequent system function can be performed even if the previous system function has not yet been completed Configure function list In WinCC flexible open the editor containing the object for which you wish to configure the function list Select the object with the mouse In the property view click on the event in the Events groups on which you want to configure the function list The function list opens in the property view m General FS Function list p Properties gt Events 1 lt No function gt z D m High limit m Low limit Function List WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0
242. e type of HMI device Function key 148 Function list Asynchronous completion Function List 67 301 Completion 302 Completion in runtime configuring 6 HMI device dependency Propert 302 Script 302 Status information Synchronous completion System function 302 WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Index Functional scope ProSave Functions Updating tag value G Gauge Generation Consistency check 111 Global assignment of a function key Graphic managing use from the image browser 161 Graphic browser use image Graphic controller With transparent background Graphic IO field Graphic object 156 Graphic view 156 269 Graphics editor 338 Group H Help 77 Displaying Help function Help indicator HMI device configuration with several HMI devices Data backup 3 Inserting multiple Performance eens Project with several HMI devices 86 Remote access concept Restoring data Selection synchronized System limits Using a prais ject for several HMI devices 88 Version HMI device Sa hoy 84 In the script 3 Principle HMI device version 86 88 HMI replacement DP configuration 85 HMI station Creating WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 HMI system Tasks 19 HTML browser 156 Image Structure of editor 338 Image list Application Configuring
243. eX Controls Arranging Change property with VBS Creating a new OLE object 160 Creating an OLE object from a file Customizing default properties Insert Inserting of the same type 160 Reference 312 Replacing 104 ci and resizing multiple objects 161 Repositioning objects Resizing Rotate Selecting for project report Selecting multiple objects Synchronize in the script Tab order Object group Property Object list opening 66 Working with Object selection Outputting configuration data Object view Action in 96 Properties 5 Offices 6 WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 160 OLE object create from a file 160 Recreate 160 Online Recipe tag 221 Online help 78 Displaying 78 OP 77A and TP 177A Differences in the recipe open Data log editor Open 63 Editor Recipes editor Runtime security setting opening Opening older project versions Operating element Recipe view Operating recipes Modifying the recipe structure operating system Asian language settin Setting to Western 327 Operating system Updating on HMI device Operation Hotkeys 58 Recipe view Simple recipe view With the mouse Operation with the keyboard Recipe view Operation with the mouse Recipe view Operator control Simple recipe view Operator control element Editor specific 5 of a frame of a toolbar ion Ba e
244. eaaaeeeeaaaeeeeenaeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeenaeeeeeea 13 1 Working with multiple languages 0 cee cece ee cence cece entree eeaeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeeenaeeaaes 13 2 WinCC flexible terminology cc ccesccetiescecesdenceeesieedencaedeaeteeeesetiaaeestieseevtnclavesiiavesnuaaseudaaeeegeeveneds 13 3 Language Sots ceeesicrcrrirrer nner arne en ERE EEEE EEEE EA 13 3 1 Language settings in the operating system essseessssesssrnessnnessennaarenaatennannnnnennnnaannnnaannnnanenne d 13 3 2 Operating system settings for Asian languages eee ceenteeeeenteeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeseenaeeeenaaes k 13 33 Project Languages editor ci scc2e vei aseceudaccexsseasshasexthasccussnsedy si vaca E EEE SARE 13 4 Creating a project in multiple IANQUAGES eee eeente ee eeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeesesaeeeseeaeeeeenaeeeaes 329 13 4 1 Creating a project in multiple lANQUAGES eet eee ette eee ette eter tee eet e ee ee tate ee taeeeeeteeeet ented 329 13 4 2 Specific features of Asian and Eastern languages in the engineering system 330 13 4 3 Translating project texts in the CitOr ec ce eeeee eect eter eter eter teeeeetaaeeeeeaeeeeetaeeeesieeeaeeeertel 13 4 4 Project texts CCitOr cece eeeneeeeeeene eae eeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeaaeeeeesaaeeeseaaeeeeeeaaeeeseaeecaeeeeeeaeeeeeaas i 13 4 5 Exchanging texts with translators s ssrssirinsrinaninnnisna nananana anaa aAa 13 5 Working with dictionaries essseeeeeseeesse
245. eceepiteccatserecnatlagiede esate EE TRE ts k 19 1 4 Back transfer of Projects seiecsrisiisreicer derriera cernas nin ENA EEEN T ERT i WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Table of contents 19 2 Managing Files on the HMI DEVICE scssi sissie ini aaia AAAA ARSS A EA R 1921 ProSave oroni inina a E a E A EAE a a a 19 2 2 Backup of HMI data cece cccccccceeecececcne cece eee ee cette ce eaeeeeeeeeesecaaeeeeeeeeseceaeeeeeeeesececceeerereeeeeeeeeeeeees 19 2 3 Updating the operating System ccccccccccccesacceevessacecuseeeedeseeedeeedebecedsshaade seeded sedeadedseadeeteeetennad 19 2 4 Transferring AuthOriZations 1 i cccccccecesiecdecsenk niddectuntectheateceevteeceveiaeeseveild NAESER 19 2 5 AnStallation Of OPtlOMS s dir a aa eaaa a adiada sade es Eada a k 20 Integration of WinCC flexible in STEP 7 sssesssessssensesssnneosssnrssnnssnsnnnsrnnnstnnnsrennnssnnnnsnennsnnnnsennnnnnnnnnn 20 1 Basic PHINGIPIGS xcs cerdeifensdeiavisadas tec tenceesagdisetindhactavtiadanchanecieeabisireea tl eens eae 20 1 1 Restrictions for integrated projects eee cece eeneeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeteeeeetaaeeeeeaeeeeetaeeeesieeeaeeeereaa 20 1 2 Converting integrated projects eee cee neee erent ee een e eee ete eee tie ee ee teeeeneeeeeeeeesteeaaeeeeeeea 20 1 3 Basic principles of integration in STEP 7 cecesecccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseennaeceeeeesesenaeeeeeeeeeesnieaeeeeee
246. ecipe tag in the recipe view and IO field e When the operator modifies the recipe tag in the recipe view the content of the associated IO field also changes e When the operator changes the content of the associated IO field the content of the recipe tag in the recipe view also changes There must be an operating element with the SetDataRecordToPLC and GetDataRecordFromPLC functions present in order to synchronize the values with the PLC Synchronization of recipe data records with the PLC When recipe data records are transferred between the HMI device and PLC both communication peers access common communications areas on the each other Recipe data records are always transferred directly The values of the tags are written directly to or read directly from the configured addresses without being placed on the clipboard WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 223 Structure of a recipe management system 8 1 Basics Data transfer types There are two ways to transfer recipe data records between the HMI device and PLC e Transfer without synchronization e Transfer with synchronization via the Data record Area pointer Note Transfer with synchronization This is used to prevent uncontrolled overwriting of data in either direction in your control program during transfer with synchronization Requirements for transfer with synchronization e The Data record
247. ecipes The following entries are available for the recipe selection Attribute Recipe selection Function Used to select the selection criterion for outputting the recipes You can select from the following options All Name Number Requirement Recipe name This is used to select a recipe by its name If you have already configured recipes you can either enter the name of the recipe or select one from the object list The Name option has to be selected in the Recipe selection selection field First recipe Used to select the first recipe number The Number option has to be for outputting the records of several selected in the Recipe selection recipes Enter a fixed starting number selection field in the field or connect the field to a tag via the selection list The tag can be given a start value dynamically during runtime Last recipe Used to select the last recipe number The Number option has to be for outputting the records of several recipes Enter a fixed end number in the field or connect the field to a tag via the selection list The tag can be given an end value dynamically during runtime selected in the Recipe selection selection field Data record selection Used to select the selection criterion for outputting the records of recipes You can select from the following options All Name Number Data record name Used to select a
248. ecord by entering the corresponding value The tag type determines whether the name or the number is stored If you want to store the name you must specify a tag of type STRING You can for example transfer the tag as a parameter for a system function e Under Recipe in the General group enter the required tag in the Tag for number name field e Under Data record in the General group enter the required tag in the Tag for number name field info T Gx General lt Undefined gt gt Properties 22 Gram roma DB 1 DBB 0 General gt Animations lt 2 KiloSugar DB 10 DW 0 View type p Events 72 LitreConcentrate DB 1 DBW 0 z Litre Water DB 1 DEW 0 RecipeNumber i 1 DBW 2 Advanced view Kee Simple view RecipeNumber gt Enable edit mode I Display selection list Display table Visible items Using the recipe view as a drop down list You can use the recipe view as a drop down list for recipes and recipe data records in a recipe screen Set the following parameters e Select Advanced view under Display type in the General group e Under Recipe in the General group connect the Tag for number name selection box to the tags for the recipe names e Under Data record in the General group connect the Tag for number name selection box to the tags for the recipe data record names e Deselect Enable edit mode and Display table under Data record in the General group e De
249. ect properties such as Height and Width are summarized under the object property Size A change to the height is recorded as a change to the Size The offset to the start position is logged instead of the change of the end position for an animation such as Diagonal movement WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO 381 Logging changes 18 3 Change log of a project session New change section 382 A project session consist of one or more change sections A change section is limited by the following actions Open project Creating a new project version Save project Enables the change log A new change section is then started A change section ends with the following actions Close project Opening an older project version Save project again Disables the change log WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Logging changes 18 4 Change log of a project under version management 18 4 Change log of a project under version management Introduction The following section describes the special circumstances for a change log when you are using version management for your project Each project version has its own change log with additional entries Creating a new project version When a new project version is created the change log is saved along with the current project in the version management The change
250. ection to these devices a router must be interposed In this case a SIMATIC station can also act as a router if it has appropriate interfaces with the difference subnetworks Modules with communication capability CPUs or CPs used to establish gateways between the subnetworks must have routing capability The routing path is determined in Runtime by the system and cannot be influenced by the user During configuration it is therefore not possible to output information about any faulty connection A routing HMI within this routing path may prevent proper operation of this connection Usually HMI devices cannot be used as routers An exception is a PC on which the S7 RTM flag is set This requires the SIMATIC NET software WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Integration of WinCC flexible in STEP 7 20 2 Configuring communication settings Routing connection To create a routing connection all communication partners must be configured and loaded in a STEP 7 project SIMATIC HMI Station 1 Ethernetf 1 ndustrial Ethernet SIMATIC 300 CPU315 2DP S connection_1 SIMATIC 400 CPU414 2DP CPU 414 2DP 57 connection Yes Ethernet 1 IE S connection_2 SIMATIC 300 CPU315 2DP CPU 315 2 DP S7 connection Yes MPIC1 MPI 57 connection_3 SIMATIC 300 CPU315 2DP CPU 315 2 DP S57 connection Yes MPIC1 MPI Illustration of a hardware configuration with
251. ections are used to output different data and can contain general objects and specific report objects WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 262 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 Working with reports 10 2 Structure of reports e Report header The report header serves as the cover sheet for a report The report header is used to output the project title and general information on the project The report header is output without page header and without page footer The report header is output once at the start of a report e Report footer The report footer is used as the final page of a report The report footer is used to output a summary of the report or other information which is required at the report end The report footer is output without page header and without page footer The report footer is output once at the end of a report e Page header The page header is output with every page of a report The page header is used to output the date time title or other general information e Page footer The page footer is output with every page of a report The page footer is used to output the page numbers the total number of pages or other general information e Detail page The runtime data are output in the Detail page area The objects for outputting the runtime data are inserted in the Detail page area When you output the data page breaks are added automatically depending on the amount of data
252. edit the names display names and the limits of the effective range under the General category When you select a transponder you can see both the effective range and the zone that are assigned to that transponder You can only assign a transponder to one effective range so that the effective ranges do not overlap 15 2 4 Effective ranges working area Introduction The Effective ranges working area displays the effective ranges and their transponders in table format You create a list of transponders and assign certain transponders to an effective range The limit of the effective range is defined by the maximum distance from the transponders Principle The working area consists of the Effective ranges and Transponders tables it ols eA A wil p m m 1 i A T WE x F J oN 2 wee A D B a T Checksum pooo MixingAxisControl MixingAxisControl 1 Sm i Transponder_1 fixing A F FillingAxisControl FilingAxisControl 2 8m Transponder _2 11 1a MN 1 2 Transponder_3 3 FillingPlat 4 Transponder _4 The HMI device calculates a checksum from the local data so that the configured effective ranges and transponders reliably match those locally on the machine The project can only be started from the HMI device if the checksum calculated locally matches the checksum stored in the Effective ranges editor NOTICE More information in this regard is available in the Failsafe operation function m
253. eduler to open it in the project view Layout Property view Work area The work area shows the planned jobs WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 366 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Planning jobs 16 3 Elements 16 3 2 Work area of the Scheduler editor Introduction The work area shows the planned jobs which consist of the triggering event and the function list Layout The work area consists of the table of jobs the properties and the function list DailyJob Name Event Perform every at Timer Comment i Perform every day at 12 00 PM a KEA E DailyJob 1 E StartLogging Daily day 12 00 PM E lt Undefined gt gt Log type Data log Log DataLogDailyEvents lt No function gt The table of jobs shows the job the triggering event and additional information You assign the label and a comment and select the event The scheduler compiles a description of the job The properties also show the job along with the triggering event The time based event is specified in the properties In the function list you configure the functions or scripts to be executed in the job Note The compiled description provides a written summary of the job including the timing for the job You can obtain more detailed information using the tooltip function by moving the mouse pointer over the selected element in the user interface WinCC f
254. ee ee tatit eeteaeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeesenaeeeaeeeeseaaes 37 1 4 5 3 Graphic Configuration of the Screen Navigation cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeenaeeeseenaeeeesiaeeeeseneeees 38 1 4 6 Totally Integrated Automation sses E A E E 3 2 WinCC flexible Engineering System ccccccesssseeseseeeeeeeeesseeneeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeesscceeeeeeeeeesseeneesseeeeeesenees 41 2 1 Basic Principles on the Programming Interface ccccccesseeeeeneeeseenneeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseaeeeseenaeeeeeaaes 2 2 WinCC flexible USer iNterfaCe cece ceteccneeeeeenecnseeeceeesecaeesecaeenesaecsecsecnesnseeeeaeeseeenieeaeel 42 2 2 1 WinCC flexible User Interface ElOMent ccccccccesecsectecnecneceeenecnecrseeeeneeeensecaseseseeecisaee 42 2 2 2 Me nuszand Toolbars cccissecccisisvec teasieceiiacieceesseeeceeeniatetiasicecravue dead EEE EE EATER 2 2 3 Woka Odair ee a niarieth Teese edie a eddie eee 2 2 4 PrOJOCt VIGW E A A E des svatecethateceecssdece caida deeesbed entailed ac e dee cevbas edie feesardeetsarts 2 2 5 PROPCIY VIEW seis deste cade nagn a Ea taut a a ea N E A AE A EA 47 2 2 6 LIBAN i e E E E E 48 2 2 7 Output VIEW carneiro urin a a aaa aa aai ddaa aa arai EA 2 2 8 OBEC VIEN aaa G A AA A A e EA 2 3 Placing editor specific operating elements sssessssnnesssrreessnnseennanrnnnanennnnnannannennanannaannnnanannaane a 2 4 Working with Windows and toolbars ssssssisisssinaas iinan nn ninan Naa AANA N AANRAAK ANANN ARAARA 2
255. eeeeeeeeenteeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeseaeeeeeenaeeeenianeeess 6 4 7 Structure of a csv file With alarmS cece ec ects ete eceeeeeeecaeeseeseenectseeseeneseeenseeaeeesesaeseaeenee 200 6 4 8 Accessing the ODBC log database directly 2 00 00 ec ceeceeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeteeeeesneeeetieeeeesneeeeeaa Working with COMMECTION eceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeene cee eeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeesaeeeeesaeeeeesseeeeeesneneneeeeseeneeeeee 7 1 ESAS AE D ease tate see cavers sete tase he cepts N EA E TE T ET 7 1 1 COMMUNICATION DASICS esser 7 1 2 Principles of communication y WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 Table of contents 7 2 Elements and basic settings sic veseece isitoe iyuna E EE RAEE AATAS SE AEE 7 2 1 Connections Editor asinsi E a E a aa canleabereeh es 7 2 2 Parameters for CONNECTIONS 1 ccccceceeeeceeeee ceeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeeeeeecsaaaeeeeeesesaaeeeeeesesecnacaeeeeeneeeeeeess 7 2 3 Area pointers for connections 7 3 Connections and Protocols srnce aaia ii aaa iadaa 7 4 Eth rnet C nnectiO Misirin saatanaan eaaa araia aaa aLi ARAA A ARARNAR SAANEESSA ANEA 211 7 5 SNMP and MIB on HMIsS ccccccceesceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeaeeesesaeeeceesaeessesaeesseesaeeseesaeeeeeeieeeseneensaes 8 Structure of a recipe management system cccccccceeeesssssseeeeeeeesssseeeeeeesessssseeeeeeeessesseeseeensesseeeeess 8 1 BASICS neei a ea
256. eeeeeteeeeeeess 8 3 2 RECIPE VIEW i evscteeccee wat ceceetaeeta eau sstaccebwabd aaa a NE a ara a avec aa aa Paa ANE 8 3 3 Configuration options for the recipe ViOW cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeeseeeacaeeeeeesetennieeeeenenees 8 3 4 Behavior of the recipe view in Runtime ccceceeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeecaeceeeeeesensaeeeeeeeeeecnaeaeeeeeeesenen ees 8 3 5 Recipe Scree Finais E aaa a a Eaa cancunccandeansipanaedixtaand 8 3 6 Operator input of the recipe ViOW ceccccccecccceceeeeecesaeeeceeeeeeecenaeceeeeeeesenaeeeceeeeesaeaaeeeeaanaeees 8 3 7 Operator input of the simple recipe VIEW cccccceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeseceacaeeeeeesesecnieeeeenenees 8 3 8 Reactions to modifications of the recipe structure 20 0 0 ecceeeceecececeeeeeneceeeeeeteteeacaeeeeeeeseesnaees 8 4 SD COMANIOS iidne aapi enaa ties aaaea aaatateaap state acted aycusebdexs aeaa Ea a A E E a i a a 8 4 1 Scenario Entering recipe data records in Runtime 245 8 4 2 Scenario Manual production SEQUENCE ccceecsecseete ete ceeeenecnseceeseeeeeesecsaseascaeeseesseaeeaee 246 8 4 3 Scenario Automatic production SEQUENCE cceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeceaeaeeeeeesecacaeseeeeeeeennieeeeeeeetenea 9 Logging and displaying tags siscece cscs sesseeccsecevesspeuied ccscen cevwesseccecdsweeaseecuis cesceaasysdsenaddceasenveuteanecensedvenaaeeesctee 9 1 BASICS vs scsisdiscetas cece vecusivcwadeladepdaaadeie bed ce esaeda daa ena dada
257. eees 3 8 Overview Of rewire ooo eeee cece eet t eee ne eee ened need ened eee eee ee erties een aaea 110 3 9 Internal project find and replace feature 2 2 2 0 ccccceeeeeeseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseecencaeeeeeseeesnaeeeeeeestsenaes 110 3 10 Basic principles on documentation in WinCC flexible eee eceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeenaees 111 3 11 Consistency check during generation eee ceeeeeeeeeneeeeeene cece eeeeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeetaeeeseieeeeesaeeeenieeed 111 WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Table of contents 3 12 Debugging pProjeciS weisecissiacccciveiesgevencages nE NRE Ea SEE ESASEN SASEAR ved 3 13 Transferring projets serccesnirirneinniini t EA EEEE E EE ER 3 13 1 Basic Principles of the Transfer Operation 113 3 13 2 Back transfer of projects eesseesseeeerreererresresreraaarrnneeirnaartnnaatendatnnnndttaaatdnndattnaaatnnaateanaeanaaedanaaed 4 Working With TAGS i se paaa enaa aeaa aR aa a aa RE vaagi ixsevaaecdxcetcaeduaasdeosdasvesteewenes 4 1 BASICS iunie a a a a a a a a a vend 4 1 1 Basics f 0 e eee 4 1 2 External tags 2g sedtcsindcsas sedate dy cease Sex teens E DEE E E E A A e S E 118 4 1 3 internal TAGS ies sec cee ccsek eevee cevestkacevevaehev ecsutbaiegs ERE T ATE 4 2 Elements and basic Sets a c22 2222s cchevszde deze a i en Searle heehee 120 4 2 1 VAG CON lots ets ca ach lente ta i tach aea e aae a e Nabi aa e ew eh eaaa a Ee E EAE
258. een The movement path is composed of the starting point and finishing point The movement path is assigned a tag The tag value defines the relative position of the object on the movement path in runtime Gx gt Properties IZ Enabled Horizontal movement gt Animations m Appearance Tag Horizontal movement m Diagonal movement Tag_l gt Range From 0 To 100 m Yertical movement m Direct movement Start position End position C visibility x position 32 x position 232 Y position 136 Y position 136 WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 37 Introduction to WinCC flexible 7 4 Configuration concepts 1 4 5 3 Introduction Principle 38 Graphic Configuration of the Screen Navigation Screen navigation means configured hierarchy for process screens Using the screen navigation a fixed navigation structure is defined for a project Operators can use the navigation control in runtime to navigate between the various screens of the structure Use the Screen Navigation editor to place screens in the required location in the screen hierarchy using drag and drop You can also create a direct link between screens that are not integrated in the hierarchy The navigation buttons can be pasted in the process screen hue Project a 3 Device_1 TP 1708 Color a BB Screens E gt Add Screen CO Template O Mixing S
259. eereeteettttsttt tantn tatt t n tant EEES EAEAN EA EA NEEEA NEEE En SEEE Ennen Eana nnae enna 1391 Working with dicthOman S seresccssoan 13 5 2 System dictionary dho eesriided aieri annii aa dev vanced eh daaedee cay eaazed eva 1353 Userdictlonary edilon sssgs isiin i EAEE EDS AA anacdelviivees dea venivedias 13 6 Use of language dependent graphics sssssessresssnssrnssesnnssssnasssnnaatannannnnadnannaannnaanannannnnnadennaa 338 13 6 1 Use of language dependent graphics 0 0 0 2 ceceeeeeeeene eee eete ee erent eee eeee ee teeeetaeeeeetneeeeeae ta 338 13 6 2 Graphics editor eee 338 13 7 Languages in Runtime aeeeseeesseeeerreseerrasesrreeredeennaartnnatenaadtnnnadttaaattnnaatunaddnnanatdaadantnaatannaanaaann 137A Languages in RUNM sessen a 13 7 2 Configuring language Switching sesessisrsssiseriiriinsiiseinannriceiniirin denada innar iaiia ani Ea 13 7 3 Specific features of Asian and Eastern languages in Runtime i 14 Project GOCUMENTAUON sic ci ives sccene ceed cvvawe teed vetevcuebevvadee teri kanenn E AnNa TENENTE NENN EVEEN E S NN EN ESEA NERES EERE 14 1 BASICS enno E Seebivasecevenaeceu st 14 1 1 POJCCUAOCUIMOENTATION 3s idcivst acer tendon sddedtiey a ended abea a AA al 14 1 2 Structure Of a lAYOUt eee eee e ee eene teeter eae ee seen ee ee eaaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeseaaeeeseeaeeesesaeeeaeeeeeenaeeeeeaas 14 2 USING IAYOUTS ae a a a a ae 14 2 1 Using layouts cece cece cece cecceeceeeee cence eeeeaaeeeceeeceaeece
260. efficiency during troubleshooting and fault elimination Maximum flexibility for mobile operator control and monitoring Industrial applications Wireless networks are currently used for the following industrial application Features Production and process automation Automotive Machine and plant construction Food beverages and tobacco Warehousing and logistics Conveyor systems The Mobile Panels Wireless differ very little from the hard wired Mobile Panels The access points to the Mobile Panel are different in many applications however This customer requirement is now met optimally by the Mobile Panels Wireless WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO 351 Mobile Wireless 15 1 Basic principles Application Examples Solutions With the Mobile Panel Wireless you can move through the plant without restriction with or without safety engineering You can control and monitor moving machine parts or the entire plant in relation to the situation This is now possible as the Mobile Panel Wireless provides the necessary detailed view Plant structures are becoming every more complex but you can now create a large display with additional buttons A large display with its generously sized buttons provides reliable and easy touch control even when wearing gloves With the integrated solutions from Siemens you can plan configure simulate and extend wireless networks quickly
261. ei I O box The IO field can only be used as an output field in a report With an IO field you can output values with the following data formats Binary date date and time decimal hexadecimal string and time WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 269 Working with reports 10 4 Working with reports Symbol Sz Object Date time box Description The date and time are output in a report with the Date time field You can output the system time or connect a WinCC flexible tag through which the Date time field is supplied with corresponding values Graphic I O box The graphic IO field can only be used as an output field in a report The field is used to select graphics from a graphics list This allows you to display for example states of tags graphically Example Instead of the values 0 and 1 you can output one graphic each for a closed and an open valve Symbolic I O box The drop down list can only be used as an output field in a report The field is used to select texts from a text list This allows you to display for example states of tags in text form Example Instead of the values 0 and 1 you output Motor OFF and Motor ON for the state of a motor Graphic view The graphics object offers the possibility of inserting graphics which were created with other programs into a report You can in
262. em 5 2 1 Navigating options Introduction A WinCC flexible project which consists of multiple screens offers the following screen navigation options in runtime e Navigation by means of navigating buttons e Navigating with the help of function keys e Navigation by means of the navigation control WinCC flexible offers the following programming options e By programming buttons or function keys e By graphical configuration via the Screen Navigation editor and the navigation control Note If you have set the Visibility animation to Hidden in the project view of a screen this screen cannot be called up in Runtime 5 2 2 Graphic programming of the screen navigation system Screen Navigation editor The Screen Navigation editor is used for the graphics configuration of the navigation between several screens This editor allows you to organize your project screens in a hierarchical structure Operators can use the navigation control in runtime to navigate between the various screens of the structure for example to change to the parent screen or to the neighboring screen In addition to these structured connections the Screen Navigation editor also allows you to generate direct screen connections regardless of the given structure Open To open the Screen Navigation editor double click on the Screen Navigation are under the Device Settings in the project view WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Ad
263. em Dictionary editor is used to view the system dictionary integrated in WinCC flexible Tags Tags are created and edited in the Tags editor Cycles It is possible to configure events in WinCC flexible which reoccur at regular intervals The time intervals are defined in the Cycles editor Alarms Alarms are created and edited in the Analog Alarms and Discrete Alarms editors Logs The Alarm Log editor is used to log alarms in order to record operating statuses and faults which occur in a system The Data Log editor is used to compile process and log process values Protocols The Reports editor is used to create reports with which the user prints alarms and process values for example in runtime Scripts WinCC flexible provides the option of making your projects dynamic using custom scripts The scripts are managed in the Scripts editor The following tasks can also be completed in WinCC flexible Task Editor Configuration of controllers Connections Setting up users user groups and assigning user rights for operation in Runtime user runtime administration Managing task related jobs It is possible to execute a job once or Scheduler several times Setting up the device settings such as start screen language used Device settings Managing different project versions Version management Unit dependency and editors The representation of the project in the WinCC flexible Project View and the fun
264. enables the user to sort the objects according to topics Delete Deletes the object or folder selected Rename Enables the object or folder selected to be renamed Undo Reverts the last process Cut Copies the object or folder in the clipboard and deletes it Copy Copies the object or folder in the clipboard Paste Inserts the object stored in the clipboard Print selection Prints the object or folder selected Cross reference Shows all places of use for the selected the object or folder Properties Shows the properties of the object or folder selected Drag and drop can be used for the following actions e Inserting objects in an editor Using drag and drop an object can be dragged from the Object View into any editor when the editor permits editing of the object An example of its application is the linking of tags to a screen If a tag is dragged from the Object View into a screen an I O field is automatically created e Moving or copying objects in subfolders If the Object View contains both objects and subfolders an object can be moved to a subfolder by means of drag and drop or copied WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 97 Working with projects 3 4 Editing projects 3 4 5 Migrating existing projects Migrating projects from ProTool and WinCC Projects can also be opened in WinCC flexible which were created with ProTool or WinCC
265. enu appears The following actions are available in the shortcut menu user to sort the objects according to topics Shows the properties of the object or folder selected Drag and drop actions Drag and drop can be used for the following actions e Inserting objects in an editor Drag an image from the Project View and drop it in another screen The screen is then assigned a button which when clicked switches the screen content back to the first screen e Moving or copying objects in subfolders If the Project View simultaneously contains objects and subfolders an object can be moved to a subfolder by means of drag and drop or copied 3 4 4 Working in the Object View Principle The Object View provides an overview of the objects The following actions can be executed in the Object View e Double click e Select a command in the shortcut menu e Drag and drop WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 96 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Working with projects Double click Shortcut menus Drag and drop 3 4 Editing projects A folder is opened by double clicking on the folder in the Object View After double clicking on an object e g a screen in the Object View the editor opens The following actions are available in the shortcut menu Action Description Open editor Opens the editor Add folder Creates a new subfolder The creation of subfolders
266. er for language setting is displayed Setting runtime languages during configuration In the Languages and Fonts editor you can specifiy e The project languages to be available as runtime languages for the respective HMI device e The order in which the languages are to be switched 13 7 2 Configuring language switching Introduction If multiple Runtime languages are available on the HMI device you must configure language switching This is necessary to enable the operator to switch between the various Runtime languages Methods for language switching You can configure the following methods for language switching e Direct language selection Each language is set by means of a separate button In this case you create a button for each Runtime language e Language switching The operator toggles the languages by means of a single button Regardless of the method used the button names must be translated into each of the languages used You can also configure an output field that displays the current language setting WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 340 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Structure of Multilingual Projects 13 7 Languages in Runtime 13 7 3 Specific features of Asian and Eastern languages in Runtime Introduction When configuring for Asian languages some specific features should be observed for operation in Runtime Memory requirement for Asian character sets The memory
267. er recipe 2000 User data length in bytes per data record 8000 Number of data records per recipe 5000 Number of recipe elements in the project Reserved memory for data records in the internal Flash Logs Number of logs 100 Number of entries per log file including all log segments 500000 Number of log segments 400 cyclical trigger for tag logging 1s Trends Number of trends 800 Text lists and graphic lists Number of graphic lists 500 Number of text lists 500 Total number of lists 500 Number of entries per text or graphic list 3500 Number of graphic objects 2000 Number of text elements 30000 Scripts Number of scripts 200 Communication Number of connections 8 Number of connections based on the SIMATIC HMI http Protocol 16 Maximum number of connected Sm rtClients including a service 5 client Help system Number of characters in a help text 320 Languages Number of runtime languages 16 Scheduler Tasks 2 48 WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 438 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Appendix User administration User groups Authorizations Passwords Project Size of the project file fwx 21 2 Performance features WinCC flexible Runtime 50 32 100 The number of entries for each individual subsequent log applies for the segmented circular log archiving method 2 Only valid for time triggered tasks Event triggered tasks are not relevant for the system limits WinCC flexible 2007 Com
268. erally avoid running the system at 100 load for longer periods Scripts are processed at lower priority so as not to interfere with operation or the representation of values If system utilization is extreme the scripts to be executed are therefore first only premarked for execution The maximum size of the premarked list depends on the device e OP 270 TP 270 MP 270 OP 277 TP277 50 entries e MP 277 MP 370 MP 377 PC Runtime 200 entries If more scripts than can be premarked are activated at one time during a screen change for example excess calls are discarded and a system alarm displayed 12 6 3 Delivery and return of values Transfer of a value When calling up a script parameters are delivered according to the principle Call by value If you deliver a variable for example as a parameter the value of the variable is delivered to the script on execution of the script When scripts and system functions are called the parameter is delivered according to the principle Call by Reference Example You configure a script at the Click event for a button The system function SetValue Y X is called in the script The system function SetValue Y X assigns the value 5 to the variable IndexTag SetValue IndexTag 5 If you click on the button in Runtime the script is executed and the value 5 is assigned to the variable IndexTag Return of a value Return values can return the result of a calculation e
269. erator can log on to the effective range at runtime 3 Configuring additional effective range objects Configure additional objects for displaying the position and signal strength within an effective range 4 Set parameters for transfer and device PROFIsafe communication WLAN network Power management Transfer mode Configure the data channel Configure network operation Set the transponder Commissioning effective ranges Switching on and Testing the HMI device SS Oe Le O 0 0 Starting Manual Transfer 1 Acknowledging the effective range at the plant You acknowledge the effective ranges and their transponders 12 Determine checksum WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 361 Mobile Wireless 15 3 Working with effective ranges 13 Transferring the project once again with checksum Enter the checksum you determined in the project and once again transfer the project 14 Test effective range Note For detailed information on items 5 to 10 refer to the operating instructions of the HMI device For detailed information on items 11 to 14 refer to the Fail safe operation of Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN Function Manual WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 362 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO0 Planning jobs 1 16 1 Field of application of the scheduler Definition In the scheduler you link system funct
270. ering permissions must have been set up on the HMI device File The project file is transferred to the specified destination directory The transfer mode setting for an HMI device is also applied if the HMI device is selected in the project view and one of the commands on the Project gt Transfer menu is selected for example in the case of a back transfer operation or when the operating system is updated on the HMI device Transfer to the OP 73micro TP 170micro TP 177micro OP 73 OP 77A and TP 177A HMls The RS 232 PPI Multi Master Cable 6ES7 901 3CB30 0XA0 serial cable is required to transfer project data to the OP 73micro TP 170micro TP 177micro OP 73 OP 77A and TP 177A HMIs It is imperative that DIL switch 5 is set to 0 Only serial transfer is possible at micro operating panels All other HMIs support either serial data transfer or MPI transfer By changing the transfer mode of a channel in the transfer settings you disable the corresponding other channel WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO 389 Transfer 19 1 Basics OP 73 OP 77A and TP 177A HMls do not support simultaneous data transfer via MPI from several active instances of WinCC flexible to multiple HMIs These devices only execute the initial first transfer request Transfer destination On Windows CE HMI devices you can store the compiled project file to the Flash memory or RAM of the HMI device
271. es only to the screen in which you have defined the function key In order for the operator to be able to call a screen in Runtime you must integrate each configured screen in the operating process You have various options of configuring these functions e Use the Screen Navigation editor to define the screen structure and configure the entire screen navigation system e You use the Screen editor to configure buttons and function keys for calling other screens WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Creating Screens 5 7 Basics 5 1 2 HMI based dependency of screens Introduction Device layout The functions of the HMI device determine project visualization in WinCC flexible and the functional scope of the editors While creating the project select the corresponding HMI device for the project The project view can be used to change the type of HMI device or add further ones The following screen properties are determined by the functions of the selected HMI e Layout e Screen resolution e Color depth e Fonts e Objects available The device layout of a screen forms the image of the HMI device in your configuration The device layout of the screen shows all the function keys available on the HMI device for example SIEMENS SIMATIC PANEL 1 Recipe name 1 i 2 Recipe name 2 od Be Recipe name 3 Recipe name 4 a gt Screen resolution Colo
272. esnsaeecteeeeeaes 156 5 3 1 Overview Of ODJCCIS ii eect ition aserets tiie eetenden cat eederd aad tpdeve ann apes sit eeatne puede nee eee meee A 5 3 2 Editing options Of Obj6Cts 2 s20ciiseiescedin si irena EA EE EEA 5 3 3 Repositioning and resizing multiple objects WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 11 Table of contents 12 5 3 4 tile graphiGS aera astute din putea ences a ae ea e eE Ea ra Oaa ae Oee aeea a aaae 161 5 3 5 ODOC GhOU PS essa a a yan visu dey N S a A AS EA EE legal vines 5 3 6 Defining group properties 5 4 Options of assigning dynamic update functions cece ce eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeaeeeeeeaas 5 5 Working with function KeYS cccccceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeesaeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeseneeeeeseeaeeseeetenaeees 166 5 6 The Advantage of Layers uocem OE ORA a Sandel tanec hd end 168 5 7 OD ect Drane S sonsa tintcdel veetensenezaes vasvaeh ENSAR EA SAE tls 169 5 8 Working with faceplates 5 8 1 Faceplate basics cccccccecceeeeecccececeeee eee ce caanee cee eeacaaeaeceeeesegaaeaeeeseesaeaaeaeeeseeeseeee eeeeeeesaneees 5 8 2 Dynamic control options Creating an Alarm System cccccccceceseeeeeeeeee eee eeeaeeeeeeeaaee eee aaeeeeaaaaeeseaaaeeeeaaaseeseaaeeesesaaeenesesesnaaeeeenaes 6 1 BASICS A ye vatiecs sted oas cade E detente cet cae tn das Mhncasigude ebads cus sandh afar sqtesstaceibarveduad
273. essteatedsies 175 6 1 1 Visualization of process and system alarmS eccceeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeseeaeeesesaeeeeeenateeenaaes 6 1 2 User defined AAI S sex iecec cca ccecdveecdeccesineces cvshe adv esate er nnne EEEN ENET EAREN EEE 6 1 2 1 Available Alarm Procedures ic cces ssc sceeevnteuessitee iat abeecees vateeetv dace AAA ANA veranda eee 6 1 2 2 Acknowledging Alarms cccccesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeseeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeaeeeseaeeeeeeeseeaeess 6 1 2 3 Alarm CIASSOS encrena ated davsacecteiaceebiniedecendcacetivece Ei 6 1 3 VSCOM ALANS sa S 6 1 4 Displaying Alarm Sc ec sccceccsitecd do itaccecctacde cssnaviaceses E E ATE 6 1 4 1 Displaying Alarms on the HMI DeVICE cece ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeaeeeseneneneeees 179 6 1 4 2 Filtering the display Of alarms cccceecesccse cee cseene ene cneecaeenecnecnseeseseeeeseeseesaeeeaeeesactsaaeneseieens 179 6 1 4 3 Logging and reporting Alarms sessiossa aae E ASEA 180 6 1 4 4 System Functions for Alarm Editing ce cceccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeseeaeeeeeaeeaaeees 6 2 Elements and basic SOtutinGS idee ccceczetccaddssiaseestadenasedcashaseeessacdexgennedaeetacededssduveluadaeeeguagsedessas evens 6 2 1 Alarm Components and Properties cccccececeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeaaeaeeeeeeseceneaeeeeeesessenieeeeeeeees 6 2 2 Editors for Configuring Alarms sisiraan aia A a AA AA 6 2 2 1 Basic Princ
274. et WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO 209 Working with a connection 7 3 Connections and Protocols 210 PLC Protocol SIMOTION e MPI e PROFIBUS DP e TCP IP Ethernet OPC e DCOM Allen Bradley PLC series SLC500 SLC501 SLC502 SLC503 SLC504 SLC505 MicroLogix and PLC5 11 PLC5 20 PLC5 30 PLC5 40 PLC5 60 PLC5 80 e DF1 2 e DH via KF2 module 3 e DH485 via KF3 module 4 e DH485 4 PLC series ControlLogix 5500 and CompactLogix 5300 e Ethernet GE Fanuc Automation SPS series 90 30 90 70 VersaMax Micro e SNP LG Industrial Systems Lucky Goldstar IMO PLC series GLOFA GM GM4 GM6 and GM7 Series G4 G6 and G7 e Dedicated communication Mitsubishi Electric PLC series MELSEC FX and MELSEC FXO e FX Mitsubishi Electric PLC series MELSEC FXO FX1n FX2n AnA AnN AnS AnU QnA and QnAS e Protocol 4 OMRON PLC series SYSMAC C SYSMAC CV SYSMAC CS1 SYSMAC alpha CJ and CP e Hostlink Multilink SYSMAC Way Modicon PLC series Modicon 984 TSX Quantum and TSX Compact Schneider Automation e Modbus RTU SPS series Quantum Momentum Premium and Micro SPS series Compact and 984 via Ethernet bridge e Modbus TCP IP Ethernet Telemecanique PLC series TSX 7 with P47 411 TSX 7 with P47 67 87 107 420 TSX 7 with P47 67 87 107 425 module TSX SCM 21 6 with the specified TSX 7 CPUs
275. eutsch Deutschland Project view ablen Object view In the work area you set the time for which a password remains valid You can also set requirements for the new password for example how different must the new password be from how many previous passwords of the same user and if the user receives a notice as to how many days are left before his password expires You can also specify whether the password should contain a special character or number and define the minimum length of the password You can define whether the user must change the password set by the administrator after the first logon and whether the user is permitted to change the logoff time You can also determine whether to support central user administration by using SIMATIC Logon to authorize users WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O User administration 11 3 Elements and basic settings Effects in Runtime Note The following information relates to local user administration The password policies stored on the server are valid if users are authorized by means of SIMATIC Logon The runtime security settings have the following effects depending on the configuration e Password group Password aging checkbox enabled The password expires after the number of days set in the Duration of validity of the password field Password generations field If the users changes
276. evdndedteateecesecdeeedeceesuiateeneste 141 4 8 1 Importing Tags in WINCC TexDl en cicsccc sacaavs tacaeedusvasececesnneneensedey sens cadveancedediaseeseeaneeeeseradeeeaeetad 4 8 2 Settings for the Tag IMPO ciiccccceccccedsetcseecece cai cvedeeeensecastesceesdesneeeceeseeveecsneesssaaeeeencaeesencaaedaseeeenees 4 8 3 Format of the Connection Data for the Import 4 8 4 Format of the Tag Data for the IMpoOrt eee ee cece erect a E 5 Creating Screen eninin AENEA EEE AARETE evs bbesta cer EE PE ETEEN 5 1 BASICS T E E E E T I EE A E AEE S 5 1 1 SCKECIN BASICS A E E hgtesnsdaeeaatedeeazewene cei 147 5 1 2 HMlI based dependency Of SCIEENS ceceeccecceecseetecnseceeneenecesecaaeeeseesesessaseseeseesacnseeseesaenaees 149 5 1 3 OCPOCMS E dlo seecce cadets cnszaeetnennttichendacen taleawiauce cnesddaets eddaees A 5 1 4 PFOCGQUICS ii cccscccciastecceesiacceceadancetavaccceuasatsbecceeseatteedsaededhassecebasandecvstacceusiadeeevasanccbasie E R 5 2 Configuring the navigation SYStOIM ccceceeee cee eeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaaeeesecaeeeeeiaeeeeeeaeeeeeneeaaes 5 2 1 NAVIGATING OPTIONS sossa aa E delved cctv dlatadeadacdaevahe leased 5 2 2 Graphic programming of the screen navigation system 5 2 3 Using the navigation CONtrol ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeseneeeeseneeeeeseeeeeeseneeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeees 5 3 Working With objects ceeeeecee sence ee enneeeeenee nets eeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeesesaeeeeeeaeeeseaeeeseenaee
277. example Change user NOTICE The events available depend on the HMI device Not every HMI device supports all events The function list contains a system function or a script in each line WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 364 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Planning jobs 16 2 Working with jobs and events Job sequence When the event occurs the scheduler starts the jobs associated with the event The jobs are executed consecutively A job is executed by executing the function list line by line In the case of a system event only one job per HMI device can be configured and executed Note If many jobs are executed within short intervals time delays can occur In the case of a cyclic event make sure that all of the jobs are executed before the next event occurs Timer for time based events To make dynamic changes to the configured start time during runtime for daily annual or one time events select an internal tag as a timer The value of the tag determines the start time for the job during runtime NOTICE The tag must be of the DateTime type WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO 365 Planning jobs 16 3 Elements 16 3 Elements 16 3 1 Scheduler editor Introduction In the scheduler you plan a job by configuring a function list for an event Open Double click on Sch
278. fine limits for the tag values shown in the I O box Set Hide input if you want to hide operator input in runtime Cree 2 Date time box A Date time box may have the following runtime functions e Output of the date and time e Combined input and output the operator can here edit the output values in order to reset the date and time The system time or a corresponding tag may be used as source to define the date and time The date can be output in extended format for example Tuesday December 31 2003 or in short format for example 12 31 2003 Graphic I O box A Graphic I O box may have the following runtime functions e Output of graphic list entries e Combined input and output the operator can here select a graphic from an graphic list in order to change the content of the Graphic IO field Example of its use as output field To indicate the runtime status of a valve the Graphic I O box outputs the image of a closed or open valve WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 157 Creating Screens 5 3 Working with objects Symbol I Object Symbolic I O box Instructions The Symbolic I O box may have the following runtime functions e Output of text list entries e Combined input and output the operator can here select a text from a text list in order to change the content of the Symbolic I O box
279. flexible 2007 refers to the configuration software e Runtime designates the runtime software running on the HMI devices e WinCC flexible Runtime designates the visualization product for use on standard PCs or panel PCs The term WinCC flexible is used in the general context A version name such as WinCC flexible 2007 is used whenever it is necessary to distinguish it from other versions WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 5 Preface Trademarks The following formatting is used to facilitate reading of the manual Notation Scope Add screen e Terminology that occurs in the user interface e g dialog names tabs buttons menu commands e Inputs required e g limit values tag values e Path information File gt Edit Operational sequences e g menu commands shortcut menu commands lt F1 gt lt Alt gt lt P gt Keyboard inputs Please pay particular attention to such notices Note Notes containing important information about the product and its use or a specific section of the documentation to which you should pay particular attention HMI SIMATIC SIMATIC HMI SIMATIC ProTool SIMATIC WinCC SIMATIC WinCC flexible Third parties using for their own purposes any other names in this documentation which refer to trademarks might infringe upon the rights of the trademark owners Add
280. for producing plastic parts WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 251 Logging and displaying tags 9 1 Basics Bit triggered trends with buffered data acquistion 252 When you set buffered data acquistion the values to be displayed are buffered in the PLC and read in bit triggered as a block These trends are suitable for displaying rapid changes when the course of the trend as a whole is interesting and not so much the individual values You configure a switch buffer in the PLC so it can continue to write the new values while the trend buffer is being read The switch buffer ensures that the PLC does not overwrite values while the operator devices reads the values for the trend The switch between the trend buffer and the switch buffer functions as follows Whenever the bit which is assigned to the trend is set in the Trend transfer 1 tag all the values are read simultaneously from the trend buffer and displayed as a trend at the operator device The bit in Trend Transfer 1 is reset after reading has been completed While the operator device is reading the tag values from the trend buffer the PLC writes the new tag values into the switch buffer When the bit which is assigned to the trend is set in the Trend transfer 2 tag all the trend values are read from the switch buffer and displayed at the operator device While the operating device is reading the switch buffer
281. g average value of two numbers But a return value can also give information about whether an instruction was performed correctly Therefore the system functions which perform file operations such as Delete also have return values WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 321 System functions and runtime scripting 12 6 Runtime behavior of functions in runtime Note The return value of a system function can only be assigned an external or internal variable In order for a script to return a value you must have chosen the type Function for the script In the script you assign the return value to the name of the script Function Average Yaluel Yalue2 1i Check if Parameters are not numeric 2i If IsNumeric Valuel False Then Valuel 1 3j If IsNumeric Value2 False Then Value2 1 4 iverage Valuel Value2 2 In order to create an average value from two numbers call up the Average function and deliver the values to be processed to a variable for example AverageValue Average 4 6 You can then output the average value in an output field 12 6 4 Changing of object properties in runtime with VBS Introduction You can access object properties of screen objects and tags in runtime with VBS When you change values of object properties with VBS this has no effect on the project data Changing object properties When you change an o
282. g Screens 5 1 Basics 5 1 1 Screen Basics Introduction In WinCC flexible you create screens which an operator can use to control and monitor machines and plants When you create your screens the object templates included support you in visualizing processes creating images of your plant and defining process values Application example The figure shows a screen which was created in WinCC flexible With the help of this screen the operator can operate and monitor the mixing unit of a fruit juice manufacturing system Fruit juice base is supplied from various tanks to a mixing unit The screen indicates the filling levels of the tanks and of the mixer The screen also contains control elements for the valve units and for the mixer motor Quantity in tank in I Tank 1 C Tank 3 Tank 2 C Bottling machine Mixing unit Tank 2 Tank 3 Quantity in Valve 4 mixer I a ae M to bottling machine EJ EJ aiia Fixed window WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 147 Creating Screens 5 7 Basics Screen design Insert an object you need to represent a process into your screen Configure the object to correspond to the requirements of your process A screen may consist of static and dynamic elements e Static elements such as text or graphic objects do not change their status in runtime The tank labels shown in this example of a mixing unit are suc
283. g with projects 3 7 Working with the cross reference Principle 3 7 Working with the cross reference The Cross Reference list editor enables all usage points for specific objects e g tags or screens to be located and to skip to those points directly Cross reference user interface Kross References l Text lists Iv Show ee lt references pel z temperature_p21 Curve_1 B EA Feld E pressure_p21 z Curve_2 B EA Feld_2 E Trend tag Property tag associat Trend tag Property tag associat rl a ol ol RE r SROSS REFE ENG mj Cross References for voltage_p21 temperature_p21 pressure_p21 Bedienger t_1 C Bediengerat_1 C Bediengerat_1 5c Bediengerat_1 5c Bediengerat_1 C Bediengerat_1 Sc Bediengerat_1 5Sc Open the object by double clicking the icon DB 1 DBW 4 DB 1 DBW 2 p21 DB 1 DBW 0 p21 Possible operations in the cross reference via the shortcut menu Use the Go to usage command to skip directly to the location of usage in the project Alternatively double click the point of usage icon It is possible to change the view in the Cross reference editor The following commands are available to change the view e Collapse all The Collapse all command is used to hide the list of places of use for all objects e Expand all The Expand all command is used to recall the list of places of use The Print co
284. ght cm Select the page format for the output in the Page field As an alternative select the User defined format You can then enter values for your own format in the Width and Height fields Select the portrait or landscape format in the Page orientation field Select the unit of measurement for setting the page size and page margins in the Unit field WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 268 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Working with reports 10 4 Working with reports Set the size of the page margins by using the fields in the Page margins area The page margins set may not be smaller than the page margins set at the printer 10 4 3 Objects for report creation Introduction Objects can be either graphics elements for laying out your project report or dynamic elements for outputting data The objects have limitations which depend on the configured HMI device Please note the information in the object descriptions The objects are made available in the Simple objects object group in the toolbox view The special report objects are also available for creating reports The special report objects are contained in the Report objects object group Simple objects Symbol Object Ez Line Description The line is an open object The line length and angle are defined by the height and width of the rectangle enclosing the object The line ends can be represented as arrows or d
285. global assignment Assigning buttons with screen navigation WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 167 Creating Screens 5 6 The Advantage of Layers 5 6 Layers The Advantage of Layers Use layers in order to achieve differentiated editing of the objects in a screen A screen consists of 32 layers If you assign objects to the layers you thereby define the screen depth Objects of layer 0 are located at the screen background while objects of layer 31 are located in the foreground The objects of a single layer are also arranged hierarchically When you create a screen the object inserted first is located at the rear within the layer Each further object is placed one position towards the front You can shift objects forwards and backwards within a layer Principle of the layer technique Always one layer of the 32 layers is active New objects you add to the screen are always assigned to the active layer The number of the active layer is indicated in the Layer toolbar and in the Properties view of the screen The active layer is highlighted in color in the Properties view of the screen When you open a screen all 32 layers of the screen are displayed You can hide all layers except the active layer in the Properties view of the screen You then explicitly edit objects of the active layer Application examples 168 Use layers for example
286. gs x gt General a General ner al o Project Languages gt Properties l Graphics D Events General Settings Project Texts f Dictionaries Meng 4 ii a i Structures 57_300_400 ii Ci tion 57 _300_400 a B Version Management onnection Data type Int Acquisition made Cyclic on use Acquisition cycle 1 s Lelle ileile Array count 1 A tabular editor can also be activated using the associated shortcut menu To open an existing element in the tabular editor select the tabular editor in the Project View Then double click on the required object in the Object View Alternative procedure To open an editor via the menu select the New object in project command from the Insert menu 2 7 7 Switching between editors Introduction Although several editors or their objects can be opened simultaneously in WinCC flexible only the work area of one editor can be active in the work area If several editors are open they are represented by separate tab controls in the work area WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 64 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 WinCC flexible Engineering System Tab Controls 2 7 Working with WinCC flexible To select a different editor click the relevant tab in the work area In tabular editors a tab shows the name of the editor for easy identification In the case of graphical editors the name of the current element is indicated e g Screen1
287. guages x 8 number of languages x 4 4 x number of data records length of the data record name 1 x 2 x number of data records 8 8 x number of data records Or rewritten D2 12 8 x number of data records number of languages x 12 number of data records x 4 length of the data record name 1 x 2 e D3 shared memory D3 14 number of elements WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 427 Appendix 21 2 Performance features Note Arrays and single elements can be calculated as described above 21 2 2 System limits 21 2 2 1 System limits Introduction The following tables of system limitations provide assistance in estimating whether a specific project is still within the system limitations of a specific HMI device The maximum values specified are not additive i e 4000 alarms can be configured if no further objects are used However please note that simultaneous output of 4000 alarms and 300 screens each with 40 screen objects is not possible In addition to the limitations specified allowances must be made for restrictions in configuration memory resources Engineering System Configuration in the Engineering System is limited by main memory resources WinCC flexible requires up to 2 GB of main memory depending on the operating system The configurations shown below have a heavy impact on main memory load e high number of a
288. h Tags 4 1 Basics 4 1 2 External tags Introduction Principle Data types External tags enable the communication data exchange between the components of an automation process e g between the HMI device and the PLC An external tag is the image of a defined memory location in the PLC You have read and write access to this storage location from both the HMI device and the PLC Since external tags are the image of a storage location in the PLC the applicable data types depend on the PLC which is connected to the HMI device If you configure integrated in STEP 7 or SIMOTION Scout when creating the external tags you can directly access all the tags which were created during the programming of the PLC Basic data types are available for all configurations In addition you can also use other data types for external tags which are intended specifically for the PLC to which a connection exists A detailed listing of the basic data types and the data types for a connection to S7 controllers can be found under Data types if connecting to S7 Information about data types which are available for connection to other PLCs can be found in the documentation about the respective communication drivers Note In addition to the external tags area indicators can be used for communication between HMI device and PLC You can set up and activate the area indicators in the Connections editor Detailed information about the area indicato
289. h dictionaries 13 5 Working with dictionaries 13 5 1 Working with dictionaries System dictionary and user dictionary Various dictionaries assist you when translating projects in WinCC flexible e System dictionary The system dictionary included in WinCC flexible contains commonly used process automation terminology and the corresponding translations The system dictionary can be viewed but not modified All rights for the source documents lie with the Landesinstitut fur Erziehung und Unterricht LEU RotebuhlstraRe 131 hae Stuttgart Germany ww schule bw ee ee a english tech_woerterb In as far as nothing is specified to the contrary and in as far as rights of other parties are not affected the distribution of these documents as a whole or in part in electronic and printed form is desired under the condition that the source Landesbildungs Server Baden Wiurttemberg and the URL are named A commercial distribution of the documents is expressly prohibited without the previous written permission of the LEU e User dictionaries You store translations of terms that occur repeatedly in your project texts in a user dictionary In a user dictionary you can directly enter terms or adopt project texts from the editors WinCC flexible enables the use of several user dictionaries These are physically managed within a file and can be integrated in new projects Auto translate function When the Auto translate function in
290. h for the desired topic In order to use the full text search across the entire WinCC flexible Information System select the Help gt Search menu command The WinCC flexible Information System opens with a search tab Enter the desired search term The WinCC flexible Information System can also be opened via the Start menu in Windows Select the menu command Start gt SIMATIC gt WinCC flexible gt WinCC flexible Help System in the task bar The Online Help system is opened in a separate window Customized setup of WinCC flexible WinCC flexible allows you to customize the position and reaction of windows and toolbars This allows you to configure the work environment to meet your special requirements Working Environment User Dependency The appearance of WinCC flexible is linked to the user logged on in Microsoft Windows On saving the project the positions and behavior of windows and toolbars are automatically saved with it When the project is opened again the project status loaded is identical to that when saved In this way the working environment is opened as it was when last closed This is also the case when a project edited by a different project planner is opened Resetting the work environment 78 The positions of views and toolbars can be reset to their original state To do this select Reset layout in the View menu WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01
291. h static elements e Dynamic elements change their status based on the process Visual current process values as follows From the memory of the PLC From the memory of the HMI device in the form of alphanumeric displays trends and bars Input fields on the HMI device are also considered dynamic objects The filling level values of the tanks in our example of a mixing plant are also dynamic objects Process values and operator inputs are exchanged between the controller and the HMI device via tags Screen properties Function keys Navigation 148 The screen layout is determined by the features of the HMI device you are configuring It corresponds with the layout of the user interface of this device If the set HMI device has function keys then for example the screen shows these function keys Other properties such as the screen resolution fonts and colors are also determined by the characteristics of the selected HMI A function key is a key on the HMI device You can assign one or several functions in WinCC flexible These functions are triggered when the operator presses the relevant key on the HMI device A function key can be assigned global or local functions e Global function keys always trigger the same action regardless of the currently displayed screen e Function keys with local assignment trigger different actions based on the currently displayed screen on the operator station This assignment appli
292. he following respects e Only the simple recipe view is supported e Recipe tags configured in IO fields are always synchronized with the recipe view e Recipe tags configured in IO fields are not automatically transferred between the PLC and HMI device when they are modified Recipe tags are always offline e tis not possible to export or import the recipes There is no external storage medium Overview of the flow of data 222 HMI device Recipe display lt Synchronous A Offline Controller 1 WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Structure of a recipe management system 8 1 Basics Interaction between the components There is interaction between the following components at runtime e Recipe view Recipes are displayed and edited in the recipe view on the HMI device The recipe data records from the internal memory of the HMI device are displayed and edited in the recipe view e HMI device recipe memory Recipes are saved in the form of recipe data records in the HMI device s recipe memory e Recipe tags The recipe tags contain recipe data Using recipe tags in process displays 8 1 8 Overview You can use recipe tags in IO fields of a process display Note When the value of a recipe tag in the IO field is modified the change is not automatically transferred between the PLC and HMI device Note Behavior when using a r
293. he HMI eM 114 388 Transfer via USB 389 Transferring License key on HMI device Transferring recipe values between HMI device and PLC Translate 335 388 Automatic Editors 323 Workflow 329 Translation Translating project text externally Transparency In graphic 162 Transponder 3 Trend Trend view 156 251 Trunk 3 U Uninstalling User dictionar 335 Update cycle 135 135 Updating Operating system on the HMI device 396 Upload From HMI device 114 Integrated in iect 114 fod Project file 390 USB No nsfer 389 391 Use 214 214 Faceplate E ae Of cee Script 300 System function 298 User administration 2 279 281 pea central user sina 2 Field of a ication 279 Purpose brd WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 Work area User Ad area Bi ES 273 bed SIMATIC Logon 289 Export Import 2 User dictionar Editor mary g Structure of ang Bar Uninstalling 335 User dictionary editor 337 User interface langu a 324 WinCC flexible 378 User password Changed after conversion 101 User rights at the initial start of WinCC flexible 80 User view User dependency Working environment Using HW Config In integrated project V VBS Change object properties Help function Version HMI device 114 version comparison 378 Version management 369 in integrated projects 399 W WinCC Automation concept
294. he PLC Since external tags are the image of a storage location in the PLC the applicable data types depend on the PLC which is connected to the HMI device If you configure in STEP 7 or SIMOTION Scout integrated you may directly access all tags when creating the external tags which were created with STEP 7 or SIMOTION Scout during the programming of the PLC When working on distributed systems you can directly access the tags of the other HMI systems using the OPC interface Data types Basic data types are available for all configurations In addition you can also use other data types for external tags which are intended specifically for the PLC to which a connection exists A detailed listing of the basic data types and the data types for a connection to S7 controllers can be found under Data types if connecting to S7 Information about data types which are available for connection to other PLCs can be found in the documentation about the respective communication drivers In addition you can create your own data types by creating structures Note In addition to the external tags area indicators can be used for communication between HMI device and PLC You can set up and activate the area indicators in the Connections editor Detailed information about the area indicators can be found under Communication WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 117 Working wit
295. he data to be imported must meet the requirements described in this section You export the tag data to an Excel file from a PLC program The exported data must be prepared according to rules and can then be imported in WinCC flexible There are utilities available for preparing the exported tag data from some PLC programs for the import into WinCC flexible A version of such a utility for Allan Bradley is available on the product CD 2 under lt Support Tag Converter gt The latest versions of these applications can be be downloaded from the Internet at the following address http support automation siemens com WW view en 16502367 133100 Procedure for Tag Importing Two files are needed for a complete import of tag data One file contains the information for connecting to the PLC and the other contains the data from the tag The connection information is first imported to allow the data type and address parameters to be checked Then the tag data is imported Before beginning the import you can specify whether or not to overwrite existing connections or tags with the same name 4 8 2 Settings for the Tag Import Introduction The Import tags to device dialog is provided for importing tags Make the required settings in this dialog so that the import files can be correctly interpreted Importing Tags into an HMI Device To open the Import tags to device dialog mark the desired device in the project window and select the context menu c
296. hey revert back to their last Exit position when WinCC flexible is restarted Menus 44 Menus available in WinCC flexible Menu Short description Project Contains commands for project management Edit Contains commands for clipboard and search functions View Contains commands for opening closing elements and for zoom layer settings To reopen a closed element select the View menu Paste Contains commands for pasting new objects Format Contains commands for organizing and formatting screen objects Faceplates Contains commands for creating and editing faceplates Tools Contains commands for changing the user interface language and configuring the basic settings in WinCC flexible for example Script Contains commands for the synchronization and syntax check of scripts Window Contains commands for managing multiple windows in the work area e g for changing to other windows Help Contains commands for calling help functions The availability of the menus and the scope of their commands depend on the respective editor which is used WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O WinCC flexible Engineering System 2 2 WinCC flexible user interface Toolbars The toolbars provide quick access to important frequently used functions The following toolbar configuration options are available e Adding
297. hich you can choose Note however that the name may only occur once within the tag folder Connection to PLC and tag Logging cycle For external tags you must specify the PLC to which the HMI device is connected since these tags represent memory locations in the PLC The available data types for a tag and their address in the PLC memory depend on the type of PLC Furthermore you must specify how often the tag should be updated Data type and Length The data type of a tag determines which type of values will be stored in a tag how these are saved internally and the maximum value range that can be held by the tag Two simple examples of data types are Int for saving integers or String for saving character strings You can input leading zeros in values for tags of data type Integer For text tags of the type String or StringChar you can also set the Length of the tag in bytes For all other data types the value of Length is fixed Array count You can assemble tags from a number of the same type of array elements Array elements are saved in consecutive memory locations Array tags are primarily used when working with larger quantities of the same form of data e g for a curve buffer or in the definition of a recipe Comment You can enter a comment for each tag to provide for a more exact documentation of your project Limits You can specify a value range with an upper and lower limit range for each
298. his function is only possible if the table cell permits the use of the object 6 2 2 2 Discrete alarms editor Introduction You create discrete alarms and specify their properties in the Discrete alarms tabular editor Open In the project view double click Discrete alarms in the Alarms group Layout Bh w wre NEO teeenee Poe mee tee Project view gt x Work area Object view Work area The work area shows in tabular form all the established discrete alarms and the associated settings You can edit the properties of the discrete alarms in the table cells WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 186 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Creating an Alarm System 6 2 Elements and basic settings Property view Configure the discrete alarm in the property view The view offers the same information and settings as the work area table 6 2 2 3 Analog alarms editor Introduction You create analog alarms and specify their properties in the Analog alarms tabular editor Open In the project view double click Analog alarms in the Alarms group Layout Bo wens wre KOO taeae ep hee Project view Object view i Work area The work area shows in tabular form all the established analog alarms and the associated settings You can edit the properties of the analog alarms in the table cells WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 187 Creati
299. his case e You can search for objects in the complete project or in parts of the project Use the Find in project dialog in this case WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 110 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Working with projects 3 10 Principle 3 11 Introduction 3 10 Basic principles on documentation in WinCC flexible Basic principles on documentation in WinCC flexible Use the project documentation to recall an overview of the configuration data The project documentation can be provided as follows e Displayed on screen e Output as file e g PDF or HTML e Output via a printer If only certain parts of the project data need to be used in the project documentation select the corresponding objects Consistency check during generation During configuration the data entered is automatically tested for its plausibility Example Any tag of data type Byte you create may assume values between 0 and 255 Input will be rejected if you attempt to enter a start value higher than 255 You are also shown a message informing you of the valid range of values The plausibility test ensures for example that value ranges are maintained and incorrect input is indicated during the configuration phase Incomplete configurations are not checked during input for example an IO field was not assigned a tag The assignment is checked in the course of generation An alarm is output to the output windo
300. his is based on process transitions Operator control of the process The operator can control the process by means of the GUI For example the operator can preset reference values for the controls or start a motor Displaying alarms Critical process states automatically trigger an alarm for example when the setpoint value is exceeded Archiving process values and alarms The HMI system can log alarms and process values This feature allows you to log process sequences and to retrieve previous production data Process values and alarms logging The HMI system can output alarms and process value reports This allows you to print out production data at the end of a shift for example Process and machine parameter management The HMI system can store the parameters of processes and machines in recipes For example you can download these parameters in one pass from the HMI device to the PLC to change over the product version for production WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 19 Introduction to WinCC flexible 1 2 WinCC flexible system overview SIMATIC HMI SIMATIC HMI offers a totally integrated single source system for manifold operator control and monitoring tasks With SIMATIC HMI you always master the process and always keep your machinery and units running Examples of simple SIMATIC HMI systems are small touch panels for use at machine level SIMATIC HMI
301. however remain unchanged Only the users are re assigned to the user groups for example Operator The user administration separates the administration of the users from the configuration of the authorizations This ensures flexibility at the access protection WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 User administration 11 3 Elements and basic settings 11 3 Elements and basic settings 11 3 1 Users user administration Introduction In user administration you administer users and user groups in order to control access to data and functions in runtime The user administration is divided into the administration of the users and the administration of the user groups This section describes the administration of the users Open You open the administration of the users in the project window by double clicking on Users Structure Bi wick wrea XX tonet Se Work area The Users work area shows the existing users and the user groups to which they are assigned WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 281 User administration 11 3 Elements and basic settings Note A user can only be assigned to one user group Property view When a user has been selected edit the password and the time after which the user is logged off automatically in the General group WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard A
302. hroughout the project Arial and Tahoma are the best suited for this Avoid font sizes larger than 72 point e Resolution When switching from an HMI device to another with a lower resolution there are two options available All screen objects can be automatically scaled All screen objects can be left in their original size Objects at the lower or right side of the screen that overlap the displayable screen will not be displayed To display these hidden objects select the screen background and select Display hidden objects in the shortcut menu In the dialog that opens you can select individual objects or all objects and move them to the visible area of the screen by pressing OK Note Because HMI devices with a display size less than 6 have the same width but different heights you should turn off the automatic scaling when replacing the HMI device Because the width remains the same automatic scaling would change only the height of the objects causing them to become distorted To enable or disable automatic scaling select the Options gt Settings menu command In the Settings dialog that opens click Settings for screens editor in the Screens editor group Enable or disable the Fit screens and screen objects to new HMI device option e HMls with DP configuration The DP configuration is not altered when you replace an HMI with DP configuration The HMI can not be operated in Runtime if the DP configuration does
303. ian responsible can remotely access the HMI device and display its user interface directly on his workstation In this way updated projects can be transferred more quickly which in turn reduces machine downtime WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 Introduction to WinCC flexible 1 3 Automation concepts Application Possibilities The option Sm rtService is required for implementation LAN TCP IP PROFIBUS Remote access via a network can be used for the following applications e Remote operation and monitoring An HMI device can be operated and running processes monitored from your own workstation e Remote administration A project can be transferred from a workstation to an HMI device In this way projects can be updated from a central point e Remote diagnostics Each Panel provides HTML pages for accessing the installed software version or system alarms using a Web browser 1 3 3 Automatic alarm dispatch Introduction A machine which fails due to a fault costs money An alarm that reaches the service technician in a timely manner helps to minimize unplanned downtime Example Contamination in a feed line reduces the flow of coolant When the value drops below the configured limit value the HMI device displays a warning The warning is also dispatched as an e mail to the service technician responsible WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard A
304. ice does not have a memory card or if there is insufficient memory space the transfer is terminated However the compiled project file is transferred in its entirety beforehand so that runtime can be started with the transferred project data If the source data of a large project should be stored for back transfer and an Ethernet connection is available to the operating device you can select a network drive as the storage location rather than the memory card of the operating device This avoids problems with the storage location WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Transfer 19 1 Basics e If there is no project opened in WinCC flexible you must select the HMI device on which the source data file for the back transfer operation is located and the loading method in the Communication settings dialog prior to carrying out the back transfer operation If a project is open in WinCC flexible the back transfer operation takes place from each selected HMI device In this case the transfer mode selected for this HMI device in the Transfer Settings dialog in WinCC flexible is applied Transfer and back transfer When a source file is included in the transfer operation the project is compressed from the source format hmi and transferred as a pdz file to the external storage medium of the HMI device or directly to the PC In the case of a back transfer operation the pdz f
305. ice to which the transfer operation should take place must be connected to an MPI bus or to a PROFIBUS Interposed routing partners can also be interconnected via another type of bus WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 416 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 Integration of WinCC flexible in STEP 7 20 2 Configuring communication settings Starting the transfer in WinCC flexible After configuration in STEP 7 is complete open the HMI station in WinCC flexible To trigger the transfer select the Project gt Transfer gt Transfer Settings menu command fk Select devices for transfer xi M Operator Panel 8 OP77B M Settings for Operator Panel 8 OP77B OP 77B Transfer to Flash C RAM Mode MPI DP zi m Delta transfer On C Off Station address IV Enable back transfer IV Overwrite password list IV Overwrite recipe data records IV Enable routing Next station MP 2 gt PROFIBUS 5 Transfer Apply Cancel cnca 5 Transfer settings MPI DP must be set in the Mode field The Enable routing box must be checked The Next station field shows the bus type of the next and last connection and the network address of the next routing partner and the target device Any potential intermediate routing partners are not shown here If you click the Transfer button the transfer will start right away The routing settings are only made available if you
306. icing From Panel 270 x Sm rtService of machines plants via the Internet Intranet WinCC flexible Use of an HMI device as OPC Multi panel x OPC Server server WinCC flexible Process diagnostics during runtime From Panel 270 x ProAgent WinCC flexible Audit Reporting interactions according to From Panel 270 x FDA Note The mutual use of the options Sm rtAccess and Sm rtService with the option Audit is not enabled WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Introduction to WinCC flexible 1 2 WinCC flexible system overview 1 2 5 Licensing 1 2 5 1 Licenses and License Key Principle All WinCC flexible editions require a license Certain WinCC flexible editions require a license to be used without restriction e License You receive your license on paper The license entitles you to install and use your purchased WinCC flexible edition on a computer More information about rights of use is available in the electronic catalog CA 01 e License Key The license key is delivered on a separate copy protected USB stick During setup you are requested to insert the USB stick which contains the License Key The data carrier which contains the License Keys is named as storage location in all other documents Licenses for the WinCC flexible Engineering System Which licensing model is going to be used depends on the WinCC flexible edition The edition is activate
307. il address to which all messages about events related to the alarms in this class will be sent WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 177 Creating an Alarm System 6 7 Basics Predefined alarm classes in WinCC flexible e Faults for discrete and analog alarms that indicate critical or hazardous operating and process states Alarms in this class must always be acknowledged e Warnings for discrete and analog alarms that indicate regular operating states process states and process sequences Alarms in this class do not require acknowledgement e System for system alarms that notify the operator about the operating states of the HMI device and the PLCs This alarm class cannot be used for user defined alarms e Diagnostic message for S7 diagnostic messages that indicate states and events of the SIMATIC S7 or SIMOTION PLCs Alarms in this class do not require acknowledgement Only very specific properties can be changed for predefined alarm classes 6 1 3 System alarms Introduction System alarms notify the operator about the operating states of the HMI device and the PLCs System alarms can range from notes to serious errors Triggering of system alarms The HMI device or the PLC triggers an alarm if a certain system status or an error occurs in one of these devices or during communication between two devices A system alarm consists of the number and the alarm tex
308. ile is saved on the configuration computer If a project was open in WinCC flexible during the back transfer you are prompted to save and close it Then the project back transferred is decompressed and opened in WinCC flexible When saving the project you must assign a name for the back transferred project N caution WinCC flexible cannot check whether the source data file on the operating unit actually belongs to the project running on the device If you have performed a transfer operation in the interim that did not include the source data file old project data may still be on the HMI device Under certain circumstances the data will then no longer match the project that is currently running Note Use the back transfer process preferably for small and medium sized configurations in order to keep transfer times as short as possible You have the following options when there are numerous project files Transfer the project file as a compressed arj file onto a CF card for example using the backup function of the project manager WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 393 Transfer 19 2 Managing Files on the HMI Device 19 2 Managing Files on the HMI Device 19 2 1 ProSave Introduction The ProSave service tool is supplied with WinCC flexible The functionality of ProSave is integrated into the WinCC flexible user interface on the programming devi
309. ile is transferred in its entirety beforehand so that runtime can be started with the transferred project data If the source data of a large project should be stored for back transfer and an Ethernet connection is available to the operating device you can select a network drive as the storage location rather than the memory card of the operating device This avoids problems with the storage location e If there is no project opened in WinCC flexible you must select the HMI device on which the source data file for the back transfer operation is located and the loading method in the Communication settings dialog prior to carrying out the back transfer operation If a project is open in WinCC flexible the back transfer operation takes place from each selected HMI device In this case the transfer mode selected for this HMI device in the Transfer Settings dialog in WinCC flexible is applied WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 115 Working with projects 3 13 Transferring projects Transfer and back transfer 116 When a source file is included in the transfer operation the project is compressed from the source format hmi and transferred as a pdz file to the external storage medium of the HMI device or directly to the PC In the case of a back transfer operation the pdz file is saved on the configuration computer If a project was open in WinCC flexible during the b
310. inCC flexible Engineering System 2 7 Working with WinCC flexible Default value In order to prevent an the cactus graphic from being displayed in such a case you establish a default value A graphic configured for a default value is displayed in the following scenarios e Bit selection in text and graphic lists is deactivated and in the tags there is not precisely 1 bit set that is also configured Table 2 5 Example Significance 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bits set 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 Configured Image 3 Image 2 Image 1 Image 0 Two bits are set and configured The configured default value is displayed e Bit selection in text and graphic lists is enabled and no bit is set or if a bit with the smallest value is set then no graphic is configured Click on an entry in the Default column of the List entries table to display a default value You can also enter Default as Value or activate the Default check box at the General category in the Settings area of the property view Least significant bit set 76 If Bit selection in text and graphic lists is activated the displayed graphic is that which was configured for the set bit with the smallest value Table 2 6 Example Significance 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bits set 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 Configured Text 3 Text 2 Text 1 The set bit with the least significance is 2 Text 1 is displ
311. ines listed in the table are repeated for all the objects contained in the project report Two formats are available for the output In Compact format the data are output in a five column table In Compact format the five most important attributes of an object are output The five attributes to be output are preset in the system The selection of these attributes cannot be modified In Complete format the data are output in two columns In Complete format all the attributes of an object are output in the report The output format is selected in the Print project documentation dialog box Select the Compact or Complete format on the Contents tab in the Documentation of the properties area WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO 345 Project documentation 14 2 Using layouts 14 2 Using layouts 14 2 1 Using layouts Introduction The Print project documentation dialog box is used to edit the layouts This dialog box is used to create new layouts and to duplicate and or delete existing layouts Overview WinCC flexible provides a ready made layout as the basis for a project report The ready made layout with its settings is always used if you use the al command button to create a new layout WinCC flexible generates the standard layout from the ready made layout The layout is used for the output of project reports using the Print Selection function The
312. ing a USB host to host cable e You have already installed the drivers from the WinCC flexible CD 2 e The HMI device being used is based on Windows CE and has a USB interface You will find an overview of the Windows CE based HMI devices under the chapter Device based dependency of interface If all the conditions have been fulfilled then the configuration computer can be linked with the HMI device and the data transfer can start WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO 391 Transfer 19 1 Basics 19 1 4 Introduction Back transfer of projects When transferring you can transfer the compressed source data file along with the compiled project file to the HMI device This source data file is required for the project to be back transferred from the HMI device to a configuration computer The upload of integrated projects is not supported Use for back transfer Advantage Normally only the executable project is transferred to the HMI device during a transfer operation The original project data remain on the configuration device and are thus available to develop the project further in future or for error analysis However on Windows CE devices with an external storage medium and on PCs you can store not only the compiled project file but also the compressed source data file for the project This data file can be used at a later time to recover the project from the HMI devi
313. ing process screen by means of the screen list Enter HmiRuntime Screens in the Script editor and then call up the object list with lt Alt Right gt All existing process screens in the project are listed for you in the object list Select the desired process screen and take on the selection with lt Return gt WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O System functions and runtime scripting Drag and drop Help functions 12 3 Elements and basic settings If a tag is required in the script it can be pulled from the object window C Start Screen so Average Se ReadTagValue Sub SyntaxHighlightingf AverageResult 1i This is a comment 2 Dim objScreen HmiRuntime Screens Screen 1 3 Dim objTag 4 ActivateScreer oe creen 1mo 5 AverageResult lt No address gt z Mixer_Rotation DB 1 DBW 0 tz Yalue_O1 lt No address gt z2 Yalue_02 lt No address gt During programming you will be shown automatically short descriptions of the necessary parameters for the methods and system functions In addition the following help functions are available in the script editor e Tooltip Unknown or incorrectly written keywords will be underlined with a wavy line When you move the mouse over a keyword Tooltip appears Sub SyntaxHighlightinaf 1 This is a comment 2 Dim objScreen HmiRuntime Screens Screen 1 3 Dim objTag SmartTags Mi
314. ing scripts e References to objects e g process screens connections and logs An object reference is delivered as parameter in quotation marks ActivateScreen MainScreen 0 Particularities when calling up scripts When calling up a script parameters are delivered as Call by Reference When you pass a tag as a parameter for example the value assignments in the script have an immediate effect on the value of the tag Operator device dependency in the script The code of the script is dependent on the selected operator device If system functions are used in the script that are not supported by the selected operator device an error message is received in the output window 12 4 3 Access to objects Introduction The objects of the runtime object model with the accompanying properties and methods are available to you in the script The object properties can be read and changed in runtime Referencing objects In the script reference objects by means of the accompanying list To identify the object use its name or the position number within the list The first object in the screen MainScreen is referenced with the following statement VBS Example 01 Dim objObject Change to Screen MainScreen HMIRuntime BaseScreenName MainScreen Set objObject HMTRuntime Screens 1 ScreenItems 1 An object is referenced by means of its name and an object property is changed with the following statement In order
315. ion The following calculation of memory requirements of recipes is only valid for Windows CE devices WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 425 Appendix 21 2 Performance features Calculation of memory requirements The memory space required by each recipe in KB is derived from the sum of D1 D2 D3 Valid is e D1 number of entries x 9 M 4 1024 Applies to M M Accumulated length of all variable names Sum of characters in all tags used in the entries e D2 number of data records x 12 4 1024 e D3 number of data records x data record length N 4 1024 Applies to N Data record name lt 13 characters N 12 Data record name gt 12 characters N 40 D1 D2 and D3 are rounded to the next higher number Memory requirements for using arrays The memory required by each recipe in KB is derived from the sum of D1 D2 D3 Valid is e D1 number of entries x 9 M 4 1024 Each element of the tag array used counts as a single entry Applies to M M length of the array tag name K x number of array elements Applies to K K 3 2 to 9 elements in the array K 4 10 to 99 elements in the array K 5 100 to 999 elements in the array K 6 1000 to 9999 elements in the array K 7 10000 to 12000 elements in the array e D2 number of data records x 12 4 1024 e D3 number of data records x data record length N 4 102
316. ion on the HMI device If the system finds different versions the transfer is aborted and a message is displayed You have following possibilities if the version of the operating system in the WinCC flexible project and on the HMI device are different e Update the operating system on the HMI device You can find further information in chapter Operating System Transfer Transfer settings You can enter transfer settings individually for each HMI device of your project The transfer settings include communication settings and the HMI device selection for the transfer operation The Transfer settings dialog allows you to enter only those settings that are actually available for the selected HMI device Selecting the HMI device for the transfer operation 388 When a transfer operation is performed the compiled project file is transferred to all HMI devices of the project for which the respective check box is selected in the transfer settings on the configuration computer The relevant check box must be selected in the transfer settings on the configuration computer even if you use the context menu of the HMI device to start the transfer operation for this particular HMI device only WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Transfer Transfer modes 19 1 Basics Depending on the HMI device you can use one or more of the following transfer modes Direct connection USB ca
317. ions or scripts to an event For example you link the SendEMail system function to the Runtime stop event so that an e mail is always sent to a particular recipient at the end of operation A task therefore exists When the event occurs the linked function is called An e mail is sent when runtime ends Application example The scheduler is used to execute event controlled jobs automatically For example you use a job to automate the following e Regular swap out of log data e Printout of an alarm report when an alarm buffer overflow occurs e Printout of a report at shift end WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO 363 Planning jobs 16 2 Working with jobs and events 16 2 Working with jobs and events Introduction A job consists of a triggering event and a function list SCHEDULER yy Perform every day at 12 00 PM til gt EE Function list 1 on OoOO O o Event Dally gt Log type Data log Log DataLogDailyEvents Perform every day lt No function gt at 12 00 PM Timer lt Undefined gt gt Comment Definition The scheduler differentiates between time based events and system events A time based event occurs at a particular time for example Starting daily at 12 00 Examples of system events are Runtime stop and Change user The event occurs either cyclically for example Starting every day at 12 00 or acyclically for
318. ipboard lt Ctrl X gt Cuts an object and copies it to the clipboard lt Ctrl V gt Inserts the object stored in the clipboard lt Ctrl F gt Opens the Find and Replace dialog lt Ctri A gt Selects all objects in the active area lt ESC gt Cancels an action 58 WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O WinCC flexible Engineering System 2 7 Working with WinCC flexible 2 7 Working with WinCC flexible 2 7 1 Working with WinCC flexible Introduction WinCC flexible offers a range of scalable engineering systems which are optimally adapted to the respective configuration task or can be adapted by the user Each edition supports a wider range of HMI devices and functions whereby the Standard edition can be used to configure HMI devices from the Micro edition You can always migrate to a higher edition by means of a powerpack Functional scope of the individual editions WinCC flexible is available in the following editions WinCC flexible Advanced WinCC flexible Standard WinCC flexible Compact WinCC flexible Micro 2 7 2 Working with projects Introduction WinCC flexible is used to configure user interfaces to operate and monitor machines and plants Special editors are available for the different configuration tasks All configuration information is saved in a project WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 200
319. ipeNumber Enable edit mode V Display selection list F Display table visible items The Property View shows the properties of the selected object organized in categories The changed values take effect directly after exiting from the input field Invalid entries are highlighted with a colored background A ToolTip will appear to help you correct the entry The object property height is logically linked to a Byte variable This tag type has a range of values from 0 to 255 When you enter a value of 300 in the Height input box of the Property View the value is highlighted with a colored background when you exit the box WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 47 WinCC flexible Engineering System 2 2 WinCC flexible user interface 2 2 6 Library Introduction The Library is an element of the Toolbox view The library is your central database for storing frequently required objects You need to configure the object stored in the library once only You can then reuse it as many times as you like You can always add screen objects and thus increase programming efficiency either by multiple use or reuse of object templates Fx hk LORS Simple Objects Enhanced Objects My Controls Library Aa Button_and_switches S d Graphics 4 Bitmaps Symbols C Pipes C Pumps C Tanks Sy Valves EJ Valvel Valvel Valvel horizonta ho
320. iples Of Eqitors caiiint inaia aE Eae 184 6 22 2 Discrete alarms editor iscsi aieeaa inai aaia anaia anen 186 6 2 2 3 Analog alarms edito cise cvgccent siete a pandeenedere tee ceaeten eadeeneeee anes teebeeena pees 622 4 System alarms editorin E eea Mees Avie ahi E ELE OR eM lees 188 6 2 2 9 Alarm classes editor reiii A bandas thawucuns needs EAEE vines 6 22 6 Alarm groups ditor q 022 4 c cc ce ciecenesshenecnnetpiecancnshencesseeneeetsieennnhiecpecseniecasteaacsetwaeseeddectieedasesent 190 6 2 2 7 Basic Settings for the Alarm SyStem cccccccececeeeeceeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeseneeeeseneeeeeseneeeeseeaeeeseaeeaaeees 6 3 Working with Alarms ccccesececeeeeeceeeeseeeee eee eeaeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeseceeeeeseneeeeseneeeeeseeeeeseeesenaees 192 6 3 1 FROPOMIN GANAS scssi cave as case tendcsexatadunaesnsaddcm Sand e E a E E e TAE 192 6 3 2 Integrating alarms with the alarm numbering procedure 6 4 Alarm loggi enni EE eeevtevniawesevstees 195 6 4 1 Basic principles of alarm logging siivsssonsensauninin inna aA A a AAAA ANAA RAR 6 4 2 Alarm TOQGING sanoa a E a a AA 196 6 4 3 Alarm 0gs GitOl cccccsccccecesecccecneecereceesenceeeceeeeesnaeeceeeaeeceesanseeecneceeeennecaecteneeneedecteeseaeenies 6 4 4 Basic setings for alarm lOQS een ceknsevesapcadedaasadecaasscde agedverastedeesseavensee essere 6 4 5 Allan ity logging eenean n R EEEE ag ewan te 199 6 4 6 Displaying logged alarms ON screens 0 eeeeceeee
321. ist for discrete alarms and analog alarms e When the condition for triggering an alarm is satisfied the alarm status is Activated Once the operator has acknowledged the alarm it assumes the Activated acknowledged status e When the condition for triggering an alarm no longer applies the alarm status is Activated deactivated Once the operator has acknowledged the deactivated alarm it has Activated deactivated acknowledgea status Each occurrence of an alarm status can be displayed and logged on the HMI device as well as printed out 6 1 2 2 Acknowledging Alarms Introduction For discrete and analog alarms displaying critical or hazardous operating and process states a stipulation can be made requiring the plant operator to acknowledge the alarm Mechanisms for acknowledging alarms An alarm can be acknowledged either by the operator on the HMI device or by the control program When an alarm is acknowledged by the operator a bit can be set within a tag WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 176 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Creating an Alarm System 6 7 Basics The following options are useful for acknowledgment by the operator e Acknowledgement key lt ACK gt only available on certain HMI devices e Function keys softkeys or buttons in screens In addition alarms can be acknowledged through system functions in function lists or scripts Alarms requiring acknowledgment The alarm clas
322. ith a line WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 386 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Transfer 1 19 1 Basics 19 1 1 Basic Principles of the Transfer Operation Transfer Basic procedure A transfer operation refers to the transfer of a complete project file to the HMI devices where the project is to run After you have completed a configuration process check the consistency of the project by using the menu Project gt Compiler gt Check Consistency After completing the consistency check the system generates a compiled project file This project file has the same name assigned to it as the project however with the extension fwx Transfer the compiled project file to the configured HMI devices Note Because of the diagnostics messages the fwx file can be fairly large If the size of the fwx file is preventing you from transferring this file to the HMI device you should disable the diagnostics messages in the alarm settings The HMI devices must be connected to the configuration computer to transfer the project data If the HMI device is a PC it is also possible to perform the transfer operation using data media such as diskettes Compile the project again if the pwx is not found and you receive an error message while transferring the data 1 Enter the transfer settings for the individual HMI devices in your WinCC flexible project 2 Enter the transfer mode on the HMI device where
323. ith a table editor are displayed as symbols in the SIMATIC Manager Opening such symbols via the SIMATIC Manager causes WinCC flexible to open for editing the data For example if you select the Tag element a symbol for all WinCC flexible tags will be displayed in the work area of the SIMATIC Manager The individual WinCC flexible tags are not displayed in the SIMATIC Manager If you create a new tag in the SIMATIC Manager it will be created in WinCC flexible and opened for editing in WinCC flexible For more information about STEP 7 consult the SIMATIC Manager documentation Changing the names of STEP 7 data blocks If you change the name of a STEP 7 data block it can happen that the old name is displayed in the object list of WinCC flexible To make sure that the changed name of the STEP 7 data block is displayed in the object list open the list again in the WinCC flexible project integrated into STEP 7 Renaming a WinCC flexible project The renaming of an integrated WinCC flexible project in SIMATIC Manager is only of temporary nature After having opened and renamed the project in WinCC flexible you changes will be lost if do not save the project before you close it again 20 1 8 Converting an integrated project 20 1 8 1 Conversion of integrated WinCC flexible projects in STEP 7 Introduction A WinCC flexible project integrated in STEP 7 can be saved in a different product version of WinCC flexible When saving a project in a
324. iting possibilities Contents Is used to select the data for the output Cover sheet Is used to enter the contents for the cover sheet header and footer Style of cover Is used to configure the style page Page setup Is used to configure the paper format the page orientation the page margins and the height of the header and footer WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 348 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 Project documentation 14 3 Creating a project report 14 3 Creating a project report 14 3 1 Selecting the data for a project report Introduction The selection of the data depends on the selected output format in the layout used Five attributes each specified by the system are output in the project report for each object in the Compact output format All the attributes of the configured objects of a WinCC flexible component are output in the Compact or Complete output format Overview Select the WinCC flexible components for the output on the Contents tab in the Print project documentation dialog box Select the output format Compact or Complete in the Documentation of the properties area In the WinCC flexible components Screens and Reports you can limit the output of the data The following options are available e Only graphics e Only properties e Graphics and properties Further selection options in the Screens area e Graphics with overview outputs the
325. itional support Representatives and offices If you have questions concerning the use of the described product which are not answered in this manual please contact the Siemens representative in your area Find your contact partner at http www siemens com automation partner A guide to the technical documentation for the various SIMATIC products and systems is available at http www siemens com simatic tech doku portal The online catalog and the online ordering system is available at http mall automation siemens com WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Preface Training center To familiarize you with automation systems we offer a variety of courses Please contact your regional training center or the central training center in D 90327 Nuremberg Germany Phone 49 911 895 3200 Internet http www sitrain com Technical support You can reach the technical support for all A amp D products via the support request form on the web xipiliwww sieriens com automation suppor request Phone 49 180 5050 222 Fax 49 180 5050 223 Additional information about our technical support is available in the Internet at http www siemens com automation service Service amp support on the Internet In addition to our documentation we offer our complete knowledge base on the Internet at http www siemens com automation servi
326. layouts for the project reports are stored centrally in WinCC flexible and are therefore available in all projects for all users Configure the common properties of a layout for a WinCC flexible project e g author company name project name header footer display used and the settings for the output Duplicate this template several times and specify different configuration data for the output in each of these templates For example create a separate project report for each WinCC flexible component A predefined style is available in order to lay out a project report The style can be modified as required The style is not saved with the individual layouts A change in the style therefore affects all the existing layouts Commands for layout editing The following commands are available in the Print project documentation dialog box to edit the layouts Button Pop up menu command Hotkeys New lt CTRL SHIFT N gt Duplicatin lt CTRL SHIFT D gt p g Delete lt DEL gt X Rename F2 WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 346 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Project documentation 14 2 Using layouts Button Pop up menu command Hotkeys Print lt CTRL SHIFT P gt Preview lt CTRL SHIFT V gt Export lt CTRL SHIFT E gt 14 2 2 Editing a layout for the project documentation Introduction A layout is opened by using the Print project documentation dialog box
327. le 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 128 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Working with Tags 4 3 7 Introduction Principle 4 3 Working with Tags Data logging In runtime tag values can be stored in logs for later evaluation For the logging of a tag you must specify the log in which the values are to be stored how often this should happen and whether only the tag values in a specific value range are to be saved Note The main purpose of data logging is to log the values of external tags However you can also log the values of internal tags Several steps are involved in data logging e Creating and configuring data logs When creating a data log you must define the following General settings e g name size storage location Behavior at runtime start Behavior when the log is full Configuring the logging of tags You can specify a data log for every tag This log records the values of the tags in runtime and other information e g the time the value was logged Furthermore you can define when and how often the value of the tag should be logged To perform the latter you have the following options On request The tag values are logged by calling the LogTag system function On change The tag values are logged as soon as the operator device detects a change of value in the tag Cyclic continuous The tag values are logged at regular intervals In addition
328. le 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO 215 Structure of a recipe management system 8 1 Basics 8 1 4 Display of recipes Introduction Recipes can be displayed in the following ways e Recipe view e Recipe screen Input in the recipe view and recipe screen You can change the values of a recipe in the recipe screen or recipe view and thus modify the manufacturing process or a machine The recipe view and recipe screen can perform the same functions when using recipes They differ in the following respects e Display options e Operation e Possibility of transferring data between the PLC and the HMI device Recipe view The recipe view is suitable for viewing simple recipes The recipe view is an off the shelf WinCC flexible screen object for managing recipe data records The recipe view is always part of a process picture The recipe view shows recipe data records in tabular form The display and possible operations are adapted to individual needs If you are editing recipes with a recipe view in your project the values are saved in recipe data records The values are not transferred between the HMI device and PLC until you use the relevant operating element Recipe screen The recipe screen is an individual plant display that contains e Input fields for recipe variables e Control objects for using the recipes e g SaveDataRecord The recipe screen is suitable in the following si
329. le the Synchronize tags function in the recipe properties in order to be able to enter recipe data record values in the configured IO fields outside the recipe view The following picture shows the settings in WinCC flexible 2007 A x m General gt Properties OF ns m Data Medium Settings Options V Synchronize tags m Transfer m Infotext l Tags offline You must synchronize the tags in order to synchronize data between the tags of the recipe screen and the recipe data records displayed in the recipe view Synchronization of tags is only possible in the enhanced recipe view Tags offline If the entered values are to be transferred immediately to the connected PLC during runtime you must disable Tags offline in the property view Configure the SetRecipeTags system function if you want to enable and disable immediate transfer of entered values during runtime System functions The following system functions are available for operator control of a recipe screen e ImportDataRecords e ExportDataRecords e LoadDataRecord e SaveDataRecord e SetDataRecordTagsToPLC e GetDataRecordTagsFromPLC WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 238 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Structure of a recipe management system 8 3 6 Application Operation 8 3 Viewing and editing recipes in Runtime The following system functions are available for operator control of the recipe view when it is being used in th
330. least one system function or a script has not been supplied completely with parameters e Yellow Function list is performed in runtime However the function list contains at least one system function or script which is not supported by the HMI device e g due to the change of device type Completion of system functions and scripts System functions and scripts in a function list are processed in runtime sequentially from top to bottom In order to avoid waiting times system functions with a longer running time for instance file operations are processed simultaneously For instance a subsequent system function can already be performed even though the previous system function has not yet been completed To avoid programming sequential and conditional procedures use a script with loops conditional statements and cancellation requirements WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 302 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO System functions and runtime scripting 12 3 Elements and basic settings 12 3 Elements and basic settings 12 3 1 Script editor Introduction Create and edit scripts in the script editor Open The Script editor opens automatically if a new script is created or an existing script opened Layout Be wink uree NOM tones es tex h r OCB Skript Assistent zies xia Menu bar The menu bar contains all commands required for operating WinCC flexible Any available shortcut keys
331. lexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 284 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO User administration 11 3 Elements and basic settings 11 3 4 User groups work area Introduction The Groups work area shows a table of the user groups and their authorizations You administer the user groups and assign authorizations to them Principle The work area consists of the Groups and Group Authorizations tables dministrators Group 9 9 Administrators have Administrat 0 D I W Users Group 1 1 Users have limited ac Monitor Operate The Groups table shows the existing user groups When you select a user group in this table the Group Authorizations table shows the authorizations which were assigned to the user group The number of the user group and of the authorization is assigned by the user administration The designations and descriptions are assigned by you WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 285 User administration 11 3 Elements and basic settings 11 3 5 Introduction Open Structure Work area 286 Runtime security settings The Runtime security settings editor is used to configure security settings for the user passwords in runtime In the project view double click on Runtime security settings in the Runtime user administration group IE WinCC flexible Advanced Projekt hmi Ansicht Einf gen Format i I D
332. lexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 367 Planning jobs 16 3 Elements WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 368 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Managing project versions 1 A 17 1 Applications for project versioning Principle A project version is a copy of a project that is saved at a defined storage location by version management Each project version always represents a specific project status You can go back to an older version or compare versions with one another Application example You can use project versions in the following situations 1 To log accepted reference versions You can revert to an older version if necessary 2 To improve an older project version For example a customer may wish to correct an error in an older project version which is already being used in runtime However the project has been further developed in the meantime The error is corrected in the older project version The current project version remains unaffected at this time 3 Assigning versions to different project states on different HMI devices When an HMI device fails you can always transfer the suitable project version to it 4 Versioning alternative or experimental project configurations separately Test versions various device and plant types or special models of a machine 5 Backing up data to a different medium Loss of data e g due to defective ma
333. lexible controls communication between the HMI and the PLC by means of tags and area pointers WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 203 Working with a connection 7 1 Basics Communication using tags In WinCC flexible tags are centrally managed in the Tag editor There are external and internal tags External tags are used for communication and represent the image of defined memory locations on the PLC The HMI and the PLC both have read and write access to this storage location Those read and write operations may cyclic or event triggered In your configuration create tags that point to specific PLC addresses The HMI reads the value from the defined address and then displays it The operator may also enter values on the HMI device which will be written to the relevant PLC address Communication using area pointers Area pointers are used to exchange data of specific user data areas Area pointers are parameter fields WinCC flexible receives from these parameter fields in runtime the information about the location and size of data areas in the PLC During communication the PLC and the HMI device alternately access those data areas for read and write operations Based on the evaluation of data stored in the data areas the PLC and HMI device trigger defined actions WinCC flexible uses the following area pointers e Control request e Project ID e Screen number e Data
334. lical trigger for tag logging se Trends Number of trends pe aa WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 429 Appendix 21 2 Performance features Text lists and graphic lists Number of graphic lists Number of text lists Total number of lists Number of entries per text or graphic list Number of graphic objects Number of text elements Scripts Number of scripts Communication Number of connections Number of connections based on the SIMATIC HMI http Protocol Maximum number of connected Sm prtClients including a service client Help system Number of characters in a help text Languages Number of runtime languages Scheduler Tasks User Administration User groups Authorizations Passwords Project Size of the project file fwx Table 21 2 Tags Number of tags in the project Mobile Panels Number of power tags Number of elements per array Number of local tags 430 Mobile Panel 170 1000 1000 500 OP 73micro 150 150 30 250 1000 320 128 KB Mobile Panel 177 1000 1000 500 TP 170micro 500 500 1 5 2 256 KB Mobile Panel Mobile Panel 277 277 IWLAN 2048 2048 1000 1000 1000 1000 TP 177micro 100 150 150 30 500 500 320 256 KB Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN 2048 1000 1000 WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6
335. ll new HMI devices using the Hardware Support Package Note Replacing the type of HMI device e After changing the HMI device type all configured data are still contained in the project file In the Engineering System only the functions are still available and only the configuration data that are supported by the current HMI device are displayed This involves for example logs recipes available objects in screens available system functions and available communication protocols e f you change the HMI device type in a WinCC flexible project and later change it back again a warning can be output that the height or the width of a display object is 0 This behavior results if the height or width of an object is set to 0 when you change to an HMI device with a smaller display When you later change to an HMI device with a larger display the value 0 can no longer be converted to a meaningful size Correct the object size manually Functions dependent on the HMI device Apart from changing the functional scope when switching from one HMI device type to another the following features must also be considered e Colors supported When switching from an HMI device with color display to another with a smaller color range the color is changed automatically If you change the colors yourself for an HMI device with a smaller color range and you change back to an HMI device with a larger color range the reduced color range is retained
336. log is added as the last entry Project Saved The change log is then deleted in WinCC flexible A new change log is created with the new project version ESR M Change log for version was deleted Beginning of change log for version 4 mR Deleted Kalliope if ange log B Initialized Kalliope ange log Opening an older project version The change log is opened along with the project when an older project version is opened Project versions E changed KALLIOPE 0 5 43 PM la Version restored KALLIOPE 003 4 01 PM Older version of project 1 was opened B Initialized KALLIOPE lt UU 13 4 01 PM Beginning of change log for version 2 v Iil All changes to the project version are recorded as long as the change log is enabled WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO 383 Logging changes 18 5 Elements 18 5 Elements 18 5 1 Change log editor Introduction The change log displays configuration changes made in your project You can see who changed which objects and object properties when changes were made and the corresponding comments Open You open the change log in the project view by double clicking on Version management Change log Note To open the change log of an older project version first open the required project version in version management Layout Bi wens wre NEO imene Property view Object view a
337. m name WinCC flexible 2004 SP1 n_OPC Siemens Xml Win CC Flexible RT lt gt tag name 1_OPC Siemens XML for example Win CC Flexible RT lt gt S7_Bool_Tag_out for example As of WinCC flexible 2005 OPC Siemens XML Prefix Win CC Flexible RT lt gt tag name 1 Win CC Flexible RT lt gt S7_Bool_Tag_out for example User password The option of configuring user passwords with special characters is supported in WinCC flexible 2007 or higher Passwords which contain special characters are not supported in previous versions of WinCC flexible A password which contains special characters is reset to the default value 100 if you convert a project of WinCC flexible 2007 or higher into a previous version Define a new password without special characters after having completed this conversion Functional differences When you save a WinCC flexible project in an earlier version and transfer it to an HMI device on the basis of the earlier version certain fixes and enhancements of functionality may cause functional differences WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 101 Working with projects 3 5 Converting projects 3 5 3 Introduction Differentiation of HMI device versions Due to functional extensions a number of different HMI device versions are available for the different versions of WinCC flexible When you convert a WinCC flexible project to a different version the ap
338. m settings The existing connections are displayed in the Alarm Procedures area Message Procedures Verbindung_2 On OFf Alarm text and number OFF rbindung_2 Alarm text and number OFF Verbindung_1 7 all display class Alarm text and number Off 1 f Alarm text and number Off 169e22 FOF3 4e f we v2 v v5 v6 v9 v 10 vis i 14 In the row of the required connection select the field in the ALARM_S Display Classes column and open the selection dialog by pressing the selection button Select the display class you want Close the selection dialog by pressing the A button In the SFM Alarms column of a link specify whether system errors should be displayed For more information consult the STEP 7 documentation Maximum number of ALARM_S alarms The maximum number of ALARM_S alarms in WinCC flexible is 32767 In practice the maximum number of configurable alarms is limited by the memory available on the HMI device Alarm class layout The ALARM_S and ALARM_D alarms are assigned to particular alarm classes in STEP 7 To edit the display options for these alarm classes select Alarms gt Settings gt Alarm Classes in the WinCC flexible project window Open the shortcut menu and select the Open Editor command You can recognize alarm classes by the S7 prefix in the alarm class name WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 421
339. matically 1 4 5 Intelligent tools 1 4 5 1 Bulk data processing Introduction Bulk data management provides support in the simultaneous creation and editing of several objects Configuration is more efficient saving time and costs Example A part of the tag inventory is assumed from an old project but the inventory has the wrong tag type Using WinCC flexible the tag type can be modified for all tags in one working step Principle The advantages of bulk data processing can be used when creating and editing specific objects e g tags e Automatic address assignment If several tags created with process linking are stored successively in the controller memory the address area can be increased automatically for each tag e Multiple modification Identical modifications for several tags can be executed in one step e g changing the tag type or the controller WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 36 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Introduction to WinCC flexible 7 4 Configuration concepts 1 4 5 2 Configuring movement paths Introduction Process sequences involving object movement can be clearly displayed on the HMI device e g the transport of a product on a conveyor belt Movement paths simplify the configuration of movements of objects in the process screen The movement process is represented on the screen by a diagram Principle The movement path for an object is defined in the process scr
340. mbol Short description Availability e Creating a project version e Opening an older project version A project version is selected e Delete project version A project version is selected WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 375 Managing project versions 17 5 Elements 17 5 3 Version Management Work Area Introduction Layout 376 The work area shows a table of the project versions that you have created from the current project You can create new project versions open older ones and compare two project versions Note The work area always displays all versions of the project even when you open an older project version lt Empty label gt lt Empty comment gt lt Empty label gt lt Empty comment gt lt Empty label gt lt Empty label gt lt Empty comment gt lt Empty comment gt lt Empty label gt lt Empty comment gt The work area contains the Tree view of the project versions The work area displays the trunk of the project versions as the top most level A project version marked with the symbol represents the beginning of a branch You can open the view of a branch similar to a folder in the Windows Explorer The F icon always shows you the project version on which the current project is based This project version is the current version The Author Date Time Version and Status informatio
341. me than system functions which for example set a tag value Therefore system functions with longer runtimes are performed asynchronously While a system function writes to a storage medium e g a recipe record the next system function is already being performed Due to the parallel completion of system functions waiting periods at the HMI device are avoided Processing of scripts in runtime Only one script at a time can be performed in runtime If several scripts are waiting to be edited the scripts are lined up in a queue and completed one after another Note A loop in a script therefore blocks the execution of other scripts in the queue even if the scripts are triggered asynchronously WinCC flexible supports a maximum nesting depth of eight scripts Please note that the nesting depth is not checked WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO System functions and runtime scripting 12 6 Runtime behavior of functions in runtime Note If a script is configured for the Runtime Stopp event only those functions may be used in the script which are specified as configurable objects in the reference of the Runtime Stopp system function Ensure that the ending of the runtime is not interfered with by the execution of the script Note Configuring scripts During configuration make sure that not too many scripts are activated at the same time Furthermore gen
342. mmand is used to print the cross reference list WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 109 Working with projects 3 8 Overview of rewire 3 8 Overview of rewire Introduction You can change the tag attachment of objects You use the Rewire wizard to assign new tags to for example I O fields of screens The Rewire wizard searches for tags to rewire at the following places e Inthe selected object in the Project view e In the selected object in the working area Ht Rewiring wizard rd I gt Tag_105 Replace gt Tag_106 In folder Tag_107 a Info Tag_104 DB 1 DBW 105 Tag_10S DB 1 DBW 107 cage gt Tag_110 Tag_106 DB 110 DBW 103 Tag_107 DB 110 DBW 105 Tag_108 DB 111 DBW 107 O Keep changes veneer lt lt lt New J O Match case tow O Whole word only Use wildcards Hian a A a EN fm fin Gn fn B gt E Next gt Finish Cancel The tag s used and or found in IO Field_1 may be rewired You have the following possibilities of rewiring e Individually via the Rewire column e Using the Find and Replace fields 3 9 Internal project find and replace feature Principle WinCC flexible enables character strings and objects to be found and replaced e You can find and replace character strings in the workplace Use the Find in workplace dialog and Replace in workplace dialog in t
343. mn header You can show and hide the table columns To do this you activate or deactivate the entries in the pop up menu of the table header Properties view Configure the structure elements in the Properties view The Properties view offers the same information and settings as the work area table WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 138 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Working with Tags 4 7 Working with structures 4 7 3 Managing structures Renaming structures 1 Under Structures In the project view select the structure that you wish to rename 2 Select Rename from the shortcut menu 3 Type in anew name 4 Press lt Enter gt As an option use the lt F2 gt function key to rename the structure Copying and inserting structures 1 Under Structures In the project view select the structure you wish to copy 2 Click the Copy icon on the toolbar 3 Click the Paste icon on the toolbar As an option use the Copy and Paste commands of the Edit menu or of the shortcut menu These functions are also available by means of the lt CTRL C gt and lt CTRL V gt keystrokes A copy of the original structure is generated in the project view and inserted in the work area The name of the structure is provided with a consecutive number Deleting structures When deleting a structure the structure elements contained within it are also deleted 1 Under Structures In the project view select
344. mpared to the transfer of a basic data type This may cause communication overload and disruption as a result Example e An array tag which consists of 100 array elements of data type Real was configured e fan array element with a length of four bytes changes 100 x 4 bytes are written to the PLC Use in scripts For the same reasons of performance you should always use internal temporary arrays to change arrays 1 Copy the PLC array to the internal array at the start of the script 2 Load on data transfer to the PLC is avoided while the script processes the internal array CAUTION Data inconsistency at array tags The entire array is read at the time t1 if an array element changes The modified array element is replaced in the array Thew array is written back to the PLC at the time t3 gt t1 If the array has changed again within the time t2 the changed value t2 is overwritten with time value t1 at the time t3 Array data is therefore inconsistent at the time t3 You should always prevent the HMI device and the PLC from concurrently writing values to the same array tag Use synchronous transfer of recipe data records to synchronize an array tag with the PLC WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO 133 Working with Tags 4 5 Examples of arrays 4 5 Examples of arrays Introduction Array tags group multiple tags to form a data struc
345. ms Immediately You can enable or deactivate the printing of alarms for the entire project in the basic settings for the alarm system In addition printing of each individual alarm can be enabled Logging of alarms Alarm classes are used to configure assignment of alarms to an alarm log An alarm log can be specified for each alarm class All events related to the alarms of this alarm class are logged in the specified alarm log Reporting of alarms The properties of the Print alarm object are used to configure the assignment of alarms to a report In addition to the data source alarm buffer or alarm log filtering is also possible on the basis of alarm classes 6 1 4 4 System Functions for Alarm Editing System functions System functions are predefined functions you can use to implement many tasks during runtime even without having any programming knowledge You can use system functions in a function list or in a script The table shows all of the system functions available for editing alarms and manipulating their display System function Effect EditAlarm Triggers the Edit event for all selected alarms ClearAlarmBuffer Deletes alarms from the alarm buffer on the HMI device ClearAlarmBufferProtoolLegacy Function like ClearAlarmBuffer This system function has been retained to ensure compatibility and used the old ProTool numbering AlarmViewEditAlarm Triggers the event Edit for all alarms selected in the
346. n 404 Cross reference list Editor Working with 109 csv file Example 200 258 D Data Global project HMI device specific Data backup HMI device 394 Data exchange 209 Data Flow Data log WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 Basic settings Editor 253 Output of the tag value Tags 129 256 Data log editor 2 Data logging 249 Acquisition cycle Application 249 Logging cycle 249 Memory medium 250 Data mailbox For recipes 224 Data record list 232 Data record name 228 Data record number 228 Data selection For project report Data type External tag 126 Internal tag 119 Date time field 156 269 Debugger Error types Default propert Changing 265 Default value Defining a display class for ALARM_S alarms 192 194 421 422 For ALARM_S alarms 192 421 Deleting Temporary file Delta download 390 Design Protocol Device replacement Device inoperable in runtime 85 DP configuration Device based dependency 60 83 84 of screens Principle 60 Discrete alarm procedure 176 Discrete alarms Discrete alarms editor 186 Discrete alarms editor Dispatching Alarms Automatic 31 via e mail 31 Distributed HMI devices Windows 54 Documentation in WinCC flexible Drag and drop 56 3 443 Index Dynamic control Faceplate instance Object included in the faceplate 173 Dynamic operation Dynamization Faceplate
347. n a project for instance e Configuring an advanced functions list You use a script just like a function list by calling up system functions and other scripts in the script You can execute system functions and scripts in the script dependent on conditions or have them repeated You then add the script to a functions list e Programming new functions Scripts are available in the entire project You use scripts just as you would system functions You can define delivery parameters and return values for these scripts You use scripts e g to convert values WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 300 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO System functions and runtime scripting 12 2 Working with function lists 12 2 Working with function lists 12 2 1 Basic principles of the functions list Introduction When the configured event occurs several system functions and scripts can be performed with the function list Principle The function list is configured for an event of an object e g a screen object or a tag The events which are available depend on the selected object and the HMI device bf IAD AT HD PO AS DAO AIR III DAT ADELPHI APE PPR PPL PDT Al maa E AAE E E NE ANAA eRe RENN RE HENNE MONE a Ree Fee 0000000 Fe Recipehame Mo A Live Concentrate 00000000 J p Kilo Suaa 00000000 Datarecordname No A ish Function list D gt Properties ee gt Animations 1 EjLoadDataRec
348. n is assigned by the version management You can enter the comment and the description The information is saved at the storage location of the project versions When you change the comment or the name the information is immediately updated WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Managing project versions 17 5 Elements 17 5 4 Property view Introduction The Property view shows the Name and the comment of the selected project version in the General group The Properties group shows the current and the next version of the project under Project versions F x eral gt coment General Settings Label lt Empty label gt Comment lt Empty comment gt P Label The name can be used to identify different project versions over many projects for example Release 01 15 2001 If you use the same name for a project version in a different project you make it clear that these two project versions belong together both sharing a common status of Release 01 15 2001 Current version and next version The information listed under Current version number and Next version number relate to the current project Current version number shows the version number of the project version on which the current project is based Next version number displays the version number that will be assigned to the next version when you create a new project version WinCC flexible
349. n the Runtime settings area of the device settings in order to visualize only the text that is assigned to the least significant bit For reasons of downward compatibility the setting is disabled as standard The setting applies to all text lists of the HMI device WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O WinCC flexible Engineering System 2 7 Working with WinCC flexible 2 7 11 Graphic list Introduction In a graphic list the values of a tag are assigned to various screens or graphics The graphic lists are created in the Graphic lists editor The attachment of the graphic list to a tag is configured on the used object for example on a symbolic IO field These are the following application areas for the graphic list e For configuring a selection list with symbolic IO field e For configuring a status dependent button label e For configuring the graphic output of the value of a discrete or analog alarm e For the configuration of a graphic output for the value of recipe data record The graphics in a graphic list can be configured as multilingual In runtime the graphics are displayed in the set runtime language Configure graphic list Open the Graphic lists editor by double clicking on the entry Graphic lists in the project view By double clicking on the first empty line in the editor a new graphic list is created GRAPHICS LISIS Click the column Selection a
350. n the procedure used during configuration and in transferring a project to an HMI device The manual is intended for newcomers operators and configuration engineers involved in configuration commissioning installation and service with WinCC flexible The help integrated in WinCC flexible the WinCC flexible Information System contains detailed information The information system contains instructions examples and reference information in electronic form Basic Knowledge Requirements General knowledge in the field of automation engineering is required to understand this manual You should also have experience of using PCs running under the Windows 2000 or Windows XP operating systems A knowledge of VBA or VBS is required for advanced configuration by using scripts Scope of the manual This manual is valid for the WinCC flexible 2007 software package Position in the information scheme This manual is part of the SIMATIC HMI documentation The information below presents an overview of the information landscape of SIMATIC HMI User manual e WinCC flexible Micro describes the engineering basics based on the WinCC flexible Micro engineering system ES e WinCC flexible Compact Standard Advanced describes the engineering basics based on the WinCC flexible Compact WinCC flexible Standard and WinCC flexible Advanced engineering systems ES e WinCC flexible Runtime Describes how to commission and operate your
351. n the property view Example Properties of recipe entry qx m General Val gt Properties Base ues Base Values Settings m Inf a Tag a Text list lt undefined gt gt Default value 0 Shift decimal point 0 a Example Properties of recipe data record Q x gt EEE General gt Properties Settings Name Juice Display name puice Number 3 2 Properties of the recipe In order to modify recipe settings click on the Recipe name or Recipe number field in the Recipes editor The following settings can be modified in the property view For example you define where the file containing the recipe data records will be saved under Data medium in the Properties group The selection capabilities are dependent on the operator panel used Select the recipe memory or an external storage medium on the HMI device as the storage location depending on how the HMI device is configured When using WinCC flexible Runtime as an operator panel save the file on the hard disk drive of the computer Enter the path directly or navigate to the directory for the data medium using the dialog WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 229 Structure of a recipe management system 8 2 Elements and basic settings Data Medium gt Properties gt Settings m Options i i z oe Storage location File m Infotext Path C Recipes a In
352. n via uniform and manufacturer independent interface WinCC flexible provides a uniform and manufacturer independent software interface using OPC OLE for Process Control This interface allows a standardized data exchange between applications for industry office and production For detailed information refer to the OPC documentation WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO 205 Working with a connection 7 2 Elements and basic settings 7 2 7 2 1 Introduction Open Structure Menu bar 206 Elements and basic settings Connections Editor In the Connections editor you create and configure connections Select Connections from the project view and then open the shortcut menu Select New connection from in this shortcut menu The new connection will be created and opened in the work area BY ws wwe NUM denes Aee hwi J The menu bar contains all commands required for operating WinCC flexible Available key combinations are indicated next to the menu command WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 Working with a connection Toolbars Work area Parameters tab 7 2 Elements and basic settings The toolbars contain the most frequently used buttons Select View gt Toolbars to show or hide the specific toolbars The H button of a toolbar can be used to show or hide spe
353. names in STEP 7 objects 13 4 3 Translating project texts in the editor Introduction As a general rule if you are creating a project for multiple languages all texts are configured initially in a language you are familiar with You use this language as the reference language for translation Define the project languages in the Project languages editor Select the reference language and the respective editing language to which it should be translated from the project languages Editors with language dependent objects The following editors contain language dependent objects e Screens e Protocols e Analog alarms e Discrete alarms e System alarms e Recipes e Text lists e Graphics lists Switching the editing language in the WinCC flexible editors You can switch the editing language by means of the Localize toolbar The editing language applies to all editors Reference texts As a general rule if you are creating a project for multiple languages all texts are configured initially in a language known to you This language then serves as the reference language If you then switch the editing language to enter texts in another language all of the text fields are empty WinCC flexible offers a convenient reference text function so that you have a template for translation You can display the reference text window containing texts in the reference language in dialogs and editors WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard
354. nction keys on the HMI device Display after import of recipe data If you open the recipe view during the import of recipe data only the recipe data that is already completely imported will be displayed The recipe view is not automatically updated with a data import In order to have a complete view of all the recipe data do not open the recipe view until the system prompts you that the recipe data has been imported successfully Alternatively update the recipe view after successful completion of the import procedure Updating tag for recipes and recipe data records 236 The current recipe data record or its number can be saved to a tag depending on the configuration The tag will be updated under the following conditions e The recipe data record has been loaded e The screen with the recipe view was not exited during the process This operation may take some time WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Structure of a recipe management system 8 3 5 Introduction Principle 8 3 Viewing and editing recipes in Runtime Recipe screen The recipe screen is a process picture It contains an individual input screen for the recipes The input screen contains IO fields and other screen objects The recipe functionality is implemented with system functions e g for saving recipe data records The figure below shows an example of the recipe screen A w Recipe name Or
355. nctions in a script You can access the runtime objects of WinCC flexible by using the runtime object model When calling up a system function please use the English name of the system function You can use the full scale of language from Microsoft VBScript in scripts Functions and methods for user interaction are excluded for instance MsgBox If you use system functions in a script which are not available on the set operating unit you will receive a warning message In addition the respective system function in the script will be underlined with a wavy blue line Organization of scripts Scripts are stored in the project database The available scripts are listed in the project view under scripts If you want to use a script in a function list you can find the scripts in the selection list under scripts m General Be gt Properties unction list 4 Animations 1 lt No Function gt Events click Screens m Press Settings m Release 4 System m Activate L bei administration m Deactivate E ws 5 verage m Change R i Fahrenheit NsCelsius ReadTagYalue SyntaxHighlighting WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO 299 System functions and runtime scripting 12 1 Basics 12 1 5 Use of scripts Principle Scripts provide more flexibility by using control elements of a programming language Using scripts in runtime you implement individual solutions i
356. nd therefore must be identical in every language The default value is 1 s If the acquisition trigger mode of the tag is on demand the acquisition cycle is undefined Upper limit High low limit Low low limit Lower limit The limits can only be set for numeric values Only constant numeric values can be used as limits variables cannot The default value for limits is No limit The following conditions apply to limits Upper limit 2 High low limit 2 Low low limit 2 Lower limit WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 145 Working with Tags 4 8 Importing Tags List entry Linear scaling Description Specifies if linear scaling is enabled The entry can only be used for external tags Default value is Disabled The value for linear scaling can be given as numbers or text Permitted values are false or 0 for disabled true or 1 for enabled Upper PLC scaling value Lower PLC scaling value Upper HMI scaling value Lower HMI scaling value The upper and lower values can only be set for numeric values The following conditions apply to upper and lower values Upper scaling value 2 Lower scaling value Start value Specifies the start value of a tag Default values are 0 for numbers space for characters empty string for string tags current value for time and date Update ID When the value of a t
357. nd open the drop down list box WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO 73 WinCC flexible Engineering System 2 7 Working with WinCC flexible Select the corresponding field for the required graphic list The following fields are available e Range With this setting the integer or value range of a tag is assigned to the graphics from the graphic list The number of graphics may be selected freely The maximum number of entries depends on the HMI device You establish a default value that is then displayed if the value of the tags lies outside the defined area e Bit 0 1 With this setting the graphics from the graphic list are assigned to the two statuses of a binary tag You can create a text entry for every status of a binary tag e Bit number 0 31 With this entry a graphic from the graphic list is assigned to every bit of a tag The maximum number of the graphics is 32 This type of graphic list may for example be used in a sequential control when executing a sequencer wherever a bit of the used tag is allowed to be set The least significant bit set and a default value determine the behavior of the bit number 0 to 31 In the work area in the table List entries create the graphics of the graphic list Double click the first line of the table The first graphic entry is created In the column Value either set a binary value or a range value for the a
358. ndard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 297 System functions and runtime scripting 12 1 Basics Language dependency Availability The names of the system functions are dependent on the set project language The functionality can then be recognized immediately by the project planner Exception When calling up system functions in a script please use the English name for the system function You can find the English name of the system function in the system function reference In WinCC flexible you can only configure functionalities which are supported by the selected HMI device Therefore in a function list you can configure only system functions which are supported by the selected operating unit If you use a project for several operating units the system functions that are not supported by a operating unit are marked in color 12 1 3 Use of system functions Introduction Applications 298 A function list is processed when a configured event occurs in runtime The operator can trigger an event for instance by pressing a function key on the HMI device An event can also be triggered by the system for instance if a process value falls below a limit value You can configure system functions on all the objects that are able to react to an event You can use system functions directly in function lists and scripts and thereby control the course e Function List System functions are processed sequentially
359. ndard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Working with reports 10 6 Reporting recipes Formatting for the output In the property view you specify in the Properties Display category whether the data are to be output line by line or in table form In the same category select the record elements in the Visible elements area for output The following record elements can be output e Recipe number e Recipe name e Data record number e Data record name e Tag name e Tag type e Element The report is output time controlled or event driven 10 6 2 Editing output parameters for a recipe report Introduction The output parameters for a recipe report are edited in the property view The Print recipe object has to be inserted in a report in order to display the properties The property view has to be open Output parameters of Print recipe Select the Print recipe object in the work area The properties of the object are displayed in the Property view Select the recipe data for the output in the report in the General category Q amp General general gt Properties Recipe Record Recipe selection Name v Record selection All Recipe name b Record name First recipe Start record number Last recipe End record number WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 275 Working with reports 10 6 Reporting r
360. nead dca andan cane sey danaia aa aa aa eaa E 20 3 1 Configuring tags with the Tag Cito ec eeeeee eee eenee ee ette ee ee eats ee taeeeeetieeeeesieeeeesieeeeneeeneaa 20 3 2 Connecting a tag via the application DOIN ec ce eeeere cent ee ee nnnm nanninannan ia aA tet 20 4 CONTQUPING AlANIMS esa tana andaaee incest nied dined eee eee S 20 4 1 Integrating alarms with the alarm numbering procedure 00 cc cceeceeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeeenaeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 21 APDONG IK e TEOT A T 21 1 Open Source SOMWAL ekine enan a aa a a aaa a a aa aaa 21 2 Performance feature Sossio a a aiaa a a a a a a 21 2 1 General Technical Data 2 22 cc ccseteceecsdetansetes nore spdesnesadearcsttutetatses eaccabtecersieedeestenensnatenteitestig 424 21 2 1 1 Released operating SYStOMS c ccc eect ener erent eee ttte ee eerie ee ene ee ee teeeeteeeeeneeeete naeeeereea 424 21 2 1 2 Released databases icici scccesiensadesigcadesutapcay oeeetavacessaapceduaagsdestasdeaseasedesiasdecesalsdezelnioeeexdeeuendeease 21 2 1 3 Further software versions supported cceeceeeeecee cece eeeeeceaeee cece eeeceaeaeceeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeeentaeeeeeees 425 21 2 14 Recommended printers aiani niiae casa ceanedddaanbasedsabdaedeannadesnaeddasanshdeedanancdearaddersedeetanidedennd ZAZA Legal CHAPACISNS nui s tieucscetewenvanticedane ssseeedenns tener antnecadscetandtnddensiestenctsteuneddsescasdbsebened antedenennd 425 21 2 1 6 Memory requirement of recipes
361. ned to the correct point of use in the project If you have made changes to project texts in WinCC flexible in the meantime the modified texts are not overwritten during the import WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO 333 Structure of Multilingual Projects 13 4 Creating a project in multiple languages Requirement Procedure Result 334 Export and import of texts in a particular editor You can limit the export and import of texts to those in a particular editor in WinCC flexible Export and import of new texts for partially translated projects If you have inserted new texts in a previously translated project you can selectively export the texts that have not yet been translated This minimizes the translation effort required The Project languages editor is open Click on the column header of the target language The entries are sorted alphabetically Empty cells are displayed at the start of the column Select the empty cells By pressing the shift key you can select several cells at once 3 Select the Texts gt Export command on the Options menu 4 Enter a name and a path for the csv file where the texts are to be exported All the texts of the selected columns will be exported WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Structure of Multilingual Projects 13 5 Working wit
362. need to configure motor controls for example Another shared library may contain all of the objects you need to configure the pump controls Library objects A library may contain all the WinCC flexible objects e g screens tags graphic objects or alarms To use a library object in a project copy the object and all referenced objects to the project The copied object looses its interconnection with the library Changes in the library do not affect any of the copied library objects If you wish to use multiple instances of configurable object groups and edit these centrally you need to create faceplates WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 170 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Creating Screens 5 8 Working with faceplates 5 8 Working with faceplates 5 8 1 Introduction Faceplate basics Faceplates are objects that you compile from existing screen objects Faceplates offer the following advantages e Central modification e Reuse in other projects e Reduce configuration time Faceplates are created and edited in the Faceplate editor The faceplates you create are added to the Project library and can be inserted into screens in the same way as other objects Faceplate configuration Screens Editor The Faceplate editor comprises the Screens editor and the Faceplate configuration dialog In the Screens editor you place the objects you would like to have in the faceplate Yo
363. nfiguration data in a project report You can output a project report for e A complete WinCC flexible project e A component of WinCC flexible e A single or multiple objects The selection of the output data depends on the objects or components selected The composition of the data depends on the selected Compact or Complete output format and is carried out when the project report is generated by the system A separate chapter is output for each component if you output the configuration data of several or all components of WinCC flexible A separate chapter is also output for each WinCC flexible screen in view of the possible data quantity You can open the project report in a preview before you start the output The preview allows you to check the project report Project reports can optionally be output to e A printer e Afile e The screen WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 343 Project documentation 14 1 Basics 14 1 2 Introduction 344 Note All screens used in WinCC flexible are saved to a separate folder when a project report is generated and if the following requirements are met e You used the project preview and exited it with Exit e You print the project report to a file We The screens are saved to files with emf extension Structure of a layout A layout for the project documentation consists of a cover sheet and a formal conte
364. ng an Alarm System 6 2 Elements and basic settings Property view Configure the analog alarm in the property view The view offers the same information and settings as the work area table 6 2 2 4 System alarms editor Introduction The System alarms tabular editors shows all the HMI system alarms You can change the alarm text of the system alarms Open The System alarms entry is not visible with the default settings of WinCC flexible Display the entry as follows 1 Select Settings from the Options menu 2 Open the Workbench gt Settings for project view category in the Settings dialog 3 Select the Display all items in the Change the mode in which the project tree is shown field If the System alarms entry is visible in the project view double click on System alarms in the Alarms group Layout Bi wen woe ROO E Soe we hen ra 9 Work area Property view gt WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 188 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Creating an Alarm System 6 2 Elements and basic settings Work area The work area shows in tabular form all the established system alarms and the associated settings You can edit the alarm text of the system alarm in the table cells Property view The alarm text of the system alarm is modified in the property view The alarm number and alarm class are assigned by the system 6 2 2 5 Alarm classes editor Introduction You create
365. ng with the user administration User view When you configure a user view in the engineering system you can administer users in the user view following transfer to the HMI device CAUTION Changes in the user view are effective immediately in runtime Changes in runtime are not updated in the engineering system When the users and user groups are transferred from the engineering system to the HMI device all the changes in the user view are overwritten after a user prompt and based on the transfer settings Some HMI devices do not support the user view These HMI devices only support the functions Log on and Log off The only user Administrator is logged on and logged off The Administrator is assigned to the only user group Administrators Exporting and importing user data The users and passwords existing at an HMI device are exported and imported to a different operator panel by means of a system function This ensures that the user administrations of the different HMI devices have the same status Note Once you have exported the user data with WinCC flexible 2004 you can then import this file into WinCC flexible 2005 Once you have exported the user data with WinCC flexible 2005 you cannot then import this file into WinCC flexible 2004 11 4 3 User view Purpose You configure a user view in the engineering system in order to also administer the users in runtime Introduction The user
366. ngs were used to setup Microsoft Office the Microsoft Script Editor component was set for Installed on First Use If you wish to explicitly install these components you must specify it in the Microsoft Office setup Click on Web Debugging in the component selection window and select the option Run from My Computer ji Microsoft Office XP Setup MAE Microsoft Office XP Professional with FrontPage Choose installation options For all Office applications and tools Features to install Office Tools X Equation Editor E3 HTML Source Editing Se web Scripting web Debugging y Langu Microsc Microsc Microst E Installed on First Use v Microsc x Run from My Computer 4 38 Run all from My Computer 4 X X X X X 4 X Not Available Description Microsoft Script Editor For scripting and debugging Web pages Space Required on C 1684KB Space Available on C 1787 MB Help lt Back _Undate Cancel If a project is activated in WinCC flexible with the command Start runtime system with script debugger a dialog with a list of available script debuggers appears when the first script is run WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 315 System functions and runtime scripting 12 5 Debugging Other installed script debuggers such as Microsoft Visual Inte
367. nguage principles in WinCC flexible Multi language capability is implemented on various language levels in WinCC flexible User interface language and project languages Two language levels are differentiated in WinCC flexible e User interface language During configuration text is displayed in the WinCC flexible menus and dialog boxes in the user interface language You select the user interface language to be used when you install WinCC flexible You can change the user interface language with the menu command Options gt Settings Project languages Project languages are used to create a project in multiple languages The two language levels are completely independent of one another For example you can create English projects at any time using a German user interface and vice versa Project languages The following project languages have been released for WinCC flexible 324 Chinese PRC Chinese Taiwan Danish German English Finnish Flemish French Greek Italian Korean Norwegian Polish Portuguese Russian Swedish Spanish Czech WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Structure of Multilingual Projects 13 2 WinCC flexible terminology e Turkish e Hungarian e Japanese You can generally also configure in any language available in Windows However restrictions may apply when some languages are used for configuration such as e The HMI
368. nimations e use of faceplates e use of large graphic objects e several devices within a project configuration It is nonetheless useful to install more than 2 GB of RAM on the PC if running many applications with high memory requirements in parallel WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 428 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Appendix 21 2 Performance features Overview Table 21 1 Micro Panels OP 73micro TP 170micro TP 177micro Tags Number of tags in the project 500 250 250 Number of power tags Number of elements per array 50 100 100 Number of local tags Alarms Number of alarm classes 32 32 32 Number of discrete alarms 250 500 500 Number of analog alarms 3 20 Character length of an alarm 80 80 80 Number of process values per alarm 8 8 8 Size of the alarm buffer 100 128 128 Number of queued alarm events 30 16 32 Screens Number of screens 250 250 250 Number of fields per screen 20 20 20 Number of tags per screen 20 20 20 Number of complex objects per screen 5 5 5 Recipes Number of recipes m Number of elements per recipe gt ee User data length in bytes per data record z Number of data records per recipe L Number of recipe elements in the project 2 Reserved memory for data records in the internal Flash Logs Number of logs Es Number of entries per log file including all log segments Number of log segments p Cyc
369. ns to modifications of the recipe structure Introduction Different recipe structures can occur in the following situations e In the event of changes during commissioning e When work is carried out on the machine by the machine manufacturer retrofit e When CSV files are imported the structure of the CSV file can differ from the recipe structure Nevertheless you can still use any recipe data records already created CAUTION When a tag is renamed the assignment is lost Effects Structural differences are handled as follows e Ifthe old recipe data record or the CSV file contains any additional values these values will be discarded e Ifthe old recipe data record or the CSV file contains values of the wrong data type the configured default value is used in the recipe data record Example The recipe data record contains values that show the tank contents and were input as floating point numbers However the corresponding recipe tag expects an integer value In this case the system discards the transferred value and the configured default value is used e Ifthe old recipe data record or the CSV file contains too few values the configured default value is again used in the recipe data record WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 244 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Structure of a recipe management system 8 4 Scenarios 8 4 Scenarios 8 4 1 Scenario Entering recipe data record
370. nsfer Information on the HMI device versions used in WinCC flexible is to be found in FAQ on the Internet under the article ID 21742389 German English http support automation siemens com WW view en 21 74238 Fran ais http support automation siemens com WWview ft 21742389 Italiano http support automation siemens com WW view it 21742389 OLO Configuring a project for several HMI devices Using a WinCC flexible edition from Compact and later a project can be configured with several HMI devices Q x wees Device_1 MP 370 ween Device_2 TP 1704 You can delete copy also across projects and rename the HMI devices in the project window WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Working with projects 3 2 Types of projects Application example This type of configuration is used for example in projects designed for large systems which are to be operated by several HMI devices Global data and HMI device specific data Within a project in which several HMI devices are configured some data and objects are available specific to HMI devices and some are globally available throughout the project e HMI device specific data Data related to a specific HMI device can be individually setup in the project HMI device specific data and objects are all data and objects that are listed in the Project View below the entry Device e g pictures
371. ntinuous acquisition and storage of the tag values In addition data logging can also be triggered by events e g when a value changes These settings can be made for each tag individually WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 249 Logging and displaying tags 9 1 Basics In runtime the tag values which are to be logged are captured processed and stored in an ODBC database or a file Log types In WinCC flexible you can select from the following log types e Circular log e Segmented circular log e Circular log which sends a system alarm message when it is full e Circular log which executes system functions when it is full Storage media and location The logged data will be stored in either an ODBC database only on a PC or a file Tag 1 aL B Tag2 File PRS en B Tag 4 Pr i os Event 1 Sas 2 Event 2 OE wt Database 1 Event 3 _ Event 4 Ten a _ 4 Trend 2 Database 2 Depending on the hardware configuration of the HMI device the data may be logged locally on the hard disk of a PC or on the storage card of a panel or if present on a network drive Saved data can undergo additional processing in other programs e g for analysis purposes Outputting the contents of a log In runtime you can output the logged tag values as trends in the process screens WinCC flexible 2007 Compact
372. nts sheet which is filled dynamically with the configuration data If the data for the output fill several pages page breaks are inserted automatically by the system Layouts are divided into various areas The page area displays the entire layout surface The print margins can be specified for this area The printable area consists of the header footer and the page body Printable area Page body Unprintable The header and footers are output on every page of a project report The header and footer are not output on the cover sheet WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Project documentation 14 1 Basics Layout of the cover sheet General information about the project can be output on the cover sheet The cover sheet contains predefined fields in which you can enter the corresponding information by means of a dialog box The following information can be output on the cover sheet e Project name e Company name e Department name e Author name e Company logo e Project logo Layout of the contents pages The configuration data are output on the contents pages The following elements are output in a project report Line Contents Title Designation of the selected components for the project report Label Designation of the objects the attributes and the output WinCC flexible screens Array Output configured attribute values of objects The l
373. o gt In the search field enter the ID 22657587 and start searching The SIMATIC Logon Electronic Signature manual is available to download WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 289 User administration 11 4 Working with the user administration Log on process via SIMATIC Logon Service The following diagram illustrates the process that runs automatically when a user logs onto Runtime 1 Query Login and password 2 Transfer Login data 3 Query Is the user already known in Windows Check of the login data on the local computer or in the domain 4 Authentication of the user Operating system administration of 5 Query What user data users and is known groups Transfer of the user data 6 Transfer Complete username Group memberships Age of password 7 Transfer Complete username Group memberships Result The functions of the role can be performed by the user 11 4 2 Users in Runtime Principle In the engineering system you create users and user groups and allocate authorizations to them You configure objects with authorizations After transfer to the HMI device all objects which were configured with an authorization are protected against unauthorized access in Runtime WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 290 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO User administration 11 4 Worki
374. oduction With structures you bundle a number of different tags that form one logical unit Structures are project global data and apply to all HMI devices within the entire project Principle For instance the various states of a valve can be replicated by means of four tags TA A Cys Ar valve_activated lt Internal tag gt gt Byte valve_closed Terisa tag gt Byte valve _defect lt Internal tag gt Byte valve_opened lt Internal tag gt Byte Si With a structure the different states can be united Within the structure you set up a structure element for each tag To the structure element you assign the properties that the tag created from it should include e g data type 5 m el RUCTURES PLC lt Internal structure gt gt oo ee a a Byte Byte a Byte a Byte WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 136 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Working with Tags 4 7 Working with structures You assign the generated structure a tag or a dynamic property of the faceplate as a data type The structures that can be selected are displayed in the Data type list box following the standard data types Note You can work with structures and tags of a structure data type only in the faceplates License regulation in Runtime If you use external tags of the structure data type in a faceplate instance in WinCC flexible Runtime each structure element is counted as a tag
375. of a button WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Structure of a recipe management system 8 1 Basics 8 1 3 Structure of recipes Introduction The basic structure of a recipe is illustrated with reference to a filling station in a fruit juice plant There may be several different recipes in an HMI device A recipe can be compared to an index card box that contains several index cards The index card box contains several variants for manufacturing a product family The full data for each manufacturing variant is contained on a single index card Example In a soft drinks production plant a recipe is needed for different flavors Drink variants include fruit juice drink juice and nectar Recipe Recipe data record Element Recipe Recipe data records Each index card represents a recipe data record needed to manufacture a product variant Recipe entries Each index card in a drawer is printed immediately All the index cards contain fields for the different ingredients Each field corresponds to a recipe entry All the records of a recipe thus contain the same entries The records differ however in the value of the individual entries Example All drinks contain the same components e Water e Concentrate e Sugar e Flavoring The records for juice drink fruit juice or nectar differ however in the quantity of sugar used in production WinCC flexib
376. of connected Sm rtClients including a service client Help system Number of characters in a help text Languages Number of runtime languages Scheduler Tasks User administration User groups Authorizations Passwords Project Size of the project file fwx MP 270B 6 max 3 10 Max 2 320 48 50 32 50 4 MB 21 2 Performance features MP 277 MP 370 MP 377 6 8 Max 3 12 max 3 12 max 3 10 Max 2 15 max 2 15 Max 2 19 Max 1 320 320 320 16 5 16 48 48 48 50 50 50 32 32 32 50 50 50 6 MB 7 MB 12 MB 1 The number of entries for each individual subsequent log applies for the segmented circular log archiving method Table 21 5 WinCC flexible Runtime Tags Number of tags in the project Number of power tags Number of elements per array Number of local tags Alarms Number of alarm classes Number of discrete alarms Number of analog alarms Length of an alarm Number of process values per alarm Size of the alarm buffer Number of queued alarm events WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 WinCC flexible Runtime 2048 128 2048 1600 2000 32 4000 500 80 1024 500 437 Appendix 21 2 Performance features WinCC flexible Runtime Screens Number of screens 500 Number of fields per screen 400 Number of tags per screen 400 Number of complex objects per screen 40 Recipes Number of recipes 999 Number of elements p
377. of language dependent graphics 13 6 Use of language dependent graphics 13 6 1 Use of language dependent graphics Language dependent screen versions You use the Graphics editor to import graphics into your project and manage their language dependent versions The graphics can then be linked to the process screens of the project in the Screens editor If you create a project in multiple languages different graphics may be required for the various project languages due to the following e The graphics contain text e Cultural factors play a role in the graphics In both cases you must produce language dependent versions of the graphics Basic procedure 1 First configure all process screens for one language in the Screens editor 2 Create a version of the graphics for each project language in a graphics program 3 In the Graphics editor import the language dependent graphics into the project Result The version of each graphic for the current editing language setting is displayed in the Screens editor The version of each graphic for the current runtime language setting is displayed during runtime 13 6 2 Graphics editor Introduction You manage the configured graphic objects in multiple language versions in the Graphics editor Opening the Graphics editor To open the Graphics editor double click the Graphics editor entry in the Localize group in the project view WinCC flexible 2007 Compact
378. of the same name already exists in the target project Existing objects with the same name will be replaced The child objects contained will also be replaced The recipe in the target project has 50 entries and the recipe in the source project has 500 entries If you replace the recipe in the target project the entries that are not in the target object are set up In the case of entries that already exist in the target project the settings are replaced by the settings of the source project If the copy contains references the system will compare these references with existing references in the target object Via a dialog box you can establish which references you want to replace L VAR2 FKTX VARI Byte VARS The tag VAR2 is of a BYTE data type and references the FKTX function WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Working with projects 3 6 Reusing project data Target project The tag VAR1 has a limit tag VAR2 of WORD data type The limit tag references the three functions FKT1 FKT2 and FKT3 Result L VAR2 FKTX VARI Byte VARS The limit tag VAR2 is replaced by the VAR2 tag from the source project The references in the target project are not changed by the replacement The missing FKTX reference is added to the target project The reference tag VAR5 from the inserted object is also inserted in the target project Note If you insert objects by replacing
379. og for each alarm class in which the alarm events are stored during runtime WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO 199 Creating an Alarm System 6 4 Alarm logging e Further processing logged alarms You can evaluate the logged alarms directly in your WinCC flexible project e g in an alarm view or via another application e g Excel 6 4 6 Displaying logged alarms on screens Introduction During runtime you can display logged alarms on the screens of the HMI device During this process alarms in an alarm class are downloaded from the log database and presented in an alarm view Principle You must configure an alarm view to display logged alarms on the HMI device When configuring an alarm view specify the alarm class of the alarms to be displayed 6 4 7 Structure of a csv file with alarms Introduction You can save an alarm log as a CSV file CSV stands for Comma Separated Value In this format the table columns that contain the names and the value of the entry are separated by semicolons Each table row ends with a carriage return Example of a csv file 200 This example shows a file with logged alarms Time ms MsgProc StateAfter MsgClass MsgNumber Varl Var8 TimeString MsgText PLC 37986550590 27 1 1 3 110001 30 06 99 13 12 51 Change to operating mode Tonline 37986550682 87 1 1 3 140010 30 06 99 13 12 59
380. oject such as the Sm rtClient view User specific controls In this object group you can add ActiveX controls which are registered in the Windows operating system of your PG PC to the toolbox and thus integrate them into your project Graphics Graphical objects e g of machinery and plant components measuring equipment control elements flags and buildings are displayed thematically in a directory tree structure You can also create shortcuts to your graphic files External graphic objects in this folder and in the nested folders appear in the toolbox window and are thus integrated in the project Library A library contains object templates such as graphics of pipes pumps or default buttons You can integrate multiple instances of a library object in your project without any need to reconfigure these The WinCC flexible software package includes libraries You may also store user defined objects and faceplates in user libraries The Faceplates represent preconfigured object groups Some of their properties but not all of these can be configured at the relevant place of their application The faceplates can be edited from a central location The use of faceplates helps you to reduce the work involved in configuration and ensure uniform project design WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Creating Screens Simple objects 5 3 Working with objects
381. ommand Import Tags You can also mark the HMI device and select the menu command Project gt Import Tags Click on the Options button to make the settings for the import WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 141 Working with Tags 4 8 Importing Tags k Import tags to device Device_1 File name for connections C Temp connection_import csv File name for tags C T emp tag_import csv Strategy C Overwrite the existing connection tag Separating data List separator Text qualifier fixed Recognition of numeric data Decimal separator Q Thousands separator Tags C Use the folder delimiter Folder delimiter In the Files area enter the location of the import files or navigate to the storage location and select the desired files The import files must be in csv format The validity of the file names is checked before the import begins If you enable the Overwrite the existing connection tag check box previous connections or tags with the same name will be overwritten by the import If you disable the check box connections and tags with the same name in WinCC flexible are not imported In the List separator field select a character to be used to separate the individual parameters for connections and tags Refer to the sections Format of the Connection Data for the Import and Format of the Tag Data for the Import for more information
382. on on transferring a STEP 7 project to a different PC can be found in the STEP 7 documentation If a STEP 7 project contains several WinCC flexible projects each of these WinCC flexible projects must be converted separately During conversion of a WinCC flexible project the data for all the HMI devices contained there are converted If a WinCC flexible project contains several HMI devices they are displayed as individual HMI stations in the project window of STEP 7 SIMATIC 400 1 WinCCflex_Proi_2_Device1 WwinCCflex_Pro 2_Device2 WinCCflex_Proi_2_Device3 WinCCflex_Proi_1_Devicel La WinCCflex_Proi_1_Device2 The conversion of a single WinCC flexible project containing several HMI devices may therefore affect several HMI stations displayed in STEP 7 With a converted project the valid WinCC flexible version is written to the properties of the HMI stations affected To display the properties open the shortcut menu of an HMI station and select the menu command Properties The HMI used is displayed after the entry Device The HMI device version is found in parentheses and the valid WinCC flexible version e g MP 370 12 Key 7 1 0 0 2005 is found after the comma The WinCC flexible version is not displayed for a non converted HMI station If you reopen an already converted WinCC flexible project in the current version environment the dialog for reconversion to the current version is opened When converting several WinC
383. on computer to the HMI devices The project file is transferred to all HMI devices for which the respective check box is selected in the transfer settings WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 113 Working with projects 3 13 Transferring projects Transfer mode The HMI device must be in transfer mode for the transfer operation Depending on the type of HMI device transfer mode is enabled as follows e Windows CE systems The HMI device starts up automatically in transfer mode when the device is commissioned the first time The HMI device switches automatically to transfer mode at the start of each additional transfer operation if this transfer option is enabled on the configuration menu of the HMI device If not restart the HMI device and call the transfer applet on the Start menu or configure the Change Operating Mode system function in your project e PCs If the HMI device is a PC that does not yet contain a project you must enable the transfer mode in the RT Loader manually before the first transfer operation Refer to your manual for more detailed instructions on setting the transfer mode on the HMI device HMI device version 3 13 2 Introduction When transferring a project onto the operator device the system checks if the configured operating system version corresponds with the version on the HMI device If the system finds different versions the
384. on of the programming user interface The WinCC flexible Workbench can be user customized by moving or hiding windows and toolbars WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 33 Introduction to WinCC flexible 7 4 Configuration concepts 1 4 2 Scalable Configuration Tools Introduction If WinCC flexible is used to edit projects for different HMI devices the functional scope is adapted to the HMI device during configuration Different functionality is available according to the HMI device Custom HMI Device Functions Custom device functions ensure efficient configuration You only need to configure those functions which are supported by the specific HMI device The editors displayed in the Project View can be used for example to quickly detect which functions are supported by the HMI device selected Gx ki Paeet iti pm Device 1 Win esbis AT ol ee Device 2 nll fable AT a SCE BB Add Screen C Template O Mang Station O Stat Screen ti Te Lommuricahgn L Alarm Management E Analog Alarms Discrete Alam t kg Setirgs E Alescipess Oi Histoncal Data b nm Songi H Reports a i Test and Graphics Lists a SS Runtime User Admmistration 9 Device Settings it i Language Settings Version Management x liii more A mma Device_ifv inCC iene AT pr Schenk F Add Screen O Template O Mising Station Communic atin Er aed Alec Management i Recipes
385. oncepts For example this could concern the processing of bulk data automatic transfers or even the intelligent configuration of movement paths Engineering support Efficient configuration saves time and costs WinCC flexible supports the following for this Target system dependent configuration During configuration only those functions supported by the selected target system are displayed Engineering independent of the PLC used If you use a project for different or several target systems you only switch over the HMI device in the project Functionalities of the selected HMI device which are not supported are not displayed Central modification of referenced objects Modifications made at a central station are applied to the entire project Use The reuse of configuration objects simplifies configuration and reduces overall costs Bulk data processing Create an action for example with several tags having the same values or chronologically ascending addresses Graphic Configuration of the Screen Navigation Create a screen hierarchy from the graphic overview of the configured screens The required objects for the screen navigation are generated automatically Configuring movement paths Configure the movement of objects clearly in the process screen Totally Integrated Automation Benefit from the smooth integration of WinCC flexible in the configuration user interface of SIMATIC STEP 7 and SIMOTION SCOUT User customizati
386. operty view The content of the property view is determined by the object you have currently selected in the work area e The properties of a selected object can be viewed and edited in the properties dialog box e If you have not selected an object on the active screen the properties of this screen are shown and can be edited in the property view 5 1 4 Procedures Procedures To create screens you need to take the following initial steps e Create a draft of the process visualization structure i e define the structure and the number of screens Example Process partitions can be visualized in separate screens and merged ina master screen e Define your screen navigation control strategies e Adapt the template The template which is stored in WinCC flexible for the selected HMI device applies to all your project screens In this template you can define objects locally and assign global functions keys For some of the HMI devices you can store the objects you want to integrate into all screens in the permanent window e Create the screens Use the following options of efficient screen creation Create a screen structure in the Screen Navigation editor Working with libraries Working with faceplates Working with layers WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 152 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Creating Screens 5 2 Configuring the navigation system 5 2 Configuring the navigation syst
387. or Speed is derived from Motor Speed for example For unique identification an index starting with 1 is assigned to identical tags Non supported characters in a tag name are replaced by an underscore _ WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 Integration of WinCC flexible in STEP 7 20 3 Tag configuration Transferring an array from STEP 7 If you are using a SIMATIC S7 300 SIMATIC S7 400 or a SIMOTION PLC you can accept entire arrays from STEP 7 in addition to tags If you are using the SIMATIC 300 400 control protocol and you would like to accept arrays in WinCC flexible proceed as follows 1 Create a new tag in WinCC flexible 2 Position the mouse pointer and click in the Symbol field of this tag press the button that appears to open the selection dialog 3 Navigate to the required PLC and select the array you want to accept A tag group corresponding to the number of array elements will be created Changing a connection When you make changes to a connection e g by changing a node a program or a station the symbol association of a tag is not lost The tag association is automatically reassigned to the STEP 7 symbol If a tag can no longer be assigned because the address or symbol does not exist you have the following options e Save the association The tag will be labeled defective The tag in question must be connected manually e Separat
388. or all objects displayed in the object window The following drag and drop actions for example are supported e Moving a tag to a process screen in the work area Creates an I O field which is linked to the tags WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO 51 WinCC flexible Engineering System 2 3 Placing editor specitic operating elements 2 3 Introduction 52 e Moving a tag to an existing I O field Creates a logical link between the tag and the O field e Moving a process screen to another process screen in the work area Generates a button with screen change function which is linked to the process screen Long object names are abbreviated in the Object View After moving the mouse pointer to the object the full name appears as a ToolTip When a large number of objects are available quickly locate the object you require by entering just the first letter of the object Placing editor specific operating elements Editor specific operating elements are only visible in the active work area of the corresponding editor l WinCC flexible Advanced Project hmi Project Edit View Insert Format Faceplates Options Window Help gt i New be AO X h 9 A Y ip m PM English United State ov bi amp fH water j X Adds recipe element QOD x lee Project ae Device_1 TP 1708 Color ta Screens Ls Communication Tags a57 Connections e Cycles
389. or example 2 1 A project version of a branch always requires a two number extension for its version number for example 2 1 2 WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 Managing project versions 17 4 Branch Additional branches SE a amp Trunk Project_2 2 cence Branch 2 1 Branch 2 2 Project_2 Ss PSA However when you open version 2 in the version management again Project_2 is not overwritten in the project folder Instead Project_2 2 is saved In Project_2 2 you can edit the state in version 2 once again A new branch numbered 2 2 is created when you now create a new project version Branch 2 1 already exists The new project version is saved as version 2 2 1 However in order to continue to work with branch 2 1 you can open the highest number of this branch for example version 2 1 2 in the version management As an alternative you can open the most recently edited Project_2 in the project folder WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO 373 Managing project versions 17 5 Elements 17 5 Elements 17 5 1 Project versions editor Introduction The version management shows the project versions that have been created from the current project You can create a new project version open an older project version and compare project versions Open You open the Project Versions edit
390. or in the Project view by double clicking on Project versions 3 Note If you have moved the location of the project versions in another project enter the new location in the Reset path for project versions dialog that subsequently appears Layout Bh wen vroe KOO imene ep hee Project view 7 T Property view p gt r WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 374 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 Managing project versions 17 5 Elements Menu bar You can start the functions for version management from the menu bar Toolbar You can start the functions for version management in the Project versions toolbar The toolbar is displayed by default The toolbar can be displayed or hidden from the context menu of the toolbar You can also access the version management functions in the context menu of the work area Work area The work area displays the project versions that have been created Property view When a project version is selected its name and the related comment can be edited in the Property view The current and the next version numbers are assigned by the version management 17 5 2 Change log operator controls Menu commands In the Options gt Version management menu Short description Hotkeys Availability Move project Changes the location of the The version management contains at versions project versions least one project version Project versions toolbar Sy
391. ord d n ck B Recipes pres DeleteDataRecord E Rolwase ExportDataRecords E Activate GetDataRecordFromPLC E Danctivets 2 GetDataRecordName s m Change GetDataRecordTagsFromPLC ImportDataRecords CEN Events occur only when the project is in runtime Events include e Value changes of a tag e Changing the value of the array changing the value of an array element e Pressing of a button e Activation of runtime WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 301 System functions and runtime scripting 12 2 Working with function lists You can configure a function list precisely on every event Note The choice of configurable system functions in a function list is dependent on the HMI device chosen 12 2 2 Properties of a function list HMI device dependency You can use a project for different HMI devices When you change the HMI device in a project all system functions and scripts which are not supported by the selected HMI device are marked in yellow The system functions which are not supported will also not be performed in runtime Status information During configuration the project data is tested in the background A status information returns in each function list the status of the respective system functions and scripts The status information has the following meaning e Orange Function list is not performed in runtime because at
392. orking with reports 1 Detail page 1 _ Detail page 2 El Detail page d m Detail page 4 Collapse all Detail page 5 a Insert page before Page footer Insert page after Bg Report footer a One page up x One page down Fi Delete page Report properties Expand all Pop up menu of a page The sequence of the created pages can be changed subsequently To do so move the cursor onto the desired page and open the pop up menu with right mouse button Select the corresponding command One page up or One page down in the pop up menu The page is moved correspondingly The consecutive numbering of the pages is retained If for example Page 4 is moved One page up by means of the corresponding command Pages 3 and 4 are swapped The individual report sections can be closed in order to obtain a better overview in the work area In order to minimize or maximize click on the node before the section designation You can also display or hide all the areas simultaneously To do so move the cursor onto the title bar of a report area and open the pop up menu with the right mouse button Select the corresponding command Display all or Hide all in the pop up menu Report properties Collapse all Expand all 10 4 2 Adapting the report properties Introduction You edit the output options and the format options for the report in the report properties The following property groups are a
393. ot used frequently in order to enlarge the work area The View menu can be used to restore the default layout of frames and toolbars Operating Elements Available The table below shows you the operating elements of the frames and toolbars and what they are used for Operator control element x Purpose Closes a frame or toolbar Where used Frames and toolbars movable Q x Moves and docks frames and toolbars using drag and drop Frames and toolbars movable Moves a toolbar by means of Toolbar docked drag and drop Adds or deletes toolbar icons Toolbar docked Activates the auto hide mode for a window Frame docked 0 5 Disables auto hide mode for a frame Frame docked WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 53 WinCC flexible Engineering System 2 4 Working with windows and toolbars Docking frames or toolbars Docking refers to the integration of a window into the WinCC flexible workbench You can automatically hide docked frames in order to increase your workspace A freely moveable window can be docked on a window at the following positions Upper edge Right edge Bottom edge Left edge Move the cursor in the title bar of the window Keeping the left hand mouse button pressed drag the window to the desired docking position You can dock a toolbar onto any existing toolbar
394. ots A Polyline The polyline is an open object The surface cannot be filled even if the starting and end points have the same coordinates A polyline can have any number of corners The corners are numbered in the sequence of their creation and can be changed or deleted individually The line ends of a polyline can be indicated by arrows or dots for example a Polygon The polygon is a closed object which can be filled with a color or pattern A polygon can have any number of corners The corners are numbered in the sequence of their creation and can be changed or deleted individually Ellipse The ellipse is an enclosed object which can be filled with a color or pattern You can customize the width and height of an ellipse in order to align it horizontally or vertically O Circle The circle is an enclosed object which can be filled with a color or pattern The circle diameter can be adjusted freely oO Rectangle The rectangle is an enclosed object which can be filled with a color or pattern The height and width of a rectangle can be varied freely in order to allow a horizontal or vertical adjustment The corners of a rounded rectangle can be rounded off as required Text field The field for static text is an enclosed object which can be filled with a color or pattern The static test is entered in a text field of any size You can enter single or multiple line text for all configured languages
395. output In order to create the next entry double click the next empty line in the table TEXT LISIS WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO WinCC flexible Engineering System 2 7 Working with WinCC flexible The entry in the column Value is uniquely assigned by the system In order to change the value click the corresponding entry Open the drop down list box and enter the desired value and range value Note The availability of the text list is determined by the HMI device used Behavior of bit number 0 to 31 If Bit selection in text and image lists in the device settings is deactivated and no default value is set the following standard response applies If exactly 1 bit is configured for all set bits the saved at the configured bit will be displayed Table 2 1 Example Significance 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bits set 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 Configured Text 3 Text 2 Text 1 Only the bit with significance 4 is configured Text 2 is displayed Nothing is displayed in all other cases e No bit is set for example e Several bits are set for example Default value In order to prevent an empty display in such a case you establish a default value A configured default value is displayed in the following scenarios e Bit selection in text and graphic lists is deactivated and in the tags there is not precisely 1 bi
396. pact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 439 Appendix 21 2 Performance features WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 440 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Index Screen Navigation editor 153 Script Wizard 3 PWX 113 A Accepting tags from STEP 7 STEP 7 Access Runtime object model Tag 3 accessing Script in the script System function in the script Acknowledgement tag reading write Acknowledging Alarm Acquisition cycle Action in the Object View 96 Addressing Multiplexing 131 Tag indirect addressing Alarm Acknowledge Acknowledging by the PLC Basic settings Component Display on the HMI device 179 WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 Property 183 Reporting 19 System alarm 178 System function 181 Alarm class 477 195 Alarm classes editor Alarm classes editor 189 Alarm group Alarm groups Hoe Alarm groups editor 190 Alarm indicator 156 179 Alarm line Alarm log Basic principles 195 Displaying alarms 200 Alarm logging 195 Log behavior 196 Memory medium 1 Alarm logs editor Alarm number 1 Alarm number procedure 176 Alarm procedure Alarm report 272 3 ow configuring Alarm status 176 Layout Alarm text 183 Alarm view 156 Alarm View Filtering Alarm window ALARM_D alarm configuring in
397. parameters directly on the machine You then transfer the data from the PLC to the HMI device and save it in the recipe Example for using recipes Recipes are used in the manufacturing industry and mechanical engineering for example The two examples illustrate typical applications that you can implement with the recipe functionality of the WinCC flexible engineering system e Machine parameter assignment One field of application for recipes is the assignment of machine parameters in the manufacturing industry A machine cuts wooden boards of various sizes to specified dimensions and drills holes The guide rails and drill have to be moved to new positions according to the board size The required position data are stored as data records ina recipe You reassign the machine parameters using Teach in mode if for example a new board size is to be processed You transfer the new position data directly from the PLC to the HMI device and save it as a new data record Batch production Batch production in the food processing industry represents another field of application for recipes A filling station in a fruit juice plant produces juice nectar and fruit drinks in a variety of flavors The ingredients are always the same differing only in their mixing ratios Each flavor corresponds to a recipe Each mixing ratio corresponds to a data record All of the required data for a mixing ratio can be transferred to the machine control at the touch
398. password list and recipes can then be restored from the backup Transfer of recipe data records with specification of date or time If you use date or time specifications in recipes the system settings for time and date on the configuration computer and on the destination device must be in concordance After transferring to the destination device you should check the recipes with date or time specifications on the destination device 19 1 3 Transfer via USB Introduction Via a USB connection you have the possibility of connecting a configuration computer and an HMI device to each other and transferring projects in both directions To do this you require a suitable USB host to host cable and the USB driver available on the WinCC flexible CD 2 It is only possible to transfer via USB on Windows CE based HMI devices with a USB interface Note Use exclusively the USB drivers available on the WinCC flexible CD 2 as otherwise problems could occur when transferring Data has already been successfully exchanged between configuration computers and HMI devices using USB host to host cables of other manufacturers Refer to the following site for more information on the cables to be used and the manufacturers suppliers http EE automation siemens com WWiview de 19142034 Transfer via USB To ensure that the data transfer with the USB host to host cable runs smoothly you must comply with the following conditions e You are us
399. play project library or drag the screen object into the library view to display the project library In addition to the objects from the project library you can also incorporate objects from shared libraries in your projects A shared library is stored independent of project data in a separate file with the extension wlf When a shared library is used in a project you generate only one reference to this library in the relevant project The shared libraries are not automatically included when you move the project to a different computer The interconnection between the project and the shared library may be lost in the course of this action This interconnection will also be lost if the shared library is renamed in a different project or in an application other than WinCC flexible A project can access multiple shared libraries A shared library may be used concurrently in multiple projects When a library object is changed by a project this library is opened in all other projects in this modified state Among the shared libraries you will also find the libraries supplied with your WinCC flexible package WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO 169 Creating Screens 5 7 Object libraries Categories To sort library objects by topics you can either split a library into categories or create several shared libraries A particular shared library may contain all of the objects you
400. played Layers All objects of a group are located in the same layer WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 163 Creating Screens 5 3 Working with objects 5 3 6 Defining group properties Introduction 164 You edit a group in the same way as any other object The properties dialog box shows all the properties of the selected objects W Properties L ayout Layout m Misc Position Size D gt Animations po 4 a m a Changes to a shared group property affect all the single objects which are assigned this property Note the following rules when you reposition and resize a group e The system automatically adapts the position coordinates of the group objects when you reposition the group The relative position of the individual objects to the group is not affected e The system automatically adapts the height and width of the group objects in proportion to a change of the group size WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Creating Screens 5 4 Options of assigning dynamic update functions 5 4 Options of assigning dynamic update functions Introduction All objects for input and output demonstrate dynamic reactions in runtime You can also assign dynamic properties to objects An example of this feature is the graphic of a tank filling level which is dynamically updated based on the respective p
401. playing tags 9 1 9 1 1 Introduction Basics Basic principles for data logging Data logging is used to capture process and log process data from industrial equipment The collected process data can then be analyzed to extract important business and technical information regarding the operational state of the equipment Application of the data logging 9 1 2 Introduction Principle You can use data logging to analyze faults and to document the process run By analyzing data logs you can extract the information necessary to allow you to optimize maintenance cycles increase product quality and ensure that quality standards are met Data logging in WinCC flexible Data is information that is collected during the process and saved in the memory of one of the connected automation systems This data reflects the state of the equipment e g temperatures fill levels or states e g motor off To work with the process variables you must define tags in WinCC flexible In WinCC flexible external tags are used to collect process values and to access a memory location in a connected automation system Internal tags are not connected to any process and are only available to their respective HMI device The values from external and internal tags can be saved in data logs You can individually specify the log in which each tag will be saved Data logging is controlled via cycles and events Logging cycles are used to ensure co
402. ple the visibility of an object in the Animations group in the property view In Runtime the Simple recipe view does not support animations If you have configured an animation and for example wish to perform a consistency check of the project then an error message is issued in the output window The following functions are not possible in the simple recipe view e Synchronize tags e Save recipe and data record to a tag or read from a tag WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO 235 Structure of a recipe management system 8 3 Viewing and editing recipes in Runtime 8 3 4 Behavior of the recipe view in Runtime Screen change If you change to another screen and have not yet saved changes to the recipe data in the recipe view you will be prompted to save the recipe data The recipe name and the name of the recipe data record are displayed to show which recipe data have not been saved yet If you change to a process screen that contains a recipe view with loaded recipe data the recipe data will be automatically updated Create change copy or delete recipe data records If the recipe data record already exists a system alarm will be output to the screen Operating the recipe view with function keys The Recipe view can be operated with function keys e g if the HMI device does not have touch functionality Functions such as SaveDataRecord can be assigned to the fu
403. process the following scenarios e Configuring an HMI device installed permanently at machine level This represents the most common type of configuration in which the HMI device is permanently installed on the system or machine e Use of mobile units Mobile units are generally used in the case of large production sites or lines or material conveyor technology The machines to be operated are equipped with several interfaces to which the Mobile Panel 170 for example can be connected The operator or service technician can thus work directly on site This enables an accurate setting up and positioning e g during the startup phase In the case of servicing mobile units ensure shorter downtimes e Configuring several HMI devices It is possible to connect several HMI devices to a system or machine The system can then be operated from various points Using WinCC flexible it is possible to configure several units in one project even of different types which can work with the same project data Component parts of a project A WinCC flexible project consists of all the configuration data which enables the system to by operated and monitored The configuration data is compiled in WinCC flexible according to topic categories Each category is processed in an individual editor The editors available for use depend on the WinCC flexible edition used and the HMI device to be configured The working environment of WinCC flexible only displays
404. propriate HMI device version must be used for the HMI device used Selecting the HMI device version 102 The system automatically selects the HMI device version which matches the selected WinCC flexible version if you are using WinCC flexible to save a project in an earlier version New HMI devices that are supported only in the current version of WinCC flexible can not be used in an earlier version of a WinCC flexible project The system outputs a corresponding dialog box if you attempt to save a project in an earlier version containing an HMI device which is not available in the earlier version of WinCC flexible If you confirm this dialog with OK the Change device type dialog will open This dialog box shows all HMI devices supported in the selected WinCC flexible version Select an appropriate HMI device The project is converted and saved to the selected HMI device If you select Cancel in the dialog the save operation will be cancelled and a conversion will not be performed When you convert a project from an earlier version with the current version of WinCC flexible the HMI device version is automatically converted to the current version during conversion The current operating system version must be installed on the HMI device before the project is transferred You can find further information in chapter Operating System Transfer The current version of WinCC flexible allows you to configure different HMI device versions Select
405. r depth The screen resolution is determined by the different display dimensions of the various operator panels The screen resolution can only be influenced when WinCC flexible RT has been configured for the PC You can assign colors to the screen objects The range of colors is determined by the color depth supported on your selected HMI device WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 149 Creating Screens 5 1 Basics Fonts In all screen objects containing static or dynamic text you can customize the appearance of the texts You could for example identify the priority of individual texts within a screen Select the font font style and size and set additional effects such as underscoring for example Which fonts are available depends on the selected HMI device The selected font determines which font properties are available es m General Text P Properties m Appearance Style m Layout Font Tahoma 12pt m Flashing m Misc b Animations Alignment Horizontal Left vertical Top Orientation Horizontal Your text format for example the font style bold italic etc and effects strikeout underscore always applies to all of the text in a screen object That is you can display the complete title in bold format but not its individual characters or words for example Objects available Some of the screen objects can not be
406. r internal tags Data type Specifies the data type of a tag The data types allowed depend on the communication driver being used The following are examples of possible values Char Byte Int Ulnt Long ULong Float Double Bool String DateTime Word Dint DWord Real StringChar Timer Counter Date Date and time Time of day ASCII DEC DEC LDEC LDEC IEEE BIN 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 bit Block Double int 16 bit group short KF KH KM KY KG KS KC KT Bit in D Bit in W DF DH IEEE Float USInt Sint UDInt Dint time BCD4 BCD8 etc For more information about the data types permitted for the various communication drivers refer to the Communication section of the communication driver documentation Length of the tag in bytes Specifies the length of the tag in bytes The entry is usually only used for string tags for other data types it is otherwise empty Array number Specifies the number of arrays of a tag You can define an array with this value If the entry is empty WinCC flexible sets the value to 1 Acquisition trigger mode Specifies the acquisition trigger mode of a tag The acquisition trigger mode is represented by numbers 1 on demand 2 cyclic on use default value 3 cyclic continuous Acquisition cycle Specifies the acquisition cycle of a tag The acquisition cycle must exactly match the one in WinCC flexible The value does not depend on the language a
407. rAction The export of the user administration using the ExportImportUserAdministration system function is not logged in the audit trail Note Simulating the export of user data During a simulation you can also test the exporting of user data After a completed simulation delete the export file with the password list on the PC This ensures that nobody has unauthorized access to the passwords WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO User administration 11 4 Working with the user administration 11 4 Working with the user administration 11 4 1 Central user administration using SIMATIC Logon Introduction To administer users and user groups solely on a central server activate SIMATIC Logon Principle SIMATIC Logon is a tool for system wide user administration The user logs on and off the application via the SIMATIC Logon Service All the user data including assignments to user groups is created and administered in Windows on the central server Group authorizations are defined locally in WinCC flexible Runtime You do not have to create the user in WinCC flexible since it will be taken dynamically from Windows user administration during the login process Every password prompt change and electronic signature is forwarded to and looked up on the central server or SIMATIC Logon Service Note SIMATI i iri icense For more information on SIMATIC Logon g
408. ransponder2 Result e The HMI device is within the MixingPlant zone The MixingPlant_1 screen is displayed e The HMI device is outside the MixingAxisControl effective range Apart from an emergency stop no safety related operator input is possible via the HMI device WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO 355 Mobile Wireless 15 2 Elements and basic settings 15 2 Elements and basic settings 15 2 1 Zones Introduction The following section applies only to the Mobile Panels Wireless e g Mobile Panel 277 IWLAN and Mobile Panel 277F IWLAN The Zones working area is only visible for these HMI devices You will have to set up the zones in order to carry out system specific operator control and monitoring tasks A zone is defined by the maximum distance from one or more transponders Open Double click on Zones under Device settings to open the working area in the project view Structure Bh wc uree XR tenes c Property view P Working area The Zones working area displays the zones that have been set up and the transponders assigned to them WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 356 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 Mobile Wireless 15 2 Elements and basic settings Property view When a zone is selected you can edit the names display names and the limits of the zone under the General category The zone has the On entry
409. ration are imported into WinCC flexible WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 88 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Working with projects 3 2 Types of projects e The configuring overhead is reduced thanks to the common use of configuration data A condition for integrated operation in SIMOTION SCOUT is that SIMATIC STEP 7 and SIMOTION SCOUT are installed on the configuration computer The installation sequence is 1 SIMATIC STEP 7 2 SIMOTION SCOUT 3 WinCC flexible WinCC flexible integrated in SIMATIC STEP 7 When installing WinCC flexible the user defines whether WinCC flexible should be integrated in SIMATIC STEP 7 The integration of SIMATIC STEP 7 in the configuration interface offers the following advantages e Better fault tolerance e Less work for modifications e Less configuration work During configuration direct access is made to the SIMATIC STEP 7 symbol tables data areas and controllers from SIMATIC STEP 7 The icon table contains data point definitions e g addresses and data types defined during creation of the PLC program The WinCC flexible project tree is mirrored in the project tree of SIMATIC Manager The objects are edited however in a separate WinCC flexible application with the independent WinCC flexible ES user interface Further information on the use of SIMATIC STEP 7 is provided in the documentation of STEP 7 WinCC flexible integrated in SIMOTION SCOUT When inst
410. rch 110 Character string Object Segmented circular log 196 Selecting Multiple objects Objects for project report Selection Print 349 350 Sequence 365 Task 365 Setting Alarm For transferring Languages in the operating system Recipe 229 shared library 108 Shortcut menu accessing 5 WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Index Signal Basic principles Significance 72 76 SIMATIC HMI Definition Introduction Tasks WinCC flexible 20 SIMATIC Logon 289 SIMATIC Manager Editing WinCC flexible objects 405 Working with 402 SIMATIC STEP 7 88 SIMOTION Alarm_S alarms Process alarms SIMOTION SCOUT simple copying 103 Simple objects 269 Simple recipe view 232 Constraints 235 Control object 241 Layout Menu command Operation 2 Simulation 112 Single user project Size An object Editing multiple objects Modifying multiple objects Slider SmartClient display 194 88 Softbus configuring Specifying Properties of object groups 164 Standard layout 346 start 6 Start WinCC flexible 79 Start Center Deactivate 80 Deactivating 80 Menu command Start value Tag 127 starting Editor Starting WinCC flexible 79 Starting WinCC flexible Write permissions required WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 Status force Status information Function
411. rdev or Microsoft Visual Studio NET may appear in the list Select Microsoft Script Editor and confirm your selection by clicking Yes Just In Time Debugging New instance of Microsoft Script Editor WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 316 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO System functions and runtime scripting 12 5 Debugging Activate the Script program object in the Step Into Remote Procedure Call dialog and confirm your selection with OK Step Into Remote Procedure Call xj Process 2332 C Program Files Siemens SIMATIC WinCC flexible Choose the program types that you want to debug MV Script Select All e EEE Unselect All The following programs will be debugged The Microsoft Script Editor is launched The execution pauses at the first row of the first script WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 317 System functions and runtime scripting 12 5 Debugging Microsoft Script Debugger If no script debugger is available you can downl e Microsoft Script Debugger oad th scd10en exe for free from Microsoft It will be started automatically in WinCC flexible once it is installed ee Microsoft Script Debugger File Edit View Debug Window Help ew Read only Script break Option Explicit Sub IncrementTag NOTE To start scripting please press lt Ctrl gt Write sc
412. record by its name The Name option has to be selected in the Data record selection selection field First data record Used to select the first record number for outputting a record range of a recipe Enter a fixed starting number in the field or connect the field to a tag via the selection list The tag can be given a start value dynamically during runtime The Number option has to be selected in the Data record selection selection field Last record Used to select the last record number for outputting a record range of a recipe Enter a fixed end number in the field or connect the field to a tag via the selection list The tag can be given an end value dynamically during runtime The Number option has to be selected in the Data record selection selection field WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Working with reports 10 6 Reporting recipes Select the Appearance subcategory in the Properties category Configure the foreground color the background color the style and the font settings Q x m General Appearance gt Properties gt EEE colors Styles m Layout 7 E a Text color Oo Background Solid Background color L Border Solid Font Arial 12pt Select the Display subcategory in the Properties category Configure the position and the size of the Print recipe object in the Position and
413. record in the recipe memory WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 218 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Structure of a recipe management system 8 1 Basics Transferring the recipe values between the HMI device and the PLC HMI device Recipe view Ooo synchronous Recipe tag Recipe A screen offline LC Complete recipe data records are transferred between the recipe view and PLC The following transfers are possible between the recipe screen and PLC depending on the configuration e Transferring recipe data records between PLC and recipe tags e Immediate transfer of individual modified values between the PLC and recipe tags The following settings are needed in the recipe in order to do this Synchronize tags has been enabled Tags offline has been deactivated Recipe data records can be transferred directly between the HMI device and PLC In these situations the display on the HMI device is not essential WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 219 Structure of a recipe management system 8 1 Basics Exporting and importing recipe data records HMI device External storage medium Recipe data records are exported from the HMI device recipe memory and are saved to a CSV file on the external storage medium The records can be reimported from the storage medium to the recipe memory The following external storage
414. rect effect in the Tag editor Accepting changes to the project data The modified project data are transferred to the project database as soon as the project is saved Undo or redo working steps Every editor has an internal list in which user actions are saved In this way all actions can be reverted undone or restored The relevant commands are in the Edit menu The list is deleted when the editor is closed or the project is saved Switching to another editor does not affect the actions stored in the list WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O WinCC flexible Engineering System 2 7 Working with WinCC flexible 2 7 6 Open Editor Introduction The way in which an editor is started depends on whether it is a graphical editor e g Screen Editor or tabular editor e g Tag Editor You can open up to 20 editors in parallel Opening a Graphical Editor A graphical editor is started by either creating a new object or opening an existing object To create a new object proceed as follows 1 Click the right mouse button on the graphical editor in the Project View in which a new object is to be added 2 Select Add screen in the shortcut menu for example A gt x load Project week Device_1 WinCC flexible RT USFS aise _ Add folder K Undo Creating of Screen Imagen Ctrl Z gt 5 m g O00 i ry Copy Ctrl C B eal a Flat Copy
415. requirement is of course greater when using Asian languages Therefore watch out for any error messages when compiling Inputting Eastern and Asian characters not ANSI The input of Eastern and Asian characters is not possible on PC based HMI devices Interpretation of Asian characters When using Sm rtAcess and Sm rtService only those characters that are known on the HMI device can be used To be able to use Asian characters these must be configured in the engineering system Additionally configured characters require additional memory on the HMI device Please observe the size of the available memory on the HMI device Configurable character sets With the 270 series HMI devices and with MP 370 alongside the default European and Asian character sets only configurable European character sets can be used Additional configurable character sets for Asian languages cannot be used at present WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O 341 Structure of Multilingual Projects 13 7 Languages in Runtime WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 342 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Project documentation 1 4 14 1 Basics 14 1 1 Project documentation Introduction Application Output media Project documentation serves to print the configuration data of a WinCC flexible project e g a table containing the tags used and their parameters You can output co
416. ring time controlled output e Output repeated at intervals Event controlled output for example e Through a change in the tag value e Through activating a configured button in a WinCC flexible screen e Overflow of a log e Through a WinCC flexible script Configuration of the output 278 Time controlled output is configured through the scheduler The report output can furthermore be controlled by system events which are made available by the scheduler Event controlled output of an object is configured directly at a tag a button in the WinCC flexible screen or at a log Note Te output goes to the default printer with Windows based HMI devices The printer is set in the Control Panel on the HMI device for Windows CE based HMI devices A network printer must be accessable via the printer name In other words the printer must be connected to the network via a DNS server Addressing of a network printer via the IP address is not possible at Windows CE based HMI devices WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O User administration 1 1 11 1 Field of application of the user administration Principle The access security system controls user access to data and functions in runtime to prevent unauthorized operations Safety relevant operations are already limited to specified user groups when a project is being created For this purpose users and user groups are set up and
417. ripting has a programming interface which can be used to access part of project data in runtime The use of runtime scripting is aimed at project planners with knowledge of Visual Basic VB and Visual Basic Script VBS Use of system functions System functions provide support if you wish to assign a function to an operating element e Seta bit in the PLC e Change the value of a tag e Start logging System functions can be configured in function lists and scripts WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO 295 System functions and runtime scripting 12 1 Basics Note If you configure a function or script at the Value change event of an internal tag they will not be executed under certain constellations Example The function IncreaseValue V 1 is configured at the value change event of an internal tag V Version 1 The same function IncreaseValue V 1 is configured at a key If you press the key the value of the tags V is changed If the function at the value change of V is executed the constantly mutually abutting functions make the HMI device inoperable This is why the execution of the function is prevented Version 2 When you make an entry in an input field the value of the tags V is changed In this case the IncreaseValue V 1 function is executed exactly once Use of runtime scripting Scripts Runtime Scripting is available from OP 270
418. ripts cccceeeseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeseeenaeeeeess 311 1A e AGCESS 10 ODJOCIS occ T E sods apteseu an tetvetenstenecancastesnedboesseedeceseidestia 312 12 4 4 Synchronization of tags and objects eceee ee eeeeee ee eete eee ette ee erties ee eaeeeeetaeeeetaeeeeesieeeeneeeeeea 313 124 5 St re SCIIPE indsin a aiaa aaia iS cola heai Giada te chantaey det iE i tad ania ade dada 3 12 5 DG DUGQGIING saiticis diedeis apcdaek candace aadeces tescgtie S 314 12 5 1 Debugging SCIIPIS 6 ssc cccccceceteccccestecevevtnseds cee n ance cov dns cov svaicevsbanseeestiseeeetevevinneeeesane 314 12 5 2 Integrating the debugger asieran a rhea hades A dated dette nade eet 3 12 6 Runtime behavior of functions in runtime 0 0 2 eee eeeee ee eeeeeeeeee eter seeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeees 12 6 1 Completion of the function list in runtime ccceeccceceeeeceee cece ee eeececaeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeeeeneteeeaeeeees 12 6 2 Processing of scripts iN runtime ccc cee ceeeceteceeeeceeeesecseeceeeseesecsaecsassesscrssesseessnseescaeessens sO 12 6 3 Delivery and return of values essensies ea E AEN i 12 6 4 Changing of object properties in runtime With VBS 0000 eee eeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaes 12 6 5 HMI device dependent system functions in the SCript cceceeeseeeeececeeeeeeeeneaeeeeeeseeseaeeeeess 13 Structure of Multilingual Projects eccceeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeaaeee
419. ripts by using system functions or t system through the HMI runtime object For a you can press lt Alt gt lt Right Arrow gt Design com of the programming language VBScript and acc End Sub Sub DecrementTag NOTE To start scripting please press lt Ctrl gt Write scripts by using system functions or t system through the HMI runtime object For a you can press lt Alt gt lt Right Arrow gt Design com WZ Note The Microsoft Script Debugger is not supported when another script debugger system is available on your computer WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 318 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO System functions and runtime scripting 12 5 Debugging Script Debugger Does Not Start When Runtime Starts If you have installed a script debugger and the Start Runtime with Script Debugger command does not run it make the following settings in the Windows registry to set Microsoft Script Debugger as default Just In Time JIT Debugger e HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT CLSID 834128A2 51F 4 1 1D0 8F20 00805F2CD064 Default ScriptDebugSvc Class AppID A87F84D0 7A74 1 1D0 B216 080000185165 e HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT CLSID 834128A2 51F4 11DO0 8F20 00805F2CD064 LocalServer32 Default c Program Files Microsoft Script Debugger msscrdbg exe e HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT CLSID 834128A2 51F4 1 1D0 8F20 00805F2CD064 ProgID Default ScriptDebugSvc ScriptDebugSvec 1 e HKEY_CLASSES_R
420. rizonta vertical l HO OT Valvel Valve2 Valve2 vertical r horizonta horizonta 4 2 F Valye2 Valve2 Valye2 horizonta yvertical l vertical r WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 48 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO WinCC flexible Engineering System 2 2 WinCC flexible user interface Description WinCC flexible distinguishes between global and project libraries e Shared library The global library is not saved in the project database It is written to a file The file is saved by default in the installation directory of WinCC flexible The global library is available for all projects e Project library The project library is stored with the project data in the database and is available only in the project for which it was created You can create folders in both libraries to generate a structure for the objects they contain Furthermore you can always copy elements from a project library to the global library Opening the library in a separate window You can swap the library from the Toolbox View to a separate window To do so select the Library in Toolbox command from the shortcut menu of the Library view Select this command again to restore the library to the Toolbox View WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O 49 WinCC flexible Engineering System 2 2 WinCC flexible user interface 2
421. rmine the output data You can add various objects for the output of data to a report file Some of the toolbox objects are either available with restricted functionality or not at all This depends on the HMI device you are configuring Objects not available in the toolbox are grayed out and cannot be selected You can create separate report files for reporting different types of data You can set the triggering of the output separately for each report file You can choose to trigger the output of data at a specific time or in defined intervals or by other events The modular structure of these features allows you to explicitly configure reports for different requirements Application Examples At the end of a shift create a shift report which contains the batch data and error events of the completed production You can create a report which outputs the recorded production data of a batch production You can create a report which outputs messages of a certain class or type WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 261 Working with reports 10 2 Structure of reports 10 2 Structure of reports Structure of a report The reports in WinCC flexible all have the same basic structure They are subdivided into different sections as shown in the figure below Me tte See Ser aS rb Fe Bt Get Oe Ade ts 12s 1s 13s Page header Detail page 1 Protocol The individual s
422. rocess value Another example of the dynamic response of an object is a button which triggers a particular function Dynamic objects You can assign dynamic properties to any graphic object Programming options e The object changes its appearance Color or flashing properties e The screen object is animated e The object is shown or hidden The following additional options are available for the control elements e Operator control of an object is enabled or locked e The operator control e g clicking of an object triggers an event which is configured to execute a function list Dynamic control and object properties Dynamic control is an element of the object properties Which dynamic control functions and events are actually available depends on the selected object When you copy an object its dynamic control functions are included WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O 165 Creating Screens 5 5 Working with function keys 5 5 Working with function keys Introduction The function key is a physical key on your HMI device and its functions can be configured A function list can be configured on the events Press and Release of the key A function key can be assigned global or local functions Global assignment Global function keys always trigger the same action regardless of the currently displayed screen Global function keys are configured once in the templa
423. rs can be found under Communication Updating tag values in scripts and functions 118 Scripts and system functions always fetch the value of an external tag from Runtime memory At the start of Runtime the actual value will be read from the PLC and written to Runtime memory Next the tag value will be updated to the set cycle time Scripts and functions first access tag values read from the PLC at the previous scan cycle checkpoint WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Working with Tags 4 1 Basics 4 1 3 Internal Tags Introduction Internal tags do not have any connection to the PLC Principle Internal tags are stored in the memory of the HMI device Therefore only this HMI device has read and write access to the internal tags You create internal tags for example in order to execute local calculations You can use all basic data types for internal tags A detailed list of the data types can be found under Basic data types WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 119 Working with Tags 4 2 Elements and basic settings 4 2 Elements and basic settings 4 2 1 Tag editor Introduction In the tag editor you create and configure tags Open To open the tag editor create a new tag or edit a tag displayed in the Object window As an alternative you can open the tag editor by double clicking on the entry
424. rt menu WinCC flexible only allows one project to be open at any time You can work simultaneously on several projects by opening WinCC flexible as many times as necessary Note WinCC flexible also allows you to configure several HMI devices in the same project WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 41 WinCC flexible Engineering System 2 2 WinCC flexible user interface 2 2 WinCC flexible user interface 2 2 1 WinCC flexible User Interface Elements Introduction The WinCC flexible work environment consists of several elements Some of the elements are linked to specific editors which means they are not visible unless the corresponding editor is active Note The layout of the dialog boxes depends on the display settings in the Control Panel The texts are truncated depending on the setting Set up the operating system of your configuration PC to Standard size 96 dpi The settings are available in the Control Panel at Display gt Settings gt Advanced gt General gt DPI Setting Elements of WinCC flexible WinCC flexible consists of the following elements Pua wos W trones he Project view Work area Tool window Property view d Object view 4 Output view fan WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 42 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O WinCC flexible Engineering System 2 2 WinCC flexible user interface
425. rted characters in a tag name are replaced by an underscore _ Changing a connection When you make changes to a connection e g by changing a node a program or a station the symbol association of a tag is not lost The tag association is automatically reassigned to the STEP 7 symbol If a tag can no longer be assigned because the address or symbol does not exist you have the following options e Save the association The tag will be labeled defective The tag in question must be connected manually e Separate tag from symbol This tag will no longer be compared automatically with the STEP 7 symbol WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 420 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Integration of WinCC flexible in STEP 7 20 4 Configuring alarms 20 4 Configuring alarms 20 4 1 Integrating alarms with the alarm numbering procedure Configuring in SIMATIC STEP 7 ALARM_S and ALARM_D are alarm numbering procedures Alarm numbers are assigned automatically during STEP 7 configuration These numbers are used to uniquely assign alarm messages During alarm configuration in STEP 7 the stored alarms and attributes are placed in the STEP 7 configuration data WinCC flexible automatically imports the required data and transfers them later to the HMI device You filter the output of ALARM_S alarms WinCC flexible by means of display classes In the project view select Alarms gt Settings and double click the Alar
426. rty 322 Syntax emphasis 3 Character set Configurable 342 Circle 156 269 pag Circular log 196 Clock Collapse Windows Combining Windows Communication between PLC and tag Ethernet 209 mobile communication 351 using area pointers 204 using tags Communication drivers 204 Communication partner 2 Component parts of a project Configuration configuring Editing objects simultaneously 36 HMI device dependent 34 HMI device independent 35 Movement Movement path PC station Screen change 38 solution oriented concepts 33 target device dependent 34 target device independent 35 Configuring Asian lanquage Event WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Index Toolbar 45 Connecting tags Via application points Via the Tag editor Connection Changing 419 Connection data Format for import 143 Connections editor 206 Consistency check Generation Consistent configuration Control element Logging a change Managing project versions Controller Linking tags Conversion project integrated in STEP 7 408 The password is changed Conversion option save as version 99 Saving as version 9 Converting a project Appearance of alarm classes 100 HMI devices in libraries System requirements after conversion Copy flat 103 Overview Cover sheet Layout Creating Create new project version HMI statio
427. ry in the Scripts group Select the desired text element in the Text element selection list Then select the desired color or define a new color H P Workbench H P Toolbox SW Script editor m Editor options Fonts and colors m Indenting J P Screen editor OLE preferences 308 Settings Font Courier New 10pt Display items Bookmark A Foreground color Class F cenne Constant q Date time VBScript function Tag Inactive selected text_ Sample More colors OK Cancel WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 System functions and runtime scripting 12 3 Elements and basic settings Change code formatting Code formatting can be changed as follows e In order to change the type and size of font click on the Fonts and Colors entry in the Scripts group e In order to change the indentions and tab stops click on the Indent entry in the Scripts group Settings when transferring to an HMI device Using the following device settings for the runtime memory space on the HMI device is saved after the transfer of scripts e Transfer name information e Display script comments Numbers instead of object names are transferred Use this setting only if scripts are tested and free of errors When scripts are tested in the debugger the code will become more clear
428. s Delete or copy one or more whole objects by clicking on the symbol on the left edge of the row This marks the entire table row Automatically filling multiple table rows by dragging In tabular editors of WinCC flexible you can fill in multiple table rows in one operation You can use this function for the following tasks e Creating multiple new objects alarms alarm classes or alarm groups with similar properties Proceed as follows Sort the table so that the table row to be copied is at the bottom Select the first element in the row to be copied Drag the bottom right corner of the selected table element in the lower empty table area e Transferring a property to more than one existing object for example changing the trigger tags Proceed as follows Select the table element with the relevant property Drag the lower right hand corner of the selected table element downwards across the table rows to be modified Copying properties within a table per drag and drop You can use a drag and drop operation to copy an individual property such as an alarm text or acolor from one table element to another WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO 185 Creating an Alarm System 6 2 Elements and basic settings Dragging and dropping from the object window You drag an object from the object window e g a tag to a table cell per drag and drop T
429. s he Recipe I User groups Task 94 WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 Working with projects 3 4 Editing projects Working with the Object View Double click an object in the Object View to open the corresponding editor In addition drag and drop actions can be performed on all objects displayed in the Object View The following drag and drop actions for example are supported e Moving a tag to a process screen in the work area This creates an I O field linked to the tag e Moving a process screen to another process screen in the work area Creates a Change screen button to the relevant process screen 3 4 3 Working in the Project View Principle The representation of the project in the Project View can be used to edit projects The following actions can be executed in the Project View e Double click e Select a command in the shortcut menu e Drag and drop actions Double click A folder is opened by double clicking on the folder in the Project View The editor is opened by double clicking on an editor e g Tag editor or on an object e g a screen in the Project View WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O 95 Working with projects 3 4 Editing projects Shortcut menus After positioning the pointer on an object or folder and clicking the right mouse button the respective shortcut m
430. s you must transfer the license keys for an HMI device back onto the license key diskette in the following cases e Prior to the update of the operating system of a Windows CE HMI device e Prior to restoring a complete database from the backup copy License keys on an HMI device are backed up depending on the HMI device configuration For detailed information refer to the operating instructions of the corresponding HMI device WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO 397 Transfer 19 2 Managing Files on the HMI Device 19 2 5 Installation of options Available options You can install additional options supplied with WinCC flexible on HMI devices at a later time Likewise you can install options purchased separately from WinCC flexible at a later time The HMI device type determines which options can be installed For an overview of available options refer to Introduction to WinCC flexible WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 398 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Integration of WinCC flexible in STEP 7 20 20 1 Basic Principles 20 1 1 Restrictions for integrated projects Introduction The following restrictions apply for the integrated operation of WinCC flexible in STEP 7 or in SIMOTION e Version management can not be used e Upload is not possible e Changes of STEP 7 or SIMOTION are not explicitly identified in the log of
431. s and user groups are created in the engineering system and transferred to the HMI device Users who have the Administration authorization have unlimited access to the user view in order to administer all users Any other user has only limited access to the user view in order to administer himself CAUTION Changes in the user view are effective immediately in runtime Changes in runtime are not updated in the engineering system When the users and user groups are transferred from the engineering system to the HMI device all the changes in the user view are overwritten WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 291 User administration 11 4 Working with the user administration Layout The user view shows the user his password the user group to which he belongs and the log off time in each line User Password Group Logoff time E Note If no user is logged on the user view is empty Clicking in the user view opens the logon dialog box The content of the individual fields is displayed after logon User view of an administrator User Password Group Logoff time Group 1 When an administrator is logged on the user view shows all the users The administrator changes the designation of the user and the password The administrator creates new users and assigns them to an existing user group User view of a user 292 Password
432. s determines whether or not the alarm must be acknowledged Alarm classes essentially define how alarms will appear when shown on the HMI device as well as the acknowledgement behavior WinCC flexible has both predefined alarm classes and the option to configure user defined alarm classes Acknowledgment by the PLC A discrete alarm can be acknowledged by setting a specific bit within a tag in the PLC Acknowledging alarms collectively When configuring alarms you can specify whether alarms must be acknowledged individually by the operator or whether alarms in the same alarm group can be acknowledged together It is helpful to use alarm groups for example when alarms are caused by the same error 6 1 2 3 Alarm classes Alarm classes Alarm classes mainly determine how alarms will appear when they are displayed on the HMI device Alarm classes are also used to group alarms for various means of display WinCC flexible has both predefined alarm classes and the option to configure user defined alarm classes Available alarm class settings The following settings can be defined for each alarm class e Acknowledge Alarms in this class must be acknowledged e Texts colors and flash modes to identify each alarm status when alarms are displayed e Analarm log for logging all events related to alarms in this class e A text placed in front of the alarm number to indicate the alarm class when alarms are displayed on the HMI device e An e ma
433. s from the PLC display of an interval The reading moment can be controlled by setting a bit or by means of a cycle e Logged tag values In runtime the trend view displays the values of a tag from a data log The trend shows the logged values in a particular window in time In runtime the operator can shift the window in time to view the desired information logged data 9 4 2 The structure of a csv file with tag values Introduction In the csv Comma separated value file format table columns name and value of entry are separated by a semicolon Each table row ends with a carriage return Example of a csv file The example shows a file with logged tag values VarName TimeString VarValue Validity Time_ms Var_107 01 04 98 11 02 52 66 00 1 35886460322 81 Var_107 01 04 98 11 02 55 AM 60 00 1 35886460358 73 Var_107 01 04 98 11 02 57 AM 59 00 1 35886460381 22 WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 258 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Logging and displaying tags 9 4 Outputting logged data Structure of a log file in csv format The following values are entered in the individual columns of a WinCC flexible log file Parameter Description VarName Name of the WinCC flexible tag Time string Time stamp as a STRING e g readable date format VarValue Value of the tag Validity Validity 1 value is valid 0 an error occurred e g interrupted process connection
434. s in Runtime Objective You want to enter production data on the HMI device without disturbing the process that is currently underway Therefore the production data should not be transferred to the PLC Requirements e The recipe has been created The recipe has the following settings Synchronize tags is checked or unchecked If Synchronize tags is checked then Tags offline must also be checked This will prevent the recipe tags being transferred automatically between the HMI device and PLC e A recipe screen or mimic with recipe view is available e There is an operating element for saving the recipe data records Sequence HMI device Recipe Memory Recipe view oo i Synchronous Recipe n Recipe tag Recipe screen 7 Offline o PLC 1 Enter the production data in the recipe view or recipe screen 2 Save the modified recipe data record 3 Alternatively save the recipe data record with a new name The recipe data record is saved in the recipe memory of the HMI device WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 245 Structure of a recipe management system 8 4 Scenarios Transfer the recipe data to the PLC The configuration may provide operating elements for transferring recipe data to the PLC 8 4 2 Scenario Manual production sequence Objective A reading device connected to the PLC reads a bar code on the work piece to be processed The recipe dat
435. s irrelevant to the output format since the size of the dynamic objects depends of the existing amount of data Page breaks are inserted consecutively on the pages depending on the amount of data You can only insert one of these objects each into each page of a report Objects which are positioned on the same side below one of these dynamic objects are not output The Print alarm and Print recipe objects are inserted automatically with the width configured for the report The width of the output follows the configured width of the report A new report always only contains one page This page represents a page for the output If required you can insert further pages into the report To do so move the cursor onto the title bar of an existing page and open the pop up menu with the right mouse button The commands Insert page before and Insert page after are used to insert a new page before or after the existing page The pages have a consecutive number assigned to them A maximum of 10 pages is permitted per report If you create more than 10 pages the consecutive numbers of the superfluous pages are placed in pointed brackets for example Page lt 11 gt The superfluous pages are not taken into consideration for the output The Delete page command in the pop up menu of a page is used to delete the selected page WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Working with reports 10 4 W
436. s that are transferred to the HMI device You decide which project languages to transfer to the HMI device depending on your project requirements You must provide appropriate operator control elements so that the operator can switch between languages during runtime WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO 325 Structure of Multilingual Projects 13 3 Language Settings 13 3 Language Settings 13 3 1 Language settings in the operating system Introduction The operating system settings on the configuration computer influence the language management of WinCC flexible in the following areas e Selection of project languages e Regional format of dates times currency and numbers e Displaying ASCII characters Language settings in the Operating System A language is not available as a project language unless it is installed in the operating system e Settings in Windows 2000 You can select the languages you want to install subsequently from the list of Language settings for the system which is located on the General tab in Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Regional Options e Settings in Windows XP You can call the Regional and Language Options dialog using the control panel icon of the same name in Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Date Time Language and Regional Options Afterwards you can install your choice of languages on the L
437. s the logoff time this is logged in the audit trail WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 287 User administration 11 3 Elements and basic settings e Central user administration group The Activate SIMATIC Logon check box is activated A connection is established to the server Users are authorized by means of SIMATIC Logon Encrypted transfer check box checked The data is encrypted before it is transferred to the server Export and import of user administration 288 When the user administration is exported only the current valid password of the user is included in the export file Previous passwords are not saved Therefore after import of the user administration to the HMI device the following rules apply regardless of the runtime security settings e The user can retain the password assigned by the administrator when logging onto the system for the first time e A new password is not compared with previous passwords because no previous passwords are available e The period for expiration of the password begins on import of the user administration An import of the user administration using the ExportImportUserAdministration system function is logged in the audit trail If the administrator is required to confirm the import of the user administration with an electronic signature or a comment configure the additional system function NotifyUse
438. save it on the HMI device You transfer the recipe data to the PLC e Automatic production The control program starts transfer of the recipe data between the PLC and HMI device You can also start the transfer from the HMI device Production is then implemented automatically It is not essential to display or modify the data WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 213 Structure of a recipe management system 8 1 Basics Displaying recipes The recipes can be displayed and edited on the HMI device in the following ways e Teach in mode You optimize production data that was optimized manually on the system e g axis positions or filling volumes The values thus determined are transferred to the HMI device and saved in a recipe data record You can then transfer the saved recipe data back to the PLC at a later date e A recipe view within a process picture e A recipe screen Entering and modifying the recipe data 8 1 2 214 You enter the data in the individual recipe data records and modify it as required The following options are available e Data entry during configuration If the production data exists already you can enter the data in the Recipes editor during recipe configuration e Data entry during runtime If you have to frequently modify production data you can do this directly at runtime Enter the data directly on the HMI device Set the
439. sctcnsvbens deanas idaki raais a anian rad ridse niaan iaie otrais 279 11 1 Field of application of the user administration c ccccccceeeeeeeeeaeceeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeseeennueaeeeeenees 279 11 2 Structure of the user administration ceceeeeeceeeeee cece ee eeeeeneaeceeeeeseaeaeceeeeeseeenaeeeeeeeerseneeae tena 11 3 Elements and basic settings 1133 1 Users user administratio ossseniiranii a EE a a aa 28 11 3 2 Groups user administration 11 3 3 USERS WOPK AICS sresti cealadia shane sandaceasabedunandvets veuavaiceveaatadea tans 11 3 4 User groups work Ard eee cceccceeeeeeneeeeeeeceeeceeeceeeaeeeseeaeeeceeaaeeeeeaaeeeeenaaeeeseaaeeeseeaeeeseneeaaeeeeeeaes 11 3 5 Runtime security SettingS s sensi niiin iani iia aaa iaia aiaa a aaia 11 4 Working with the user administration cece eeeeeee ee teee eee teeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeaeeeseeeeeeseeeaeeeseeaeeneeees 11 4 1 Central user administration using SIMATIC Logon W142 USersiin RUNMMUIMG essiri aaea Gos ra tia tend eect iari Aide aia A iaa T aE IRAS SOR VIEW sotia e cele e die aida a a a aa a a aa 11 4 4 Access security ncccsscr inaenea RAEN EEEE EE System functions and runtime scripting ssssseesseeessssnneennesrrnneerntnstnnnerrnnnenrnnnssnnnannnnnsnnnasennnntnnannnnnna 12 1 Ba SiC Smara a a seta E E A E E E A tat aame dans 12 1 1 System functions and runtime scripting 0 eee cece eeee ee eeee ee eeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeesnaneeaes t212 SYSTOM
440. se components are freely selected or entered for each alarm Optional alarm properties The behavior of an alarm can also be defined by the following properties e Alarm group If an alarm belongs to an alarm group it can be acknowledged along with other alarms in the same group in a single operation WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO 183 Creating an Alarm System 6 2 Elements and basic settings 6 2 2 6 2 2 1 Infotext Operator notes can contain additional information about an alarm Opertor notes are displayed in a separate window on the operator device when the operator presses the lt HELP gt button Automatic reporting In addition to the option of enabling and disabling automatic reporting of alarms for the entire project it is also possible to enable reporting for each individual alarm Acknowledging by the PLC Acknowledgement write tag A discrete alarm can be acknowledged by the PLC program by setting a particular bit within a tag Sending an acknowledgement to the PLC Acknowledgment read tag When a discrete alarm is acknowledged by the operator a particular bit can be set within a tag Editors for Configuring Alarms Basic Principles of Editors Editors for configuring alarms WinCC flexible contains the following tabular editors for configuring alarms Discrete alarms editor for creating and changing discrete alarms Analog alarms e
441. sert graphics or images with the following formats emf wmf dib and bmp You define the size and properties a graphics object should have in the report Note Some of the toolbox objects are either available with restricted functionality or not at all This depends on the HMI device you are configuring Objects not available in the toolbox are grayed out and cannot be selected 10 4 4 Use of report objects Introduction Special objects are available for reports under the Report objects section in the toolbar These objects are intended exclusively for use in reports Overview of the objects Symbol Object Page number Short description Outputs the page number in a report The object only has to be inserted once in a report for example in the page footer Print recipe Outputs recipe data in a report el Print alarm Outputs alarms in a report 270 WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Working with reports 10 5 Reporting alarms 10 5 Reporting alarms 10 5 1 Reporting alarms Introduction You configure a report in WinCC flexible with which you can output the following alarms e Current alarms from the alarm buffer e Alarm from an alarm log Procedure Proceed as follows Add the Print alarm from the toolbox object to a report Select the object in order to have the properties displ
442. size area You can also use the mouse to change the size and position of the Print recipe object in the work area Select the output form as table or line by line output in the Settings area In case of table form output specify the number of characters for the width of the columns in the Column width field The set width affects all columns of the table Select the record elements for the output in the report in the Visible elements area ie m General l a gt Properties yout m Appearance Position amp size Visible elements Layout O i y gt r Vertical position 24 2 V Display headers m Misc azz Height ZT 835 Recipe number A Recipe name Settings Data record number z v Data record name Col Format type Column x A tahane Column width 12 Tag type v Note The height of the Print recipe object configured in the report is irrelevant to the output Since a large amount of data can occur during the report output the Print recipe object is extended dynamically so that all the data arising can be output If the page length is exceeded an automatic page break is carried out WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 277 Working with reports 10 7 Outputting a report 10 7 Introduction Outputting a report WinCC flexible offers the following options for outputting a report Time controlled output for example e Non recur
443. slation of project texts in the editors used to create the individual objects e Central translation of project texts in the Project texts editor e Export of project texts translation in another program and import of translated texts to WinCC flexible Use dictionaries to speed up translation and maintain consistency of translated texts Recommended workflow 1 Set a language you are familiar with as the reference language in the Project languages editor At the start of configuration the reference language should correspond to the editing language 2 Create the project in this language The reference language text is used as the source language for translation 3 In the Project languages editor set one of the other project languages as the editing language 4 Translate all project texts into this language You can perform the translation either directly in the individual editors or in the centralized Project texts editor where all project texts and their points of use are displayed As an alternative you can export the texts to a csv file have them translated and then import the translated texts back into your project 5 If necessary adapt the graphics in the project to reflect the editing language or country specific factors 6 Repeat steps 3 to 5 for all other project languages Result The project can now be compiled and transferred to the HMI device Specify which runtime languages are to be availa
444. ss storage is avoided The most recent project version of the components for operating the plant is especially affected by this WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO 369 Managing project versions 17 2 Basics of version management 17 2 Basics of version management Definition Version management distinguishes between the project itself and the project version A project is a file in the project folder that you can edit in WinCC flexible A project version is a file at the RCS location that is saved there by the version management Project folder Open older project version RCS folder Project A Project versions New project version Copies are exchanged between the project folder and the RCS location in both directions When a new project version is created a copy of the project is saved in a file at the RCS location When an older project version is edited a local copy is created in the project folder Note Project versions can be distinguished by sequential version numbers The version numbers are assigned automatically in order to avoid conflicts that might occur in the branches Introduction lt Empty label gt lt Empty label gt lt Empty label gt KALLIOPE lt Empty label gt KALLIOPE lt Empty label gt KALLIOPE F EJ lt Empty comment gt lt Empty comment gt lt Empty comment gt lt Empty
445. ssigned tag to be used for the bit number 1 v In the column Entry enter the desired graphic for the output Left_Arrow In order to create the next entry double click the next empty line in the table WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 74 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO WinCC flexible Engineering System 2 7 Working with WinCC flexible Left_Arrow Right_Arrow Up_Arrow The entry in the column Value is uniquely assigned by the system In order to change the value click the corresponding entry Open the drop down list box and enter the desired value and range value Note The availability of the graphic list is determined by the HMI device used Behavior of bit number 0 to 31 If Bit selection in text and image lists in the device settings is deactivated and no default value is set the following standard response applies If only one of all set bits is configured the image saved at the configured bit is displayed Table 2 4 Example Significance 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bits set 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 Configured Image 3 Image 2 Image 1 Only the bit with significance 4 is configured Image 2 is displayed The cactus image is displayed in all other cases e No bit is set for example e Several bits are set for example WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO 75 W
446. stem during STEP 7 integration Network parameters and partner parameters are preassigned e When configuring tags and area pointers you can access the STEP 7 symbols directly in WinCC flexible In WinCC flexible simply select the STEP 7 symbol to which you would like to link a tag Symbol changes made in STEP 7 are updated in WinCC flexible e You assign a symbolic name once in STEP 7 and use it in STEP 7 and WinCC flexible e ALARM_S and ALARM_D alarms configured in STEP 7 are supported in WinCC flexible and can be output on the HMI device e You can create a WinCC flexible project without integration in STEP 7 and integrate it in STEP 7 at a later time e You can remove an integrated project from STEP 7 and use it as a standalone project e Ina STEP 7 multiproject communication connections can be configured across projects Installation requirements A specific installation sequence must be followed to integrate WinCC flexible in STEP 7 You must first install the STEP 7 software and then WinCC flexible When installing WinCC flexible it detects an existing STEP 7 installation and automatically installs the support for integration in STEP 7 For user guided installation the Integration in STEP 7 option must be activated If WinCC flexible is already installed and STEP 7 is installed subsequently WinCC flexible must be uninstalled and reinstalled once the STEP 7 installation is complete WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standar
447. system 8 1 Basics Interaction between the components There is interaction between the following components at runtime e Recipe view recipe screen On the HMI device recipes are displayed and edited in the recipe view or in a recipe screen The recipe data records from the internal memory of the HMI device are displayed and edited in the recipe view The values of the recipe tags are displayed and edited in the recipe screen Depending on the configuration the values displayed in the recipe view are synchronized with the values of recipe tags e HMI device recipe memory Recipes are saved in the form of recipe data records in the HMI device s recipe memory e Recipe tags The recipe tags contain recipe data When you edit recipes in a recipe screen the recipe values are stored in recipe tags The point at which the values of the recipe tags are exchanged with the PLC depends on the configuration Note You can synchronize the recipe tags with the recipe data records so that the same values are saved in both Loading and saving recipe data HMI device Recipe view wig i Recipe tag Recipe screen Complete recipe data records are loaded from or saved to the recipe memory on the HMI device in the recipe view The values of the recipe data record are loaded from the recipe memory to the recipe tags in the recipe screen When they are saved the values of the recipe tags are saved to a recipe data
448. system Example A machine has three operating stations One HMI device with average performance connected to one of these operating stations is sufficient Principle The project need not be recreated for this HMI device Simply switch the HMI device in the project instead Functions not supported by the HMI device are hidden The different HMI devices should not differ too much in their resolution and functionality 1 4 4 Use Introduction Reusing configuration objects facilitates configuration work Centralized editing saves a considerable portion of the configuration work when an object is changed Faceplates Simple screen objects can be combined as faceplates to form complex objects For each faceplate it is possible to define which properties of the screen objects can be changed By reusing a faceplate stored in the library modifications can be executed throughout the entire project from a central point WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 35 Introduction to WinCC flexible 7 4 Configuration concepts Libraries All configuration objects can be stored centrally in libraries In addition numerous preconfigured screen objects are supplied which can be used to design process screens appropriately Text Libraries Text libraries can be used to store all configuration texts in several languages If a project is configured in several languages the texts can be translated auto
449. t fe Recipes i Historical data D Reports Jik Test and graphic lists fag Runtime user administration F Device settings Press F1 to get Help From here you can open existing projects or create new ones If you create or open a WinCC flexible object in the SIMATIC Manager WinCC flexible is automatically started for editing the object Select for example the Screens element and create a WinCC flexible screen directly in the SIMATIC Manager The new screen will be created and opened immediately for editing in WinCC flexible Or create a log of changes in which all the changes of the project are documented in a continuous table Changes of STEP 7 are not explicitly identified in the log of changes Note Working with integrated projects depends on the rights of the Windows user who is logged on You need at least write access for this If the Windows user opens an integrated project with only read access he can not make any changes Data cannot be synchronized between STEP 7 and WinCC flexible with read access WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 405 Integration of WinCC flexible in STEP 7 20 1 Basic Principles Representing WinCC flexible objects Global project elements that cannot be edited in the SIMATIC Manager are not displayed examples of such elements include version management and language settings Data that you edit in WinCC flexible w
450. t The alarm text can also contain internal system tags that indicate the cause of the alarm more precisely Only certain properties can be configured for system alarms Types of system alarms There are two types of system alarms e HMI system alarms HMI system alarms are triggered by the HMI device if certain internal states occur or an error occurs during communication to the PLC e System alarms by the PLC These system alarms are generated by the PLC and cannot be configured in WinCC flexible Displaying system alarms on the HMI device In the basic settings for the alarm system you can specify the type of system alarms to be displayed on the HMI device and how long a system alarm will be displayed To display system alarms on the HMI device use the alarm view and alarm window objects Select the System alarm class setting each time one of these objects is configured in a screen or the template WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 178 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Creating an Alarm System 6 7 Basics Device specific system alarms The manual for your HMI device contains a list of the possible system alarms along with the cause and available countermeasures If you contact online support due to an HMI system alarm you will need the alarm number and any system alarm tags 6 1 4 Displaying Alarms 6 1 4 1 Displaying Alarms on the HMI Device Options for displaying alarms on the HMI
451. t Eunn nt Enant nn naaeeeeneea 95 3 4 4 Working in the ODjOCl VIEW sssri iaraa dace nnadecan plecaa AE Head enact 96 3 4 5 Migrating existing Projet iseis reicinn estulec caddie ce esadacs cavsedanedtyeceedaasevebadandchasaraviticeesieres 9 3 5 CONVEMMING POES sacis saxtects ces caus datewatv nde AEE EE ds 99 3 5 1 Projects of different WinCC flexible versions ccccccscccccseesecneceeteenectaecseeneenectseeaeeeseeseaeas 99 3 5 2 Differences between projects of different WinCC flexible versions ccceeeeseeseeeeeeeees 3 5 3 Differentiation of HMI device versions ceceeeceeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeseeaeeeseeaeeeseenaeeeennane eats 3 6 Reusing project data ec ee eeeeeeeeene eect eene ee eee eeeaaeeeeeeaeeeeesaaeeeeeaaeeeeesaaeeeseaaeeeeeesaeeessnaeeeaeeeeseaaes 103 3 6 1 COPYING MECHANISMS faz ssseeses xe cuziaesevenaseeedevensaedestaasnied eeveneees radeant needy asses neta aeataornn ean 3 6 2 Flat CODY i ecdi asc cece lather ieeteteacu E E E TEA 103 3 6 3 COPY enaren a E EAT E E nevis ENAA 3 6 4 PREPIAGCE asasan a E AE AE EAE A a E a E A a 3 6 5 Using iDTarieS sc ivece i ccceteae cies cacsncetacnsnsenta sirs suite se sete su suat luneestduseadetytaseveu laaayeteicavebd sted Ud cvste deeestes 3 6 6 USING TAGS PlALCS yas cs svsicacadececdsccdes aactedicaas a E andiegaadadvusadeeeapiexieenats 3 7 Working with the cross reference 0 0 eeeceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeseneeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeseneeeeeseneeeeseeaeerteeeeeet
452. t Left gt lt Right gt lt Up gt and lt Down gt 4 Press the lt Tab gt key until the operating element you wish to use is selected Alternatively you can operate the recipe view via key combinations 240 WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Structure of a recipe management system 8 3 7 Operator input of the simple recipe view Display mode 8 3 Viewing and editing recipes in Runtime The simple recipe view consists of three areas e Recipe list e Data record list e Element list 1 Juice 2 Beverage 3 Nectar E Simple recipe view example with data record list In the simple recipe view each area is shown separately on the HMI device You can use the shortcut menu to operate each of these display areas The simple recipe view always begins with the recipe list Operation You can use the simple recipe view as follows depending on the configuration e Create change copy or delete recipe data records e Read recipe data records from the PLC or transfer to the PLC Using the simple recipe view Toggle between the display areas and the shortcut menus to operate the simple recipe views The table below shows the operation of the display area Button Key Function lt Enter gt The next lowest display area is opened i e the data record list or the element list lt Esc gt The previous display area opens
453. t can be executed in Runtime without any change of its configuration Screen navigation settings When you save a WinCC flexible project from version WinCC flexible 2005 and later in the version WinCC flexible 2004 SP1 the default settings from the version WinCC flexible 2004 SP1 are used in the screen navigation The use of the earlier default settings may alter the layout of the configured screen navigation For example the settings Adapt to function keys and the settings for additional rows and columns are eliminated for keyboard devices If you save a project in the version WinCC flexible 2005 or an earlier version with WinCC flexible the background color of the screen objects is not used in the navigation bar WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 100 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Working with projects 3 5 Converting projects Scripts in converted projects When you save a project in a different version of WinCC flexible differences in the functional scope of the different versions may result in inconsistencies in a script To eliminate inconsistency of the scripts open the script of the converted version in the Scripts editor then run the Check syntax function OPC connection in converted projects In a converted project you have to manually adjust the OPC Server name and the item name for an OPC connection with the help of the OPC XML Wrapper Version OPC Server name Ite
454. t set that is also configured Table 2 2 Example Significance 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bits set 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 Configured Text 3 Text 2 Text 1 Text 0 Two bits are set and configured The configured default value is displayed e Bit selection in text and graphic lists is activated and no bit is set or if a bit with the smallest value is set then no text is configured Click on an entry in the Default column of the List entries table to display a default value You can also enter Default as Value or activate the Default check box at the General category in the Settings area of the property view WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 71 WinCC flexible Engineering System 2 7 Working with WinCC flexible Least significant bit set 72 If bit selection in text and graphic lists is activated the displayed text is that which was configured for the set bit with the smallest value Table 2 3 Example Significance 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bits set 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 Configured Text 3 Text 2 Text 1 The set bit with the least significance is 2 Text 1 is displayed Nothing is displayed if neither a text nor a default value is configured for the least significant bit The default value is displayed if this is configured Enable the Bit selection in text and graphic lists i
455. ta You create the data source that connects to the database on the same computer that contains the runtime software You then specify the DSN configured here when you create a log in WinCC flexible Using the ODBC interface you can access the database directly with other programs such as MS Access or MS SQL server With the StartProgram system function you can also configure a program call for MS Access for example on the HMI device This does not interrupt the runtime program sequence WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Working with a connection T 7 1 Basics 7 1 1 Communication basics Introduction The data exchange between two communication partners is known as communication The communication partners can be interconnected via direct cable connection or network Communication partners A communication partner can be any node which is capable of communicating and exchanging data with other nodes on the network In the WinCC flexible environment the following nodes can be communication partners e Central modules and communication modules in the automation system can be HMI devices and communication processors in the PC Data transferred between the communication partners may serve different purposes process control process data acquisition reporting states in a process process data logging 7 1 2 Principles of communication Introduction WinCC f
456. tab are described below Recipe data record name The recipe data record name identifies the recipe data record uniquely within a recipe Display name The recipe data record s display name appears at runtime in the recipe view for example You can configure display names in multiple languages You can also assign descriptive names or designations that relate directly to a product such as product numbers Recipe data record number The recipe data record number identifies the recipe data record uniquely within a recipe Entered values You can enter values in a recipe data record during configuration When the project is transferred to the HMI device the recipe data records are also transferred If the HMI device already has data records they are overwritten after a user prompt is displayed and based on the transfer settings Comment You can enter a comment about the recipe data record WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 228 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Structure of a recipe management system 8 2 Elements and basic settings 8 2 4 Recipe settings Introduction You enter recipe settings for a recipe in the property view Properties of recipe entry and recipe data record The display in the property view is dependent on the selection you made in the Recipes editor If you are editing recipe entries or recipe data records on the Elements or Data records tab you can also modify the contents i
457. tag list is accessed Application example Using indirect addressing you could configure the following scenario The operator selects one of several machines from a selection list Depending on the operator s selection data from the selected machine will be displayed in an output field To configure such a scenario configure the index tag for a symbolic IO field You configure the multiplex tag for an IO field Configure the tag list of the multiplex tag to reflect the structure of the selection list If the operator selects another machine the value of the index tag will change The selection field will then display the content of the tag which is pointed to in the tag list in the multiplex tag by the new index value WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 131 Working with Tags 4 4 Array basics 4 4 Array basics Definition Advantages Array data of a uniform data type is successively arranged and is addressed within the address space to allow access to these data by means of an index The array elements are addressed by means of an integer index starting at 0 Each array element is assigned the same properties which are configured at the array tag ee Sa ee ArrayTag DB 1 DBD 0 rrayTag 0 DB1DBDO ArrayTagi1 DB 1 DBD 4 rrayTag 2 DB 1 DBD 8 ArrayTag 3 DB 1 DBD 12 anta Ne 1 DRN 14 4 n 4 i m m m m rrayTag 96 DB 1 DBD ArrayTagl97 DB 1
458. tags or dynamic properties In addition you can link process values of the objects included in the faceplate with dynamic properties To do this first of all set up the respective properties on the interface In this way you can preconfigure the faceplate Every faceplate instance that is generated from this possesses the same dynamic control You can edit this dynamic control only in the Faceplates editor WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O 173 Creating Screens 5 8 Working with faceplates WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 174 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Creating an Alarm System 6 1 Basics 6 1 1 Visualization of process and system alarms Introduction e User defined alarms You configure alarms to display process states or measure and report process data that you receive from the PLC on the HMI device e System alarms System alarms are predefined in these devices to display particular system states in the HMI device or the PLC Both user defined alarms and system alarms are triggered by the HMI device or the PLC and can be displayed on the HMI device Tasks of the alarm system e Visualization on the HMI To report events or states that occur in the plant or the process A state is reported as soon as it occurs e Reporting Alarm events are output to a printer e Logging Alarm results are saved for further editing and evalua
459. tation C Production O Start Screen a Yee Communication 2 Tags a57 Connections e Cycles E ig Alarm Management B Analog Alarms BA Discrete Alarms E3 A Settings iy Recipes Basin wi General gt Properties Settings Add navigation control to screen V Screen number 3 Screen path Device_1 HmiScreenFolder Production Start screen Start Screen The creation of a navigation structure offers the following advantages e Overview of the navigation structure throughout the entire project e Quick creation of direct links between process screens e Automatic creation of the basic screen navigation WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Introduction to WinCC flexible 7 4 Configuration concepts 1 4 6 Totally Integrated Automation Introduction A full automation solution not only involves an HMI system such as WinCC flexible but additional components e g PLC process bus and periphery A particularly sophisticated integration is provided by WinCC flexible with components from the SIMATIC product range and the SIMOTION product range e Consistent configuration and programming e Consistent data retention e Consistent communication Integration in SIMATIC STEP 7 Process tags provide the link for communication between the PLC and HMI system Without the advantage of the Totally Integrated Automation each tag would have to be defined
460. tdnnaetanatanaaana 17 5 3 Version Management Work ATea issssssinsssanniia nannaa EANA AAN k 1754 Properly vViOWonnsnesneiirii ennenen eed a ed ee 17 6 Working with project Versions c c c idet agen aeaa AEEA AA SAAANA seasons 176 1 Comparing Versions sssrlsrinin ranie en e nini ENEE ANEA EAE EE EEEE EE EEN EET Logging CHANGES rissin ene aieea ann ae aa Neca aa aaa aeaa at aa aa e aa aana 18 1 Applications for the Change lOs nerrcicrereersrisrciieeirerineinier riunn een NE RENE EEE 18 2 Change logota projit ssecrnenririenni inienn a EEEE EEEE EE ENE 18 3 Change log of a project SesSsSiON sissrsrioes isinna ansaa AENA EE AN E SAAE 18 4 Change log of a project under version management ssssessssrsssrssssirsstrrssttirssrerrssrrnssrnnnnt 18 5 Elements eani aiia a a A A E E E E E A 38 185 1 Change log editor sersccsccronirniraiiati innin AE anne 38 18 5 2 Change log Operator Controls sisses esaa a a a aa A aa AaS A vind 38 18 5 3 Change log work area oo ee eeeceeeeeeceeneeeeceeeeeeeeeeenaeeeceeaeeeceeaaeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeseaaeeeseeaeeeeenaeeaaeeeeneaaes 38 TRAMNSIOM vay arinena aaa a tosses aeaa abane go ana anaddas Paaa AeA a EERI EEO ETa G 19 1 BASICS nimani nna a a aa e a e a aa aa aaa aa 38 19 1 1 Basic Principles of the Transfer Operation c ccecceceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeesecacaeeeeeesecsnaeeeeeeeseeenaes 38 19 12 Transiter seling senros a E deen aleggeaegaedsweveaueads 388 19 1 3 Transfer via USB sissccccveccedstic
461. te A global assignment applies to all screens of the selected HMI device which are based on this template Global function keys reduce programming considerably because there is no need to assign these global keys to each individual screen Local assignment Local function keys in screens can trigger a different action in each screen This assignment applies only to the screen in which you have defined the function key Using a local function key you can overwrite global function keys and the local function keys of a template Note If a screen with local function keys is overlapped by an alarm view or an alarm window then the function keys are still active in runtime This can particularly be the case with HMI device with small displays e g OP 77B Hotkey assignment You can assign hot keys e g buttons to HMI devices Which hot keys are available depends on the HMI device Graphics When a function key is placed directly next to the display you can assign a graphic to it to make the function of the function key more clear WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 166 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Creating Screens 5 5 Working with function keys Display of assignment Table 5 2 The following table shows which symbols display the assignment of the function keys Function key Description Unassigned Used globally Used locally Used locally local assignment overwrites
462. tem functions to control the Restart of a log during runtime e Logging method Here you can specify what should happen when the log is full You can choose one of the following options Circular log When the log is full the oldest entry will be overwritten Segmented circular log Multiple logs of the same size will be created and filled one after the other When all logs are completely full the oldest log is overwritten Display system message when When a defined fill level is reached a system message is displayed Trigger event The Overflow event is triggered as soon as the log is full e Comment Here you can enter descriptive text regarding the log Events Here you can configure a function list which will be processed whenever an Overflow event is triggered by the overflow of the log WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO 255 Logging and displaying tags 9 3 Logging tab values 9 3 Introduction Principle 256 Logging tab values In runtime tag values can be stored in logs for later evaluation For the logging of a tag you must specify the log in which the values are to be stored how often this should happen and whether only the tag values in a specific value range are to be saved Note The main purpose of data logging is to log the values of external tags However you can also log the values of internal tags Se
463. terl Parameter2 Parameter N If you do not want to evaluate the return value use the call up as you would for a system function or a script without return value Particularities when calling up system functions You can insert system functions and scripts into the script from the Script Wizard The system functions are displayed in the currently configured language in the Script Wizard When calling up a system function in the script always use the English name of the system function SetValue Tagl 64 You can find the English name of the system function in the system function reference under Syntax The set project language is not taken into consideration The following rules apply to the parameter delivery for system functions e Constants If you use a constant as a parameter then the parameter type must correspond to one of the three data types Integer double or string The available constants are shown in a selection list when assigning parameters The usual VBS conventions apply to constants e Tags Independent of the spelling tags are always delivered as Call by reference When the tag to be delivered corresponds to the VBS name conventions the tag name can be delivered without the keyword SmartTags SetValue Tagl 64 or SetValue SmartTags Tagl 64 WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 311 System functions and runtime scripting 12 4 Creat
464. ters although the controller expects inches The entered values are automatically converted before they are forwarded to the controller Using linear scaling the value range 0 100 on the PLC can be mapped to the value range 0 254 on the HMI device 4 3 3 Changing the tag configuration Introduction Principle 126 You can change tags at any time to adapt to changes in the project requirements WinCC flexible offers you several possibilities for changing the configuration of tags e Tag editor Use the tag editor to configure tags when you need a tabular overview of multiple tags In the tag editor for example you can compare and adjust the properties of multiple tags or sort the tags by their properties WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Working with Tags 4 3 Working with Tags e Object list Use the object list if you want to modify a tag directly at the location where it is used To do this click on the button next to the tag that you wish to change in the object list You can then configure the tag in the Property view If you change a tag property and this change causes a conflict with another property it will be highlighted in color to draw your attention to this fact This could happen for example if you connect the tag with a different PLC which does not support this tag type 4 3 4 Tag limit values Introduction You can define a value
465. tes per data record Number of data records per recipe Number of recipe elements in the project Reserved memory for data records in the internal Flash Logs Number of logs Number of entries per log file including all log segments 1 Number of log segments cyclical trigger for tag logging Trends Number of trends Text lists and graphic lists Number of graphic lists Number of text lists Total number of lists Number of entries per text or graphic list Number of graphic objects Number of text elements Scripts Number of scripts MP 270B 32 4000 200 80 512 250 500 200 200 10 300 1000 4000 500 64 KB 20 10000 400 1s 300 400 500 500 256 1000 10000 50 MP 277 32 4000 200 80 512 250 500 200 200 10 300 1000 4000 500 64 KB 20 10000 400 1s 300 400 500 500 256 1000 10000 50 MP 370 32 4000 200 80 1024 500 500 400 400 20 500 1000 4000 1000 128 KB 50 50000 400 1s 400 500 500 500 256 2000 30000 100 MP 377 32 4000 200 80 1024 500 500 400 400 20 500 1000 4000 1000 128 KB 50 50000 400 1s 400 500 500 500 256 2000 30000 100 WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Appendix Communication Number of connections Number of connections based on the SIMATIC HMI http Protocol Maximum number
466. the Project texts editor is enabled all dictionaries are searched for the terms to be translated Terms that are found are entered as suggested translations in the Project texts editor You can then accept or modify the suggested translations Uninstalling user dictionaries The uninstall routine also deletes the user dictionaries You should create a backup copy of the dictionaries to save these for further use 1 Search for the UserDictionary dct file in the C Documents and Settings All Users Application Data Siemens AG WinCC flexible folder 2 Copy the files UserDictionary dct and UserDictionary_log LDF WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO 335 Structure of Multilingual Projects 13 5 Working with dictionaries 13 5 2 System dictionary editor Introduction Terms in the system dictionary are managed in the System dictionary editor You can view and sort the system dictionary in this editor but you cannot make changes Opening the System dictionary editor To open the System dictionary editor double click Dictionaries gt System dictionary in the Localize group in the project view Structure of the System dictionary editor E wens wee XO E Project view Work area Object view Work area The languages are displayed in a table in the work area A separate column is created for each language Each table row contains a
467. the simple recipe view can both be set You can only use the simple recipe view on HMI devices with a display size of less than 6 Recipe screen The recipe screen is a process picture It contains an individual input screen for the recipes The input screen contains IO fields and other screen objects The recipe functionality is implemented with system functions e g for saving recipe data records Note Recipe screen You can configure a recipe screen in the TP 170B and higher models 8 3 2 Recipe view Recipe view The recipe view is an off the shelf screen object used to manage recipe data records The recipe view shows recipe data records in tabular form The recipe view can be represented as follows e As enhanced recipe view e As simple recipe view The operating elements of the enlarged recipe view and the possible operations in the simple recipe view can both be set The values displayed or entered in the recipe view are saved in recipe data records The recipe data records are exchanged with the PLC via system functions WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 231 Structure of a recipe management system 8 3 Viewing and editing recipes in Runtime Enhanced recipe view The figure below shows an example of the enhanced recipe view Recipe Name Orange Data Record Name No Nectar Simple recipe view The simple recipe view consists of three areas
468. the PLC writes again to the trend buffer riting riting writing H Alternating Alternating a mS gong reading i i ui r parme SaNTEE SF SMT SF Bit in trend transfer 1 0 Bit in trend transfer 1 1 Bit in trend transfer 1 0 Bit in trend transfer 2 0 Bit in trend transfer 2 0 Bit in trend transfer 2 1 Time WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Logging and displaying tags 9 2 Elements and basic settings 9 2 Elements and basic settings 9 2 1 Data Logs editor Introduction To log process values they must be assigned to a log You can plan logs and specify their properties in the tabular Data Log editor Open In the project window in the Log group double click on Data logs to open the Data log editor Structure Bi wns wwe NEO bowen ee Soe mee he Project view S amp Work area ai Object view Property view gt gt Data logs editor Work area All the data logs are displayed in a table in the work area You can edit the properties of the data logs in the table cells You can sort the table according to the entries in a column by clicking on the column header WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O 253 Logging and displaying tags 9 2 Elements and basic settings You can show and hide the table columns To do so activate or
469. the clipboard may be inserted into another device in the same project or into a different project If an object with the same name exists in the target project the copied object will be saved under the same name with a consecutive number If several objects with the same name and consecutive number exist the next available number will then be used Parent objects as well as child objects will be inserted Only the object name of the reference will be inserted If a reference of the same name with valid properties exists in the target object the existing reference will then be connected to the copied object Replacing objects 104 Existing objects in the target project may be replaced by the copied objects in the clipboard The complete contents of the copied objects will be compared with the contents of the existing objects in the target project when flat copying Existing objects with the same name will be replaced Containing child objects will also be replaced References are not copied during flat copy Only the object name of the reference will be inserted If a reference of the same name with valid properties exists in the target object the existing reference will then be connected to the copied object WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Working with projects 3 6 Reusing project data 3 6 3 Copy Menu command Copy Insert objects Using the menu command Copy you
470. the graphic object click in the selection field for the tag From the selection field the object list opens offering you all of the available tags with suitable data type in the project for selection lt Undefined gt t im fm Tag_1 wW O Tag_2 YW 2 Tag_3 lt No address gt Tag_4 vw O 4 4 fm 4 m Cycle p S Shift decimal point Object list Select the required tag Confirm your selection by pressing the kA button Working with object lists 66 When a suitable object is not available in the project create a new one using the object list To create a new object click on the New button in the object list A new object is created and the corresponding dialog for configuring this object opens Configure the newly created object and close the configuration dialog WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 WinCC flexible Engineering System 2 7 Working with WinCC flexible You can also open and configure an existing object from the object list Select the object from the object list The E icon for editing is displayed in the right column Click on the icon The corresponding dialog for editing the object opens Edit the properties of the object and close the configuration dialog 2 7 9 Function List Introduction A function list is an attachment of system functions and or scripts which are executed successively when calling the function list You can us
471. the password the new password must be different from the specified number of previous passwords The number of password generations can be from 1 to 5 Warning days field The user is informed that the password will expire the specified number of days before the password expires This setting also valid for SIMATIC Logon applications e Password Security group The password must contain at least one special character check box is checked The user must enter a password containing at least one special character at any position The password must contain at least one special number check box is checked The user must enter a password containing at least one special number at any position Minimum password length field The user must enter a password with a minimum length as specified in the Minimum password length field The length of the password can be set to between 3 and 24 characters e Runtime services group Change of initial password checkbox enabled The user must change the administrator assigned password when logging on for the first time Change of logoff time checkbox enabled Simple user rights are sufficient to change the logoff time The logoff time is the period with no input to the system after which the user administration automatically logs off a user The logoff time for SIMATIC Logon users corresponds with the logoff time of the local user administrator If the user change
472. the project is to be transferred 3 Transfer the compiled project file from the configuration computer to the HMI devices The project file is transferred to all HMI devices for which the respective check box is selected in the transfer settings WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO 387 Transfer 19 1 Basics Transfer mode The HMI device must be in transfer mode for the transfer operation Depending on the type of HMI device transfer mode is enabled as follows e Windows CE systems The HMI device starts up automatically in transfer mode when the device is commissioned the first time The HMI device switches automatically to transfer mode at the start of each additional transfer operation if this transfer option is enabled on the configuration menu of the HMI device If not restart the HMI device and call the transfer applet on the Start menu or configure the Change Operating Mode system function in your project e PCs If the HMI device is a PC that does not yet contain a project you must enable the transfer mode in the RT Loader manually before the first transfer operation Refer to your manual for more detailed instructions on setting the transfer mode on the HMI device HMI device version 19 1 2 Introduction When transferring a project onto the operator device the system checks if the configured operating system version corresponds with the vers
473. the structure you wish to delete 2 Click the Delete icon on the toolbar If the structure to be deleted is being used ina faceplate then a dialog appears The dialog asks if you really want to delete the structure As an option use the Delete command in the Edit menu or of the pop up menu You can also use the lt DEL gt key When deleting a structure the structure elements contained within it are also deleted The entry remains in the allocated tag In the Tag Editor a colored background denotes that by deleting a contradiction in the data type has occurred Change the data type in the Tag Editor Renaming structure elements 1 Under Structures In the project view select the required structure The structure is opened in the Structures Editor 2 Select the structure element that is to be renamed 3 Select the Rename command from the shortcut menu 4 Type in anew name 5 Press lt Enter gt You can also use the lt F2 gt function key to rename the structure WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO 139 Working with Tags 4 7 Working with structures Editing structure elements 1 2 3 Double click the required structure in the Structures area of the project view The structure is opened in the Structures editor Highlight the structure element that is to be edited Change the properties of the structure element e g the data type If
474. them note the following e The number of object instances you can insert depends on the HMI device e lf the target project has less of a function scope than the source project not all objects will necessarily be accepted e If you replace the entire configuration of an HMI device the process can no longer be reversed You can however reverse the replacement of individual objects e f errors occur when replacing in the target project these are reported when the project is generated e The Copy and Replace menu commands cannot be used to replace faceplates and their instances Refer to the Copying faceplates for more information WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO 107 Working with projects 3 6 Reusing project data 3 6 5 Principle Using libraries Libraries enable the multiple use of objects Libraries can be used to save all types of objects from simple graphics up to complex modules WinCC flexible provides different libraries for different tasks e Shared libraries A global library is saved as a file in the file system independent of a project in the installation directory of WinCC flexible by default Global libraries are available for all projects e Project libraries A project library is saved together with the project data in the database and is only available in the project in which it was created It is possible to exchange objects between the t
475. this case a SIMATIC station can act as a router if it has appropriate interfaces to the different subnetworks Modules with communication capability CPUs or CPs used to establish gateways between the subnetworks must have routing capability To transfer a project the WinCC flexible Engineering Station must be connected to an MPI bus or to a PROFIBUS The HMI device to which the project is to be transferred must also be connected to an MPI bus or to a PROFIBUS The routing connection for the transfer is independent of the connection configuration between the HMI device and the automation device in your WinCC flexible project The connection described in this chapter is only for the transfer of a WinCC flexible project to an HMI device over a routing connection Note Please see the technical documentation for the respective component to determine whether a component can be routed Alternatively open the object properties for the component in NetPro or in HW Config The General tab contains a short description of the properties OP 73 OP 73micro OP 77A TP177A und TP 177micro HMI devices do not support S7 Routing for the transfer of projects WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Integration of WinCC flexible in STEP 7 20 2 Configuring communication settings Routing connection for the transfer operation To create a routing connection all stations must be configured
476. tion 6 1 2 User defined alarms 6 1 2 1 Available Alarm Procedures Alarm methods in WinCC flexible An alarm method identifies the type of information that triggers an alarm and therefore the alarm properties WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 175 Creating an Alarm System 6 7 Basics WinCC flexible supports the following alarm procedures e Discrete alarm procedure The HMI device triggers an alarm if a particular bit is set in the PLC Discrete alarms are configured for this purpose in WinCC flexible e Analog alarm procedure The HMI device triggers an alarm if a particular tag violates a limit value Analog alarms are configured for this purpose in WinCC flexible e Alarm number procedure The PLC transfers an alarm number and any associated alarm text to the HMI device Various alarms can be configured for this purpose in the configuration software of the PLC In SIMATIC STEP 7 ALARM_S alarms In SIMOTION SCOUT ALARM_S alarms and technological alarms Acknowledging Alarms For alarms displaying critical or hazardous operating and process states a stipulation can be made requiring the plant operator to acknowledge the alarm If you want to only allow an authorized user to edit alarm messages you should also assign a corresponding user authorization to the ACK button on devices with keypads Alarm states The following alarm statuses ex
477. tion and settings as the tag editor Structure of the property view All property views have a tree structure on the left from which you can select the various property categories The fields for configuring the currently selected properties category are shown on the right in the properties view WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O 121 Working with Tags 4 2 Elements and basic settings Property view for tags General Om General p Properties gt Events General Connection SIMATIC 57 300 Data type Rel Acquisition mode Cyclic continuous w Acquisition cycle hs Array count 1 Settings Name Motor_1 Length 4 You can configure the following properties of the selected tag in the properties view of tags Entry in the tree structure General Fields Name Connection Data type Acquisition type Acquisition cycle Array count Length Properties Addressing for external tags only Icon in integrated configuration only Area DB DBW Limits Hi limit disabled Hi limit constant Upper limit tag Lo limit disabled Lo limit constant Lower limit tag Limit check Generate alarms LinearScaling for external tags only PLC end value PLC start value HMI device end value HMI device start value Basic settings Update code Continuous
478. to do this the object must be set up with this name in the screen VBS Example 02 Dim objCircle HMIRuntime BaseScreenName MainScreen Set objCircle HMIRuntime Screens 1 ScreenItems Circle 01 objCircle BackColor vbGreen WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 312 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O System functions and runtime scripting 12 4 Creating scripts 12 4 4 Synchronization of tags and objects Introduction When an object name is changed in WinCC flexible the change affects the entire project Such changes are identified as Synchronizing in the script Application example In the tag editor you defined the tag Oil Temperature which you want to use in a script During the configuration rename this tag OilTemperatureMotor1 in the tag editor e Script was open during renaming The old tag name is underlined by a blue wavy line in the script When you move the mouse pointer over the tag name Tooltip appears When you click on the button Synchronize the tag is renamed in the script Hi SyntaxHighlighting Sub SyntaxHighlighting 1 This is a comment 2 Dim objScreen HmiRuntime Screens Screen_1 3 Dim objTag SmartTags Mixer RotationSpeed 4 ActivateScreen Screen 1 O 5i SmartTags Value_0 i SmartTags Value_02 Value_O3 Tag e Script was closed during the renaming When the script is reopened the tag is automatically synchronized 12
479. to subsequently perform analyses and make changes to an existing project even if the original configuration device is not available or the source file hmi for the project is no longer available on the configuration device Note You can also use WinCC flexible to transfer the source data file of a ProTool project back from the HMI device onto a configuration computer You can then perform a migration of the ProTool project to a WinCC flexible project The source data of a ProTool project which was configured for an operating device not supported by WinCC flexible must be transferred back to a configuration computer with ProTool Save the ProTool project Then execute a migration using WinCC flexible Requirements for back transfer e The source data file can only be transferred to the HMI device as part of the transfer operation for the compiled project file The source data file is transferred along with the compiled project file to the HMI device if the Enable back transfer check box is selected in the transfer settings for the respective HMI device e There must be sufficient memory available on the HMI device to store the compressed source data file If the source data file for the back transfer operation is provided by a Windows CE device this device must have an external memory card If the HMI device does not have a memory card or if there is insufficient memory space the transfer is terminated However the compiled project f
480. transfer is aborted and a message is displayed You have following possibilities if the version of the operating system in the WinCC flexible project and on the HMI device are different e Update the operating system on the HMI device You can find further information in chapter Operating System Transfer Back transfer of projects When transferring you can transfer the compressed source data file along with the compiled project file to the HMI device This source data file is required for the project to be back transferred from the HMI device to a configuration computer The upload of integrated projects is not supported Use for back transfer 114 Normally only the executable project is transferred to the HMI device during a transfer operation The original project data remain on the configuration device and are thus available to develop the project further in future or for error analysis However on Windows CE devices with an external storage medium and on PCs you can store not only the compiled project file but also the compressed source data file for the project This data file can be used at a later time to recover the project from the HMI device or device by back transferring the source data file to a configuration computer WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Working with projects 3 13 Transferring projects Advantage The back transfer operation enables you
481. ts in the work area The toolbox gives you access to the objects required to configure a report The objects are inserted into the report using the drag and drop function When an object is selected you can edit the properties of the selected object in the Property view When no object is selected you can edit the properties of the active area of a report in the Property view 10 3 2 Using the toolbox view Introduction The toolbox view contains a selection of objects which you can insert into your reports in the Simple objects and Report objects groups If the view of a report is activated in the work area the toolbox only displays those objects which can be used in the report Some of the toolbox objects are either available with restricted functionality or not at all This depends on the HMI device you are configuring Objects not available in the toolbox are grayed out and cannot be selected Changing default properties Default properties are preset for the various object types in the toolbox view When you insert an object from the toolbox view into a report the object takes over these default properties You can customize the default properties of an object type to suit the requirements of your project When you change the default properties of an object type the properties of objects which have already been inserted are retained You should therefore adapt the default properties before you insert the objects The
482. tuations e Large recipes e Allocation of recipe fields to the graphic display of the relevant plant unit e Breakdown of the recipe data into several process pictures Note The values of recipe variables are transferred between the PLC and recipe screen at the following times depending on the configuration e Immediately after modification e When a relevant operating element is used WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 216 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Structure of a recipe management system 8 1 Basics Synchronization between the recipe view and recipe screen Differences may occur during runtime between the values displayed in the recipe view and the values saved in the associated tags when you edit recipes with a recipe view and ina recipe screen To prevent this the recipe data record values must be synchronized with the values of the recipe tags It is always a complete recipe data record that is saved or synchronized Note Recipe tags can only be synchronized in the enhanced recipe view Synchronization only takes place if the Synchronize tags setting is enabled for the recipe 8 1 5 Transfer of recipe data records Flow of data in recipes HMI device ee synchronous i ecipe n Recipe screen Recipe view LC external memory medium WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 217 Structure of a recipe management
483. ture which for example consists of 100 array elements Array elements are tags you can use anywhere in your configuration Array tags can also be used at the following locations e Inthe Alarms editor e Inthe Recipes editor e For address multiplexing e Inthe trend view Examples You can configure an array tag with the corresponding number of array elements to handle multiple tags of the same data type and to save engineering time 1 The array elements can be accessed indirectly by means of a multiplex index tag for example 2 Use these index tags to operate and monitor the array elements 3 Using an array tag you create multiple recipe elements which are interconnected automatically with the corresponding array elements 4 Synchronize the array tag with the PLC be means of the recipe WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 134 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Working with Tags 4 6 Cycle basics 4 6 Cycle basics Introduction Cycles are used to control project sequences that are run at regular intervals Common applications are the acquisition cycle the logging cycle and the update cycle Besides the cycles predefined in WinCC flexible you can also define your own cycles Principle In runtime actions that are performed at regular intervals are controlled by cycles Typical applications for cycles include the acquisition of external tags the logging of data and the updating of screens
484. twice once for the PLC and once for the HMI system The integration of SIMATIC STEP 7 in the configuration user interface leads to a lower error frequency and reduced configuration work During the configuration direct access is made to the STEP7 icon table and the communication settings e The STEP 7 symbol table contains database definitions e g addresses and data types defined during the creation of the control program e The communication settings contain the bus addresses and PLC protocols The communication settings are made in NetPro Integration in SIMOTION SCOUT The integration of SIMOTION SCOUT in WinCC flexible not only provides the advantages of the integration of SIMATIC STEP 7 but also the full integration in the SIMOTION SCOUT user interface WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 39 Introduction to WinCC flexible 1 4 Configuration concepts 40 WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O WinCC flexible Engineering System 2 2 1 Basic Principles on the Programming Interface Principle WinCC flexible is the HMI software for future proof machine oriented automation concepts with comfortable and highly efficient engineering You can access all functions supported by the selected HMI device To start WinCC flexible either click the desktop icon on the programming device or select it from the Windows Sta
485. u can remove objects or use the toolbox to add new objects Faceplate configuration dialog The Faceplate Configuration dialog has the following entries e General Here you can set the name of the faceplate It is under this name that the faceplate will appear in the project library Properties Here you can set the properties of the faceplate The properties included here can be configured in future configurations just the same as all the other object properties You can also create faceplate tags The faceplate tags are available only within the faceplate The faceplate tags are directly interconnected to an object contained within a faceplate e g to an IO field Events Here you can set the events of the faceplate The events included here can be configured in the future configuration work just the same as all the other object properties Script You configure the script for the faceplates here Under Script you can call the system functions or program new functions e g to convert values The script is available only from within the faceplate WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 171 Creating Screens 5 8 Working with faceplates Application example For instance you can define a faceplate operating element The faceplate consists for example of the following electronic modules e Bar e Text field for the name e Output mode e Button In th
486. um of supported devices and WinCC flexible functionality You can always migrate to a higher edition by means of a PowerPack WinCC flexible Advanced WinCC flexible Standard WinCC flexible Compact WinCC flexible Micro WinCC flexible covers a performance spectrum ranging from Micro Panels to simple PC visualization The WinCC flexible functionality is thus comparable with that of products of the ProTool family and the TP Designer You can integrate your existing ProTool projects into WinCC flexible WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 21 Introduction to WinCC flexible 1 2 WinCC flexible system overview Principle The WinCC flexible workbench opens on the screen of your programming computer when you create a new or open an existing project in WinCC flexible The project structure is visualized and the project managed in the Project View Puai wea N trons re Project view Work area Tool window Property view Object view Output view IN WinCC flexible provides a special editor for each configuring task For example you configure the GUI of an HMI device in the Screens editor Or you can use the Discrete Alarms editor to configure alarms All project configuration data related to a project is stored in the project database Migration to another WinCC flexible edition Your current WinCC flexible edition determines which HMI devices you can
487. up number is assigned by the system 6 2 2 7 Basic Settings for the Alarm System Introduction The WinCC flexible alarm system is functional using the default settings You change these default settings if you want to adapt the alarm system behavior to specific plant conditions Open In the project view double click Alarm settings in the Alarms gt Settings group Layout Ew wre NEO bewenee Work area Work area You define the settings for the alarm system in the work area In the System alarms area you select for example the types of system alarms to be displayed on the HMI device In integrated operation further settings can be defined in the Alarm procedures area WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 191 Creating an Alarm System 6 3 Working with alarms 6 3 6 3 1 Introduction Procedure 6 3 2 Working with alarms Reporting alarms You configure a report in WinCC flexible with which you can output the following alarms e Current alarms from the alarm buffer e Alarm from an alarm log Proceed as follows Add the Print alarm from the toolbox object to a report Select the object in order to have the properties displayed in the property view Establish from the property view the data that is to be configured Specify the alarm classes which you want to output for the selected source Specify the sequence of the alarms for th
488. vailable e General e Properties Display WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 267 Working with reports 10 4 Working with reports Requirements e The report whose properties are to be changed must be open e The property view has to be open Editing the report properties To do so move the cursor on the title bar of a report area for example on the title bar of the Page header Open the pop up menu with the right button and select the command Document properties The report properties are displayed in the Property view gx General General gt Properties Report Page IV Enable header IV Enable header V Enable footer V Enable footer Header height 1 5 cm Footer height 1 5 cm Activate the General properties group in the Property view Activate or de activate the output of the report header and report footer in the Report area Activate or de activate the output of the page header and page footer in the Page area If the output of a report area is de activated this area is identified in the title bar by an X Activate the Properties Display properties group in the Property view Gx m General layout gt Properties Layout Page Settings Page Margins m Misc Lo PageFormat A vi Left 1 5 cm PageOrientation Portrait gt Right 1 5 cm Unit Metric gt Top 2 0 cm Page Width cm Bottom 2 0 cm Page Hei
489. vanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO 153 Creating Screens 5 2 Configuring the navigation system Layout Pex weve W benei ep fen Project view Work area j Unused screens Obj ctvigw Property view nee gt Menu bar The menu bar contains all commands required for operating WinCC flexible Any available shortcut keys are indicated next to the menu commands Work area The view of the Screen Navigation editor shows the screen structure The various screens are indicated by rectangles The screen interconnections correspond with your navigating options in runtime The various interconnection types are identified by means of colored lines e Black lines reflect the structured screen interconnections e Green arrows represent direct screen connections irrespective of the structure Shortcut menu The context menu contains commands you can use to configure the Screen Navigation editor and to create open delete copy or rename screens Customizing the layout of the view You have several options of customizing the view of the Screen Navigation editor WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 154 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O Creating Screens 5 2 Configuring the navigation system e You can zoom in or out in the view in order to show either a larger or smaller section of the Screen Navigation editor e You can move this section using the icon in order to displ
490. ve the possibility of filtering the display of alarms via the alarm text of the alarms A character string or the value of a filter variable is used as the filter criterion In Runtime only the alarms whose alarm text contains the configured character string or the character string from the filter variable are displayed The filter only applies to the display in runtime All alarms are retained in the alarm buffer WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O 179 Creating an Alarm System 6 7 Basics Filtering rules For filtering using a fixed filter entry configure a character string in the properties of the Alarm View All the alarms which contain the full character string in the alarm text are displayed in runtime Use a tag for the filter criterion for modifiable filtering The tag can be obtained in runtime e g via an I O field with the desired character string The display of the alarms is filtered in accordance with the contents of the tag Behavior of the filter e Ifthe filter entry is empty all the pending alarms are displayed e The filter tag is superordinate to the permanently configurable character string If a permanently assigned character string and filter tag are assigned during configuration the alarms are filtered by the contents of the filter tag f the filter tag is empty filtering is by the permanently assigned character string e Filtering is case sensitive
491. vent these may be transferred to the Script Wizard using copy and paste Only system functions which are allowed in a script may be filed in the Script Wizard When you transfer system functions which cannot be used in a script using copy and paste these system functions will be marked 12 3 2 Properties of the Script editor Introduction The script editor supports you during programming with functionalities such as IntelliSense emphasized syntax and others For example references to tags can be created with the drag and drop function WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 304 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO System functions and runtime scripting 12 3 Elements and basic settings IntelliSense When you access objects methods or properties of the VBS object models you are supported by IntelliSense Sub Skript_1 1 Dim objTag 2 Set objTag SmartTags Mixer RotationSpeed 3 HMIRunt ime g ActiveScreen eS BaseScreenName eS Language SmartT ags Stop Trace Column 12 char 12 The methods and properties which the given object possesses can be selected from the selection list WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 305 System functions and runtime scripting 12 3 Elements and basic settings Syntax emphasis In the script editor keywords are emphasized by different colors Objects which the script
492. veral steps are involved in data logging e Creating and configuring data logs When creating a data log you must define the following General settings e g name size storage location Behavior at runtime start Behavior when the log is full Configuring the logging of tags You can specify a data log for every tag This log records the values of the tags in runtime and other information e g the time the value was logged Furthermore you can define when and how often the value of the tag should be logged To perform the latter you have the following options On request The tag values are logged by calling the LogTag system function On change The tag values are logged as soon as the operator device detects a change of value in the tag Cyclic continuous The tag values are logged at regular intervals In addition to the standard cycles available in WinCC flexible you can add cycles of your own which are based on the standard cycles Furthermore you can restrict the logging to those values that are within or outside of a tolerance band In this manner you can distribute tag values specifically to different logs for separate analysis later WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Logging and displaying tags 9 3 Logging tab values If you log a tag upon request this tag should not be logged in a sequence log in which the tags cy
493. w Consistency check during generation In order to check consistency of the configuration data start generation by clicking Y or by selecting the Project gt Generator gt Generate menu command The project is created All faulty points in the project are listed in the Output Window Via the entry in the output window you can jump directly to the cause of error Work through the error list from top to bottom During generation it is only the configuration changes that are always regenerated The size of your storage location increases accordingly if many changes are made to the configuration in the course of engineering Delete the temporary files of the project to reduce the size of the project storage location for example to reduce load on memory resources after you completed the project Select the Options gt Delete temporary files menu command to reduce the blown up project database to essentials The Delete temporary files menu command deletes all temporary project data The function also deletes the recoverable compiled project file fwx or srt Run a generation if you want to recover the compiled project file The entire project is recompiled when you run an initial generation after having delete the temporary data The fwx or srt is completely recreated Depending on the size of the project this process can take some time WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1A
494. w using the menu command View Objects The existing objects of the WinCC flexible component are displayed in the object view Use the mouse to select one or more objects whose data you want to output in the object view You can also open the node of a WinCC flexible component in the project view The existing objects of the WinCC flexible component are displayed Select one or more objects using the mouse Outputting the data WinCC flexible provides several options for the output of data After the object selection you start the output via e The button e The Print selection command in the shortcut menu of the selection e The Project gt Print Selection command in the menu bar The configuration data are inserted into the standard layout and opened in the preview window WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 350 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Mobile Wireless 1 5 15 1 Basic principles 15 1 1 Field of application for the Mobile Panel Wireless WLAN in automation The trend towards mobile communications in current and future information technology has led to the use of innovative wireless networks in automation engineering Wireless HMI systems via WLAN provide a user friendly and flexible way to control and monitor practically any location on the machine or in the plant in real time This has significant cost and time benefits in terms of commissioning and maintenance It also greatly increases
495. w object or project lu Projec If a project is already open in WinCC flexible a D new object will be created according to the node that has been selected in the project view Example lf Screen has been selected in the project view a new screen is created If the project or an HMI device has been selected in the SF project view a new HMI device is created If no project is open in WinCC flexible a new project will be created and opened in WinCC ok flexible Alternatively an object can be selected via the arrow next to the button A new object is created If Project is selected a new project is created If a project is already open in WinCC flexible it will be closed following the prompt to save it 3 PE Editing projects The explanation includes references which refer users to a detailed description in the Online Help WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO 77 WinCC flexible Engineering System 2 7 Working with WinCC flexible Online help 2 7 13 Introduction In the Help command menu you can access the online help When you use the Help gt Contents menu command the WinCC flexible Information System opens with an opened table of contents Use the table of contents to navigate to the desired topic Alternatively select the Help gt Index menu command The WinCC flexible Information System opens with an opened index Use the index to searc
496. within the effective range This also requires there to be no other HMI device logged into the same effective range The concept of the effective range ensures the necessary spatial assignment of the Mobile Panel to the machine reliably and with no wireless obstacles This increases the reliability fail safety and access control to create a holistic safety concept within the effective range WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO 353 Mobile Wireless 15 1 Basic principles NOTICE More information in this regard is available in the Failsafe operation function manual You should always assign administrator rights or set up encryption to protect the project containing a Mobile Panel Wireless for fail safe operation against unauthorized access Transponders form zones and effective ranges 354 Zones 1 and effective ranges 2 are formed by the spatial assignment of transponders 3 to the machine 4 or plant NOTICE To ensure that the login and machine operator input are clear one effective range must not overlap another effective range and a zone must not overlap another zone This requires each transponder to have just one effective range and one zone assigned to it Effective ranges and zones have totally different functions e You configure effective ranges and zones separately from one another e Effective ranges and zones can overlap
497. wo libraries Objects in libraries All objects which can be moved by means of drag and drop can be saved in libraries e g graphic objects screens alarms and tags When a object which has references to other objects is saved in the library it is possible to select whether the referenced objects should also be saved in the library A reference object can be a tag for example for an I O field Configuration of libraries 3 6 6 Principle 108 The following configuration options are provided for libraries e Creating folders to organize the objects e Changing the display of the library objects It is possible for example to display small icons or library objects without names e Multilanguage configuration of library objects Using faceplates Faceplates are groups of preconfigured objects Faceplates extend the number of screen objects available and reduce the amount of work for configuration Faceplates are created and edited in the Faceplate Designer This editor is used to define the faceplate properties which can be configured when put in use These properties can be the properties of the objects contained In addition all of the places where a faceplate is used can be managed centrally in the Faceplate editor After changing the faceplate either all or only selected place where a faceplate is used can be updated WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO Workin
498. xer RotationSpeed 4 ActivateScreen Screen 1 O 5 werage SmartTags Value_O9 SmartTags Value_02 Value_03 Tag For known keywords Tooltip shows the type of keyword e Parameterlnfo The Parameterlnfo offers information concerning the syntax and the parameters of a system function or a VBS standard function WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO 307 System functions and runtime scripting 12 3 Elements and basic settings e Context sensitive help The context sensitive help offers information concerning system functions VBScript language elements objects etc If information about an object a method or a property is needed move the mouse pointer over the corresponding keyword and press lt F1 gt This allows you to reach the corresponding reference description in the online help 12 3 3 Basic settings Introduction You can adjust the basic settings of the script editor individually Select the command Settings in the Tools menu Change the basic settings in the Scripts group Change editor settings The editor settings in the script can be changed For example you can stop the display of the infotext in the script In order to change the editor settings click on the Editor settings entry in the Scripts group Changing syntax emphasis The pre set color for every text element can be changed Click on the Fonts and Colors ent
499. xt in the script With this setting the script executes the next statement when a runtime error is detected You can check the error code with the error object in the next line In order to stop the processing of runtime errors in the script use the instruction On Error Goto 0 Additional information about error processing is found in the Microsoft VBS help in the information system e Logical error A logical error occurs when the event you are expecting does not take place e g because a condition was checked incorrectly In order to resolve logical errors go through the script step by step in order to identify the part of the script which does not function 12 5 2 Integrating the debugger Installing a Script Debugger for WinCC flexible A script debugger must be installed in order to search for errors in scripts with WinCC flexible The following script debuggers have been tested and released e Microsoft Script Editor by Office XP WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 314 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0O System functions and runtime scripting 12 5 Debugging e Microsoft Script Debugger An installed script debugger is either started automatically when a runtime error occurs in a script or manually with the command Start runtime system with script debugger Microsoft Script Editor The Microsoft Office XP component Microsoft Script Editor contains such a script debugger If the default setti
500. xt are the drag and drop function and the call of commands from the shortcut menu Drag and drop Drag and drop makes configuration much easier For example when you drag and drop a variable from the Object View to a process screen the system automatically generates an I O field which is logically linked to the tag To configure a screen change drag and drop the required process screen onto the process screen shown in the work area This generates a button configured to contain a corresponding screen change function The drag and drop function is available for all objects in the project view and Object view The mouse pointer shows you whether drag and drop is supported at the destination or not G Drag and drop is not possible WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced 56 User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 WinCC flexible Engineering System 2 5 Working with the Mouse Shortcut menu In WinCC flexible you can right click any object to open a shortcut menu The shortcut menu contains the commands you can execute in the relevant situation la Project weer Device_1 WinCC flexible RT Eee J Add Screen X C4 Add folder gt K Undo Creating of Screen Imagen Ctrl Z gt Pie Cor h Te copy Ctrl C Sle lf Flat Copy Uy Ala A aR E Ey k ia Print Selection Ctrl Ww F isl Mi Ser Cross Reference a Bp Rep Export te Tex i E a Rur Import E De GMS Lanqudeecceunae
501. you wish to change the properties of a structure tag then you must always change the properties of the structure element Copying and inserting structure elements 1 2 3 4 Double click the required structure in the Structures area of the project view The structure is opened in the Structures editor Highlight the structure element that is to be copied Click the Copy toolbar icon Click the Paste toolbar icon You can also use the Copy and Paste commands of the Edit or shortcut menu You can also use the lt CTRL C gt and lt CTRL V gt keystrokes A copy of the original structure element is inserted in the work area The name of the structure element is provided with a consecutive number Deleting structure elements 140 1 2 3 Double click the required structure in the Structures area of the project view The structure is opened in the Structures editor Highlight the structure element that is to be deleted Click the Delete icon on the toolbar You can also use the Delete command from the Edit or shortcut menu The lt DEL gt key can also be used WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2AB0 Working with Tags 4 8 Importing Tags 4 8 Importing Tags 4 8 1 Importing Tags in WinCC flexible Introduction WinCC flexible 2005 or higher supports the import of tags from an external data source To successfully accomplish this t
502. ypes and the data types for a connection to S7 controllers can be found under Data types if connecting to S7 Information about data types which are available for connection to other PLCs can be found in the documentation about the respective communication drivers A change from communications driver A to communications driver B may cause discrepancy in the following special situations e The data type is recognized but the address range cannot be interpreted In this case the default address range of the data type is used e No suitable data type is found The default data type of the communications driver will be used in such a situation The acquisition cycle determines when the HMI device will read the process value of an external tag Normally the value is updated at regular intervals as long as the tag is shown in the process screen or is logged The interval for regular updates is set with the acquisition cycle You can either choose a default acquisition cycle or define a user specific cycle An external tag can also be updated independent of the display in the process screen for example by triggering a value change for the tag functions Please note that frequent read operations increase communication load You can configure a linear scaling for numerical data types The data in a PLC for an external tag can be mapped to a specific value range in the WinCC flexible project Example The user enters length dimensions in centime
503. ystem Local tags can be defined in the script using the Dim statement Local tags can be used only within the script Therefore they do not appear in the Tags editor For example in the script a local tag is used as counter in a Forstatement VBS Example 05 Dim intCount For intCount 1 To 10 Instruction Next Note You have to use a local tag if you need a tag for a For Project tags are not allowed within a For WinCC flexible 2007 Compact Standard Advanced User s Manual 07 2007 6AV6691 1AB01 2ABO System functions and runtime scripting 12 4 Creating scripts Access to tags in a script If in the script you use a tag the name of which is only compiled during the running time in the script then configure this tag with the Cyclically continued acquisition mode If you configure the tags with the Cyclic on use acquisition mode you have to ensure that the script is only called in the screen where the tag is also used in another place in an IO field for example 12 4 2 Call up of scripts and system functions in the scripts Principle System functions and other scripts can be called up in a script Call up a system function or a script without return value Sub as follows lt Function name gt Parameterl Parameter2 A system function or a script with return value Functiony is called up by means of assignment to an expression lt Expression gt lt Function name gt Parame

"user manual"

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

&quot;user manual&quot;

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

"user manual"